Unigraphics NX Design Applications Using NX MT10055 (Student Guide)

Design Applications Using NX
Student Guide February 2006 MT10055 NX 4
Publication Number mt10055_g NX 4
Manual History
Manual Revision
Software Version Version 15.0 Version 16.0 Version 17.0 Version 18.0 NX NX 2 NX 3 NX 4
Publication Date February 1999 January 2000 November 2000 August 2001 September 2002 December 2003 November 2004 February 2006
This edition obsoletes all previous editions. Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notice This software and related documentation are proprietary to UGS Corp. 2006 UGS Corp. All Rights Reserved. All trademarks belong to their respective holders.
2006 UGS Corp. All Rights Reserved. Produced in the United States of America. 2 Design Applications Using NX mt10055_g NX 4
Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use This Course . . . . . Common Symbols . . . . . . . Class Standards . . . . . . . . About Part Files . . . . . . . . Classroom System Information Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . Roles, Toolbars, and Menus . . . Set the Role for this Course . . . Student Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 11 12 13 14 14 15 16 17 19 21 22
Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Inferred Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Dragging Sketch Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Adding Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Constraint Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketch Operations Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Projecting Objects into a Sketch . . . . . . . . . Activity - Auto Creating Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Existing Curves to a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Adding and Constraining Curves . . . . . . . . Activity - Design Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Another Design Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Constraining the Perimeter of a Sketch . . . Activity - Controlling Heat Transfer in a Cooling Pipe Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 . 1-5 . 1-8 1-11 1-13 1-16 1-17 1-26 1-33 1-34 1-36 1-43 1-47 1-48 1-51 1-52 1-53 1-56 1-61 1-70
Constraint Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Alternate Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Design Applications Using NX 3
Contents
Activity - Alternate Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Sketches Where They Are Needed . . . . . Activity - Creating and Positioning a Sketch Activity - Positioning a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Using Positioning Dimensions . . . Reattaching Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Reattaching a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Moving Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring in a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Mirroring Sketch Objects . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. 2-4 2-11 2-12 2-20 2-28 2-38 2-40 2-41 2-45 2-62 2-63 2-66
Additional Sketching Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Edit Dening String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting or Suppressing Sketches . . . . . . . . . Activity - Edit Dening String . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Suppressing and Deleting Sketches Animate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Animating Sketch Dimensions . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 . 3-4 . 3-5 3-10 3-14 3-15 3-19
Basic Free Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketch on Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Embedded Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Creating a V-Sweep with Sketch on Path Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 . 4-4 . 4-7 . 4-8 4-10 4-12 4-26
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Expressions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expression List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listed Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Working with Expressions . . . . . Activity Dimensionality in Expressions . . Conditional Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppression by Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppress by Expression Dialog Options . . . Activity - Creating Conditional Expressions Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing Measurements . . . . . Measures and Measurements . . . . . . . . . .
4 Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 5-2 . 5-3 . 5-5 . 5-7 5-11 5-17 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-26 5-33 5-34 5-37
mt10055_g NX 4
Contents
Activity - Applying Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Duplicating Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Mirror Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Rectangular Instance Arrays & Mirrored Body Mirror Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Creating and Editing Mirror Features . . . . . . . Copy/Paste Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expression Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Copying a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 . 6-4 . 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-17 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-26
Assembly Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Assemblies Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemblies pull-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pop-Up Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag and Drop in the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Activating and Using the Assembly Navigator Specifying Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Navigator Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part File Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Assemblies User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 . 7-3 . 7-4 . 7-5 . 7-7 . 7-9 7-10 7-13 7-14 7-18 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-25 7-26 7-29
Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 General Concepts Concerning Reference Sets Default Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Model Reference Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Lightweight Reference Set . . . . . . . . The Simplied Reference Set . . . . . . . . . . User Dened Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. 8-2 . 8-3 . 8-5 . 8-7 . 8-8 . 8-9 8-12

5
Contents
Reference Set Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Taking a look at Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Reference Sets with the Assembly Navigator Replacing Reference Sets for Selected Components . . . Replacing Reference Sets in Context of an Assembly . . Activity - Replacing Reference Sets in an Assembly . . . Editing Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Options and Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dening Search Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Load Options and Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-15 8-16 8-19 8-20 8-21 8-22 8-23 8-27 8-28 8-29 8-31 8-32 8-43
Deform Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Deform Part Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dening Deformable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deforming a Component in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Deformed Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity Making a Part Deformable Using a Guide String Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 . 9-3 . 9-4 . 9-5 . 9-6 . 9-8 . 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-13 9-19
Top-Down Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Top-Down Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Creation of a New Component . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Top-Down Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . Considerations of Selecting Data During Component Creation Designing in Context of an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketching in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Interpart Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Designing in Context of an Assembly . . . . . . . . Localized Interpart Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interpart Modeling Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part in Process Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mold/Die Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - In Process Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - WAVE Geometry Linker - Mirror Body . . . . . . . Editing Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Editing a Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 10-2 . 10-3 . 10-5 . 10-6 . 10-8 . 10-9 10-10 10-11 10-14 10-25 10-26 10-27 10-28 10-29 10-32 10-36 10-38
mt10055_g NX 4
Contents
Activity - Editing the Timestamp of a Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Interpart Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Interpart Expressions . . . . . . . . Overriding Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Interpart Expressions . . . . . . . . Edit Interpart References . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Creating Interpart Expressions Partial Loading Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips and Recommended Practices . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 . 11-3 . 11-4 . 11-6 . 11-8 . 11-9 11-10 11-14 11-15 11-16
Assembly Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Assembly Arrangements Dialog . . . . . . . . The Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrangements Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrangements Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity Arrangements in the Vise Assembly Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 . 12-4 . 12-6 . 12-7 . 12-8 12-10 12-22
Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Activity - Capturing Design Intent with Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Extracting and Simplifying Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Extract Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Extracted Geometry . . . Activity - Extracting a Solid . Simplify Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Simplifying a Solid Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 . 14-4 . 14-5 . 14-7 14-11 14-15
Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Offset Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Offset a Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Internal & External Draft . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Creating a Windshield Fluid Reservoir Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. 15-2 . 15-3 . 15-7 15-11 15-21 15-27 15-37

7
Contents
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Activity - Windshield Fluid Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Variable Radius Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Variable Radius Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Activity - Creating a Variable Radius Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16 Remember Mating Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Remember Mating Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Activity - Remember Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9 Component Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1 Component Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Component Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Creating a Circular Component Array . . . . . . . . . . . Feature-Based Component Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Creating Component Arrays From Feature Instances Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 . 19-4 . 19-5 . 19-6 . 19-8 19-14
Family of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1 Capabilities and General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Part Family Members to an Assembly . . . Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining Information on Family Members . . . . . Activity - Adding a Standard Part to an Assembly Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2 . 20-4 . 20-5 . 20-7 . 20-8 20-13
Revisions and Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1 File Versioning/Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revising a Component and Assembly Using Save As The Part Modications Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Assembly Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Revising Components Using "Save As" . . . Load Options and Revisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partial Loading Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing Assembly Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . Reopening Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substituting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substituting Components Using Substitute . . . . Substituting Components Using Reopen . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. 21-2 . 21-3 . 21-5 . 21-7 . 21-9 21-13 21-16 21-17 21-18 21-20 21-22 21-24
mt10055_g NX 4
Contents
Substituting Components Using the Assembly Navigator Activity - Substituting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dening Alternates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Dening and Verifying Alternates . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
21-25 21-26 21-31 21-32 21-33 21-40
Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Project 1 . Project 2 . Project 3 . Project 4 . Project 5 . Project 6 . Project 7 . Project 8 . Project 9 . Project 10 Project 11 Project 12 Project 13 Project 14 Project 15 Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-16 A-17
System Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Defaults Levels . . . . . . . . Setting Customer Defaults . . . . . . . USER, GROUP, and SITE directories Managing Your Changes . . . . . . . . . Updating to a New Release of NX . . Interpart Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Versioning Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B-2 B-3 B-6 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-14
Expression Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precedence and Associativity Legacy Unit Conversion . . . Built-in Functions . . . . . . . . ... ... .. ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
Contents
Variable Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 Repositioning and Variable Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 Activity Dening Variable Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38 Dening a Family of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 Part Families Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Part Family Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity - Creating a Family of Standard Parts (Excel) Activity - Creating a Family of Standard Parts (Xess) Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2 . E-5 . E-8 E-13 E-17
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
10
mt10055_g NX 4
Overview
Intended Audience
This course is for designers, engineers, and CAD/CAM managers who need to create parametric solid models that capture design intent.
Course Objectives
After you successfully complete this course, you should be able to: Constrain sketches Create interpart expressions Copy/paste a feature Create reference sets Manage assembly arrangements Create offset curves Create draft Create a variable blend Create component arrays Dene a revision scheme Understand component substitution methods Create expressions with measurements Apply the load options Design in context Use the WAVE geometry linker Create an offset face Trim a solid body. Dene remembered mating constraints Apply top down assembly modeling
11
Prerequisites
Prerequisites
Practical Applications of NX course Basic understanding of parametric/explicit modeling, and the Master Model Concept. Working knowledge of the following: NX interface Part le saving conventions Basic sketching and constraining techniques. Extruded and Revolved Features with optional Offset WCS & Absolute coordinate systems Layer control Form Features & positioning dimensions Simple blends
12
mt10055_g NX 4
Overview
How to Use This Course

It is important that you use the Student Guide in the sequence presented. Always read the Cue and Status information while working through activities and as you perform your regular duties. Activities have the following format: Step 1: This is an example of a step. Steps specify what will be accomplished This is an example of an action bullet. Action bullets detail how to complete the step. As you gain skill you may need only the step text. The general format for lesson content is: presentation one or more activity workbook project Projects allow you to test your new skills without detailed instruction. Project time is your opportunity to consult with your instructor if you need additional information. summary
Learning Tips ask questions conrm important facts by restating them in your own words
13
How to Use This Course
Common Symbols
As you work through the student manual and workbook special symbols are often used to denote certain kinds of information. Design Intent information about the task and what must be accomplished. Tip useful information such as advice on how to make a task ow more smoothly. Note miscellaneous noteworthy information. Example used to show a possible way that the current topic of discussion could be used. Caution important reminders or information about a task. Warning informs you of information that is essential to your success.
Class Standards
Layer Standards used in parts supplied for this class allow you to predict the organization of data.
14
mt10055_g NX 4
Overview
About Part Files

To help identify models without requiring someone to open a part le, you could establish standard names that describe various types of les you use. For example, most assembly les associated with this class have _assm appended to the name. Currently you can choose up to 124 characters for le names. The extension .prt is automatically added, for 128 characters in total. From time to time you may be asked to save a part as ***_name. When you see that instruction, *** always refers to your initials. Use the Preview option on the FileOpen dialog to see a view that represents parts. Previews are usually created upon FileSave. You can also use the Preview page of the FileProperties dialog to save the current view as a preview.
15
Classroom System Information
Classroom System Information

Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the classroom: Student Login: User name:
Password:
Work Directory:
Parts Directory:
Instructor:
Date:
16
mt10055_g NX 4
Overview
Layer Standards
The parts used in this course were built to a standard layer category organization. Layer Categories make it easy for others to discover how your data is organized. Using standards make the organization of data intuitive; once you learn the standard you automatically know where frequently used data types are located in the layer structure. Layer Organization of Parts Used in this Course Layers 1100 114 1520 2150 5160 6180 81100 101120 101105 121150 151180 181190 191255 Categories MODEL SOLIDS LINKED_OBJECTS SKETCHES CURVES DATUMS SHEETS DRAFTING FORMATS SCENARIO MFG QA no category assigned Description all construction and nal geometry for release with the part solid bodies any WAVE linked objects all sketches not embedded in features smart curves used in construction planes, axes, and coordinate systems sheet bodies all drafting objects drawing borders, title boxes motion or structures objects CAM objects quality verication objects
17
Layer Standards
Implementing the Standard There are several ways to implement or enforce layer standards. Some of those methods are: Create NX Open programs to create standard part organization and verify it upon release. Use a Macro to create layer categories: ToolsMacroPlayback. In NX Manager, your administrator can enforce company layer standards simply by providing standard categories in all seed parts. Outside NX Manager, you can still use seed parts. Whenever you create a new part: You can open a seed part and do a Save As. You can Import the seed part into your parts using FileImportPart. In this course you should use a layer organization method you anticipate using in your work. There is a macro in your home\application folder, set_layers.macro, that creates the above layer categories. There are seed parts in your parts folder that you may import or save as, layer_seed_mm and layer_seed_inch.
18
mt10055_g NX 4
Overview
Roles, Toolbars, and Menus

This course was designed to use the Essentials with Full Menus role. Roles NX has many advanced capabilities, but while learning you may want to use a smaller set of tools.
As you progress you may want to use more functions.
Roles tailor your interface by hiding tools you are unlikely to use in a given role. The role you choose affects the number of icons that appear on toolbars, and the number of pull-down menu items you will see. Choosing a Role To activate a role: Open the Roles palette on the resource bar Click the role you want. Acknowledge the warning message.
19
Roles, Toolbars, and Menus
Customize NX provides customization tools to ne tune your interface. You can: Change the size of icons displayed on menus and toolbars optionally display text below icons on toolbars remove tools you never use move tools to a different location by dragging them
To add a command to a menu or toolbar: Click MB3 on any blank toolbar area. Choose Customize (last choice at the bottom of the list) On the Commands page, select a menu or toolbar in the left window. Drag a command from the right window to a toolbar or menu.
Some menu items are hidden by default. We say these items are below the fold. You can set menus to always display all choices on the Options page of the Customize dialog.
Toolbars Icons that are available for a toolbar might not be displayed by default. You can choose which icons are displayed using Add and Remove buttons under Toolbar Options on any toolbar.
20
mt10055_g NX 4
Overview
Set the Role for this Course

This role congures the toolbars and menus as they were used in designing this course. Step 1: Set the Essentials with Full Menus role. Choose the Roles tab on the NX resource bar. Expand the System Defaults area of the palette.
Choose Essentials with Full Menus. Choose OK to acknowledge the warning message. Step 2: Use Add or Remove Buttons to add some commonly used icons that are not in the Essentials with Full Menus role. Create a new part (any name will do; you will not save it) and StartModeling. On the Selection toolbar add Deselect All. On the Utility toolbar add Work Layer and Layer Settings. Choose StartAssemblies. On the Assemblies toolbar add Create New Component and WAVE Geometry Linker. Close the part without saving. The options you just activated will stay in effect throughout the class unless you change them, change role settings, or switch login identities. From time to time your instructor may suggest other toolbar icons to activate.
21
Student Responsibilities
Student Responsibilities
Be on time. Be considerate of the needs of other students. Participate in class. Stick with the subject matter. Listen attentively and take notes. Practice on the job what you have learned. Have Fun!
22
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
Constraining Sketches
Purpose This lesson describes creating and modifying sketch constraints. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create Geometric Constraints Work with System Applied Constraints Auto Create and Display Constraints Work with Constraint Conditions Convert Sketch Curves To Reference Curves Update The Model Add Objects to Sketch Constrain the Perimeter of a Sketch
1-1
Constraints NX provides a variety of feedback about a sketch. You can see color coded information about the constraint condition of a curve, list current constraints, or view information about how many constraints are needed to fully constrain the sketch.
Dimensional Constraints
Design Intent The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent. You do this by creating rules, called constraints, that dictate how sketch objects will react to changes. As many or as few constraints as necessary may be applied to cause the sketch prole to update in the manner desired. NX sketches are not required to be fully constrained. There is one case where a sketch should always be fully constrained: a sketch-on-path used for a variational sweep. Creating Sketch Dimensions A dimension controls the size of a sketch object, such as the length of a line or radius of an arc, or the relationship between two objects, such as a distance or angle. Dimensions appear in the graphics window. Unlike drafting dimensions, changing the value of the sketch dimensions changes the shape and or size of dimensioned objects. This changes any features, such as extrude or revolve features, that the sketch curves control.
1-2
mt10055_g NX 4
1
Dimensions may be applied by using the dimension menu on the Sketch Constraints toolbar. 1 The default Inferred Dimensions icon infers the dimension type based on the objects that are selected and the position of the cursor. 2 The other dimension icons are useful when the system is unable to infer the desired dimension type. These different options are "lters" that when selected will only allow a specic dimension type to be created. Certain types of geometry may not be selectable if they do not coincide with the dimension type selected.
As dimensions are being created, the dimension, its extension lines, and arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected. Drag the dimension until it is the correct type, for example horizontal or parallel. Place the dimension by clicking MB1. Click and drag the dimension to the desired location.
Sometimes, a dimension type may be inferred before all of the geometry has been selected. In this case, continue to select geometry until the correct dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for the dimension type you desire and select the geometry again.
1-3
An expression is also created for each dimension. The name (1) and value (2) of the expression appear in a text box in the graphics window after the dimension has been placed. You may key in a new name or value. Press the Enter key to activate the change.
1-4
mt10055_g NX 4
1
Geometric Constraints
A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch object (such as dening a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship between two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or perpendicular, or that several arcs have the same radius). Unlike dimensional constraints, geometric constraints have no editable numeric values; a constant angle constraint, for instance, simply dictates that the line stay at the angle it is at when the constraint is applied. To create geometric constraints, choose the Constraints icon, select the objects, and choose the desired constraint from the icon option bar that appears in the upper left corner of the graphics window. Only icons for constraints that apply to the selected geometry will be displayed.
You may also choose the constraint from an MB3 pop-up menu after selecting the geometry.
To assign multiple constraints at one time, press the Ctrl key while selecting the objects. The icon option bar for the constraints will then remain in the upper left corner of the graphics window after you choose the rst constraint. You can use MB2 or the Esc key to cancel creation of constraints.
1-5
Types of Geometric Constraints Coincident Collinear Constrains two or more points as having the same location. Constrains two or more linear objects as lying on or passing through the same theoretical straight line. Constrains two or more arcs as having the same center. Constrains a line so as to remain in its current orientation without input of an angular value. Constrains a line so as to remain at its current length without input of a length value. Constrains two or more lines as being the same length. Constrains two or more arcs as having the same radius value. Constrains unchangeable characteristics for geometry, depending on the type of geometry selected. You can apply a Fixed constraint to an individual sketch point or to an entire object. Constrains a line as being parallel to the FCS X-axis. Constrains the location of a point to be equidistant from both ends of the curve. Select the curve anywhere other than at its end points. Parallel Perpendicular Point on Curve Point on String Constrains two or more linear objects as being parallel to each other. Constrains two linear objects as being perpendicular to each other. Constrains the location of a point as lying on the path or projection of a curve. Constrains the location of a point as lying on an extracted string.
Concentric Constant Angle Constant Length
Equal Length Equal Radius Fixed
Horizontal Midpoint
1-6
mt10055_g NX 4
1
Scale, NonUniform Scale, Uniform When applied, a spline will scale in the horizontal direction while keeping the original dimensions in the vertical direction during modication. A spline will scale proportionally in both the horizontal and vertical when the horizontal length changes. Constrains a spline, selected at a dening point, and another object as being tangent to each other at the selected point. Constrains two objects as being tangent to each other. Constrains a line as being parallel to the FCS Y-axis.
Slope of Curve
Tangent Vertical
Displaying Constraint Symbols Constraint symbols are displayed when a sketch is active. Symbols for Coincident, Point on Curve, Midpoint, Tangent, and Concentric are always displayed. The Show All Constraints option will display the symbols for all the constraints in the active sketch. The various constraint symbols are shown below: Fixed Collinear Horizontal Vertical Parallel Perpendicular Equal Length Constant Length Mirror Slope of Curve Constant Angle Concentric Tangent Equal Radius Coincident Point on Curve Midpoint of Curve Point on String Scale, Uniform Scale, Non-Uniform
If the sketch curves are relatively small (the view is zoomed out), the symbols may not be displayed. You may need to zoom in to see them.
1-7
1
Show/Remove Constraints
Show/Remove Constraints helps you manage constraints. The constraints may be listed by object(s) or all of the constraints of the active sketch may be listed at once. 1 List all constraints or by object(s). 2 Filter for the type of constraint to list. 3 Determines if the ltered constraint types will be included or excluded. 4 Category of constraints to list. 5 Actions to take on the listed constraints.
Constraint Interrogation While the Show/Remove dialog is displayed, you can determine what constraints are present by passing the selection ball over a sketch object. If the object has an associated constraint, the object will be pre-highlighted along with any other objects that share the constraint. The constraint symbol will appear next to the sketch objects. If an object which has no constraints associated with it, it will not highlight.
1-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Constraint Categories There are two major categories of constraints, Explicit and Inferred. Explicit constraints are constraints that you create by assignment using the constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. Inferred constraints are Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and created during the curve creation process. You have the option to list only Explicit constraints, only Inferred constraints, or both.
Constraint Listing The constraints may also be listed in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog by selecting one of the three options at the top of the dialog window. Selected Object Once an object is selected, the associated constraints, depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the dialog. To view constraints associated with a different sketch object, simply select the new object. Allows the selection of multiple objects; the associated constraints, depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the dialog. Objects may be deselected by holding the shift key down and selecting the object. List all the constraints of the active sketch, depending on the selected constraint category.
Selected Objects
All in Active Sketch Listing Box
Any time there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by selecting the constraint to highlight it. When the constraint is highlighted in the list box, the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted in the graphics window. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons allow easy navigation through the various constraints. The Up and Down arrows on most keyboards will mimic this behavior.
1-9
Information The Information button located on the Show/Remove Constraints dialog will list all of the constraints in the active sketch to the information window. This is useful should there be a need to make a hard copy of the constraints or save them as a text le. Removing Constraints Constraints may be deleted by these methods: Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and select Remove Highlighted Constraint(s), or just double click them in the list. Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection toolbar), select the constraint symbol on the graphics window, and then choose the Delete icon. Turn on Select Constraints, select the constraint symbol on the graphics window, and then use MB3Delete to delete selected constraint.
Undo Undo from the Edit pull-down menu, the Undo icon on the Standard toolbar, the MB3 pop-up menu, or the accelerator keys. Undo takes the user actions back one step at a time. After an Undo is performed, the Redo option is available in the Edit pulldown menu or Standard toolbar. Dragging Geometry Under constrained geometry can be dragged only when not in a constraint creation mode. Simply hold down and drag MB1 while on the selected curve(s) or point(s). Selection When in the Sketcher Task Environment, the selection toolbar changes. It has two icons that are only available in the Sketcher. Select Sketch Objects allows selection of curves and dimensions in the sketch. Select Constraints allows selection of constraint symbols in the graphics window.
1-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Constraint Conditions
When either the Dimensions or Constraints option is chosen, the Status line lists the constraint condition for the active sketch. A sketch may be fully constrained, under constrained, or over constrained. When the sketch is under constrained the Status line will indicate the number of constraints needed. Sketch needs 4 constraints Sketch is fully constrained Sketch contains over constrained geometry A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch. Each time a sketch is evaluated, the system attempts to solve the set of constraints that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships with each other. Fully Constrained In order to completely capture the design intent of a particular prole, it may be benecial to fully constrain the sketch. This occurs when the solver is able to completely dene all sketch geometry. There is no requirement to fully constrain a sketch. The design intent has been captured sufciently when the constraint set applied to the prole causes it to update in the intended manner. Under Constrained A sketch is under constrained when there is insufcient information to completely locate each sketch point. Degree-of-freedom arrows are displayed at each point that can not be solved to identify the direction in which that point remains free to move. Over Constrained A sketch is over constrained when too much constraint information is supplied to the solver. For example, if an Equal Length constraint is applied to two lines and then dimensions are added to each to constrain their length, the sketch would be over constrained. The geometry and dimensional constraints that are causing the over constrained condition are highlighted in a different color to help you identify and resolve the issue. This color is determined by the Overconstrained Curves and Dimensions setting in the Sketch Preferences. An unwanted constraint must be removed before the system will change the geometric conguration. The sketch remains in the last solved condition.
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Design Applications Using NX 1-11
Conicting Constraints Dimensional constraints and geometry that are in conict in the current conguration with the current constraint set are also highlighted in a different color. This indicates that the constraint set that has been supplied is not solvable with the geometry in its current conguration. Constraints may need to be added or removed in order for the sketcher to be able to solve the constraint set. The highlight color is determined by the Conicting Curves and Dimensions setting in the Sketch Preferences.
1-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Drag
You might consider a sketch sufciently constrained, but the system still lists the status as under constrained. One method of interrogating the sketch is to drag the geometry. Dragging allows under constrained geometry to be moved in the unconstrained directions. To drag a single curve or point move the cursor over it, click, and drag. For multiple objects rst select curves or end points and then click and drag all selected objects. Objects that share sketch points with the object being dragged remain connected to the object and stretch to accommodate the movement. If an object has no freedom to move due to constraints, it will not drag. In the example below, L6 (1) is being dragged while L4 and L5 (2) stretch to accommodate the movement of the line. L6 is constrained so it maintains its angular and length relationship during the drag operation.
1-13
Drag may be used to drag multiple sketch curves. Select the curves to be dragged, then use the left mouse button to click and drag to move the objects in their unconstrained directions. Selecting two or more objects to drag causes different results as the constraints applied to different curves have different effects on how the group of curves react. In the example below, the two lines L4 and L6 (1) are selected to drag causing L5 and the upper horizontal line (2) to stretch.
Drag may be used to drag a single sketch point. Move the cursor to pre-highlight the point, then click and drag to move it in its unconstrained directions. Objects that share the sketch point stretch to accommodate the movement.
1-14
mt10055_g NX 4
In the example below, the sketch point V1 is being dragged. The lines that share the sketch point stretch to accommodate the movement of the point. Their angle and length are modied by the drag operation.
Drag may also be used to approximate the correct location of a sketch prole relative to other objects. This may be useful when the process of constraining distorts the sketch prole so that it would be difcult to undo. Undesired Results Distortion caused by the act of constraining.
Desired Results Desired results when entire prole dragged from quadrant to quadrant.
1-15
1
Create Inferred Constraints
Create Inferred Constraints lets you toggle inferred constraints on or off as you create and/or edit sketch geometry. Create Inferred Constraints is active by default. The icon is available (but by default not displayed) in the Sketch Constraints toolbar. When you drag a sketch object you can make use of Inferred Constraints, such as horizontal or vertical. If Create Inferred Constraints is inactive (off), the system uses the constraints only to place the geometry, but does not store the constraints in your le. If Create Inferred constraints is active (on), the system creates and stores constraints as shown by constraint symbols you see on the screen. You control which constraints can be inferred during curve creation via Inferred Constraint Settings.
1-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Dragging Sketch Objects

Step 1: Step 2: Open the part le drag_1. Activate the sketch. Choose StartModeling. Double-click on a sketch curve. Zoom out the view to give yourself some working room around the geometry.
Toggle Show All Constraints
to active.
In PreferencesSketch make sure that Dynamic Constraint Display is inactive (off). Notice that the constraint set is presently made up of one vertical and several tangent and coincident constraints. Step 3: Drag a curve. Place the cursor over the curve at location (1) shown below. Hold MB1 down and drag the curve to location (2).
1-17
Notice how the vertical and tangent constraints impacted the drag operation. Also notice the circle was left behind.
Choose Undo.
Choose Constraints. Select the arc (1) and circle (2) shown below. Apply a Concentric constraint.
Toggle Constraints
off (or MB2).
1-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Place the cursor over the curve at location (1) shown below. Hold MB1 down and drag the curve to location (2).
Notice that the circle moved with the drag operation.
Choose Undo. Step 4: Dragging curves versus endpoints. Place the cursor over the curve at location (1) shown below. Hold MB1 down and drag the curve to location (2).
The line with a constraint remains tangent to the arc, while the other line may not remain tangent.
Choose Undo.
1-19
Select and drag the endpoint shown below from location (1) to (2).
When you select an end point the radius of the arc changes dramatically as you drag. You are effectively dragging the radius along with the end point.
Choose Undo. Step 5: Drag a line to horizontal, and create a horizontal constraint. Display Create Inferred Constraints in the Sketch Constraints toolbar, or use ToolsConstraints. Verify that Create Inferred Constraints is active.
1-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Drag the endpoint (1) shown below from location (1) to (2). End the dragging action only when you can see a horizontal constraint symbol.
Notice that the line snaps to horizontal within the snap angle.
Notice also that the horizontal constraint becomes permanent when you release the end point you were dragging.
Choose Undo.
1-21
Step 6:
Drag a line to horizontal without creating a constraint. Toggle Create Inferred Constraints to inactive. Once again, drag the endpoint from location (1) to (2). End the dragging action only when you can see a horizontal constraint symbol.
Notice that, just as before, the line snaps to horizontal within the snap angle and the horizontal symbol appears. Notice that this time no horizontal constraint is created. Choose Undo. Toggle Create Inferred Constraints to active. (Restore the default setting.)
1-22
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 7:
Drag several curves at one time. Select the curves shown below by dragging a rectangle around them.
Drag the selection to the left as shown below.
1-23
Step 8:
Drag all of the sketch geometry to a new position. Drag a rectangle around the entire sketch and drag the geometry to the location shown below.
Step 9:
Locate the sketch. Choose Constraints. Select the arc center of the arc (1) and the horizontal datum axis (2).
Apply a Point on Curve constraint.

1-24 Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved mt10055_g NX 4
Select the same arc center and the vertical datum axis.
Apply a Point on Curve constraint. Notice what happened to the sketch geometry. The arc center moved to the prescribed location and the vertical line still meets the vertical and tangent constraints assigned to it.
Toggle Constraints
off (or MB2).
Fix the geometry by dragging the vertical line to the other side of the arc. Try to maintain the same size of the upper and lower arcs.
Choose Finish Sketch. Step 10: Close the part.
1-25
Activity - Adding Constraints

As a design evolves two angles that determine the extents of a circular slot may be changed. When changes are made, the update must not fail, and the following conditions must be met: When the angles change, it is necessary that the slot retain its current width. The slot must remain centered in the arm with its upper end concentric with the end of the arm. All arcs that are currently tangent must remain tangent.
You will verify that this sketch needs additional constraints to control it as it updates. You will add enough geometric constraints to fully capture the design intent. Step 1: Open angle_adj_4 and choose StartModeling.
1-26
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 2:
Examine the sketch. Double-click on a sketch curve. If necessary, toggle Show All Constraints to active.
In PreferencesSketch, if necessary, toggle Dynamic Constraint Display to inactive. Are there any geometric constraints in the sketch? What do you think would happen if you edited one of the dimensions?
1-27
Step 3:
Edit the angle p68 to 35 and observe the update behavior.
Double-click on p68 to enter edit mode.
Change the value to 35 and press enter.
1-28
mt10055_g NX 4
What happens to the sketch?
The unite between the shape extruded from the sketch and the rest of the model will fail, thus the model cannot update successfully with the sketch in this condition. In addition, one of the end arcs of the slot has lost its tangency. Step 4: Drag a curve end to see if the sketch deforms. Drag the end point indicated by the square dot in the direction of the black arrow.
1-29
Step 5:
Undo the changes. Choose EditUndo List and choose Edit Sketch Dimension, the entry just above Enter Sketcher. You could also press Ctrl+Z until all of the edits you made are undone
Step 6:
Constrain the line adjacent to the part. Choose Constraints. Select the line (1) at the bottom of the sketch.
Select the solid edge behind the line.
Choose Collinear. This constraint will keep the line from rotating around when dimensions are modied.
Step 7:
Constrain the arcs to maintain tangency in six places.
Select the six tangent curve pairs near the six points shown below, two adjacent curves at a time, and apply Tangent constraints to each pair. Be careful to select on the correct half of the arc.
1-31
Step 8:
Make the two arcs at the top of the slot concentric. Select the two upper arcs and apply a Concentric constraint.
The slot should now be constrained such that the angle may be adjusted while the conguration remains as intended.
Choose MB2 to toggle the Constraints icon off. Step 9: Edit the p68 dimension to 75. Double-click on the 45 dimension and change it to 75. Step 10: Apply the change to the solid geometry. Choose Finish. Step 11: Close the part.
1-32
mt10055_g NX 4
1
Automatic Constraint Creation
The system can create certain types of constraints automatically. This is especially useful when geometry is added to a sketch rather than created as sketch objects. You can enable the Automatic Constraints icon on the Sketch constraints toolbar, or use ToolsConstraintsAutomatic Constraints. Procedure 1. Choose Automatic Constraint Creation. 2. Toggle the desired constraints to on. 3. Ensure that the proper distance and angle tolerances are set. 4. Choose Apply or OK. The Set and Clear buttons, on the Auto Create Constraints dialog, may be used to turn all of the constraint elds on or off. When using the horizontal, vertical, parallel, and perpendicular auto create options, the system evaluates lines using the specied Angle tolerance to apply the proper constraints. Other types of auto create constraints, such as coincident and concentric, use the Distance tolerance to apply the constraints. Using the Distance tolerance with the Coincident constraint will have the effect of closing gaps. This condition is common with objects that have been translated from other systems. Allow Remote constraints permits automatic constraints to be created between curves that do not actually touch. Currently, tangency between curves that would be tangent if they were extended is supported.
1-33
1
Sketch Operations Project
Project lets you create extracted curves or strings of curves by projecting external objects onto a sketch along the normal of the sketch plane. You can project a curve associatively or non-associatively onto a sketch. Objects available for projection include: Curves, associative and non-associative Edges Faces (selecting a face automatically selects its edges for projection) Other sketches or the curves within the sketches Points
Procedure 1. Set the selection lter to the desired object type. 2. Select a curve string, face, edges or points you want to project onto the sketch plane. 3. Set the Associate option as desired. 4. Set the Output Type option as desired. 5. Click OK. A curve string is projected onto the sketch plane from the selected curves, face or edges. If you selected points, the points are projected onto the sketch.
1-34
mt10055_g NX 4
Output Types Original Spline Segment Single Spline Editing Projected Curves You can add, remove, or replace curves projected into a sketch by displaying and using the Edit Curve icon on the Sketch Operations toolbar, or EditEdit Curve. You cannot edit projected points. When you choose Edit Curve and select a non-associated projected curve string, the normal edit curve dialog displays. Editing an associated projected curve string displays the Project options. The extracted curves are created with their original geometry types. The extracted curves are represented by individual splines. The extracted curves are connected and represented by a single spline
1-35
Activity - Projecting Objects into a Sketch

You have a part that was translated from another system. It is necessary to use the imported curves to create an extrude body. You will: add the curves to a sketch. repair objects that are not suitable. create enough constraints to make the geometry usable with the extrude function.
Step 1:
Open iges_1 and if necessary choose StartModeling.
Step 2:
Create sketch s21_prole on layer 21. Change the Work Layer to 21.
Choose Sketch. Click on the sketch name; key in s21_prole and press Enter.
Choose OK
to accept the XC-YC plane.
1-36
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 3:
Verify whether or not the existing curves lie on the sketch plane. Imported curves should always be checked for being planar and for gaps at adjacent end points. Choose AnalysisDistance. Alternately select the sketch datum plane and points on various lines and arcs. Do the curves lie on the sketch plane? If the distance between any point on a curve and the sketch plane is not zero, then that curve does not lie on the sketch plane.
Step 4:
Add the existing curves to the sketch. Fit the view. If necessary display the Sketch Operations toolbar. If necessary, use Add or Remove buttons to display the Project icon. Choose Project.
If necessary, toggle Associative
to inactive.
Associative sketch curves are constrained automatically by the curves they were projected from. You will not be able to alter their constraint condition from inside the sketch. When you project curves associatively they are treated as a single feature. You will need to access the curves individually, so you do not want associative projection. Press the key combination Ctrl+A (Select All).
Choose OK Step 5:
to add the curves.
Verify the types of curves that were created.

Design Applications Using NX 1-37
1
If imported curves are not parallel with the sketch plane, arcs may become conic curves. It is also prudent to verify that imported curves that appear to be lines or arcs are not in fact splines. Move the cursor over the entire string of curves while observing the status line. What curve type is the curve shown below?
Step 6:
Remove the conic curve. Make layer 41 invisible. Move the cursor over the highlighted curve shown below so that it prehighlights, press and hold MB3 until the radial popup icons appear, and slide to the left over the delete icon. .
Step 7:
1-38
Create an arc to replace the conic.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved mt10055_g NX 4
1
Choose Arc. Make sure End Point is enabled on the Snap Point toolbar. Indicate the two end points in the order shown.
For the third point, indicate any point that creates an inferred tangency constraint at one end of the arc. Click MB2 to exit from arc creation.
1-39
Step 8:
Analyze the curves. Choose AnalysisDistance. Select pairs of endpoints from several adjacent curves, any place where there is not a coincident symbol. Make sure that Point on Curve is inactive on the snap point toolbar. End Point is the only necessary option. Notice that the curves are not contiguous. This is common when geometry is translated into a double precision system, like NX, from a single precision system. These values are fractions of a millimeter in this case; however, trying to extrude these curves into a solid body will fail because of gaps and overlaps.
Cancel from Analysis. Display the Automatic Constraints Creation icon on the Sketch Constraints toolbar, or use ToolsConstraints.
1-40
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 9:
Close the gaps between the curves. Choose Automatic Constraints Creation. Choose the Clear button to clear all constraint types. Choose the Coincident constraint to toggle it to active. Change the Distance tolerance value to .25. Choose OK to create the constraints. NX interrogates each sketch point for other sketch points within the Distance tolerance and combines the points to one. Observe the display of coincident constraints that were added.
The prole will now extrude properly to create a solid body.
Choose Finish Sketch.

Step 10: Extrude the sketch into a solid feature. Orient the view to Trimetric. (HOME key.) Move the cursor over any sketch curve until it prehighlights. Hold MB3 until the radial pop-ups appear, and slide right to choose Extrude. NX treats sketches as collective strings of curves for swept features. Enter an End distance of 200 mm.
Enter a Start distance of 50 mm.
Choose OK to create the body.
Fit the view. The solid body is created. Additional sketch constraints can now be added to capture design intent. The body will update when you choose Update Model or Finish. Step 11: Optional challenge: You saw that the sketch does not have to be fully constrained to be extruded. Now, optionally, add all tangent constraints and any others needed to fully constrain the sketch. Step 12: Close the part.
1-42
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Auto Creating Constraints

You can use auto constraint creation to quickly create or recreate most constraints in a reasonably accurate sketch. In this part, you will pretend that there is an obscure problem with constraints that someone else has created. Since the sketch is fairly simple, you decide to remove all constraints and replace them with new ones. Auto Constraint Creation will save a lot of time and effort as you complete your goal. Step 1: Open the part. Open pipevise and choose StartModeling. Step 2: Activate the sketch. Double-click on a sketch curve.
Step 3:
Analyze the existing constraint set. Ensure Show all Constraints is toggled to active.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.

Ensure the radio button for All In Active Sketch is active.
Change the Show Constraints option to Both. Notice the different types of Explicit and Inferred constraints that exist in this part. Step 4: Remove the constraints. Select Remove Listed. Choose OK.
Step 5:
Selectively Auto Create the constraints. Choose Automatic Constraint Creation. Choose the Clear button in the All Constraints area of the dialog. Toggle on the buttons for Horizontal, Vertical, Coincident, and Tangent only. Check or ensure that the Distance Tolerance is .001. Choose OK to create the constraints.
Step 6:
Manually create the rest of the constraints. Choose Constraints. Select the left-most vertical line. Select the vertical datum axis.
Choose Collinear. Select the bottom horizontal line. Select the horizontal datum axis.
Choose Collinear. Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines at the top of the prole.
Choose Collinear
and Equal Length.
If necessary, display the Deselect All icon Selection toolbar.
on the
Choose Deselect All

.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom end point of the vertical line controlling the slot location and the bottom horizontal line.
Choose Midpoint
and Point on Curve.
The Status line should now inform you that the sketch is fully constrained. Click MB2 to exit the function. Windows users may also use the ESC key.
Choose Finish. The sketch is now fully constrained. Step 7: Close the part.
1-46
mt10055_g NX 4
1
Add Existing Curves to a Sketch
If you initially decide not to control a swept feature with a sketch, or if you obtain a wireframe part from a translator, you may create a sketch and add the geometry to it at a later date. You do this by displaying and using Add Existing Curves on the Sketch Constraints toolbar, or InsertExisting Curves. An example could be that you have a general idea of what a cross sectional prole looks like, but do not quite understand how form, t, and function of the part will drive the design intent. As the design matures and you recognize the intent, you may then create a sketch and add already swept curve geometry to it. Curves that are added to a sketch have their layer reassigned to that of the sketch. The only constraints that will be applied to Existing Curves that are added to a sketch are Inferred Coincidence, regardless of how the curves were originally created. Associative curves may not be directly added to sketches. The shape of these curves are controlled by other means, such as the associative faces for projected points or curves, or the law functions that control certain types of splines and helices.
1-47
Activity - Adding and Constraining Curves

Apply dimensions and constraints to control the following: The width of the slot (1). The total length of the slot (2).
Step 1: Step 2:
Open straightslot_1 and choose StartModeling. Create a sketch in layer 21. Make 21 the Work Layer.
Choose Sketch. Click on the sketch name; key in s21_slot and press Enter. Select the front face (1) as the sketch plane.
Select the horizontal sketch axis (2) as shown above.

1
Choose OK. Step 3: Add the curves to the sketch. Display the Add Existing Curves icon in the Sketch Operations toolbar, or use InsertExisting Curves.
Choose Add Existing Curves. Press the key combination Ctrl+A and then choose OK. Step 4: List the constraints currently on the sketch. Choose Show/Remove Constraints. Ensure the radio button for All In Active Sketch is toggled on. There are four inferred coincident constraints. No explicit constraints exist in this sketch because the curves were added to the sketch and not created with the sketch active. Cancel the Show/Remove Constraints dialog.
1-49
Step 5:
Fully constrain the sketch according to the design intent. Use dimensions to locate the left arc center 1 inch from the left side of the part and 2 inches from the bottom of the part.
Add the following constraints: Horizontal constraint to both lines Tangent constraint to arcs and lines (4 places) Remember Automatic Constraints. Add the following dimensions:
Step 6:
After constraining the sketch, edit the dimensions for the slot to ensure that it updates properly. Use any reasonable values of your choice. Close the part.
Step 7:
1-50
Activity - Design Change

Change the design intent on the previous sketch: modify dimensions and constraints so that one end may be made larger than the other (1, 2). The total length (3) still needs to be controlled. Examine the diagram below and follow the steps to perform the design change.
Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
Open straightslot_2 and if necessary choose StartModeling. Double-click on any sketch curve to activate the sketch. Identify and delete constraints that do not meet the new design intent, and add new constraints. Select the Show/Remove Constraints icon. Verify the radio button for All In Active Sketch is selected. Delete the horizontal constraints. Delete the slot width dimension and replace it with a radius dimension on each arc. The sketch is not fully constrained but it does meet the design intent; one end may be made larger than the other.
Step 4:
Edit the dimensions for the slot to ensure it updates properly. Assign a value of .5 to the left radius dimension. Assign a value of .25 to the right radius dimension. Choose Finish Sketch and close the part.
1-51
1
Convert To/From Reference
At times it is useful to add a dimension to a sketch to see the effect of a change numerically. Adding a dimensional constraint, however, would cause the sketch to become over constrained. It also may be necessary to add sketch curves to aid in the construction and constraining of a prole without representing a portion of the swept feature. To support these needs, curve and dimensional constraints within a sketch may be converted to and from a Reference status. To convert objects, select them in the graphics window and choose Convert To/From Reference from the MB3 pop-up menu. You may access a dialog by choosing the Convert To/From Reference icon from the Sketch Constraints toolbar (ToolsConstraintsConvert To/From Reference).
Reference curves are displayed in a phantom line font and are ignored during sweep operations. Reference curves and dimensions are displayed in colors specied by the Reference Curves and Reference Dimensions settings in PreferencesSketchColors. Reference dimensional constraints are displayed with only the value portion of the expression. The values will be updated as the sketch is changed, but they do control the sketch geometry with which they are associated. Dimensions can be made reference as they are created by choosing Create Reference Dimension in the icon option bar.
1-52
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Another Design Change

Change the sketch design so that it may be oriented at various angles (1) other than horizontal. The total length of the shape should still be controlled.
Step 1: Step 2:
Open straightslot_3 and if necessary choose StartModeling. Double-click on any sketch curve to activate the sketch.
1-53
Step 3:
Create reference geometry. Check your Snap Point settings to assure Arc Center is active. Create a line (1) from arc center to arc center. Create another line (2) and apply Vertical (if necessary) and Constant Length constraints.
Exit from constraint creation. Step 4: Converting Curves to Reference Lines. Select the two lines just created. Hold MB3 over either one of the lines until the radial popup options appear. Slide to the right and down to choose Convert To/From Reference.
1-54
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 5:
Add or edit dimensions as shown below.
If a horizontal dimension for the slot length was inferred or manually dened, delete it and replace with a parallel dimension. Step 6: After constraining the sketch, edit the dimensions for the slot to ensure that it updates properly. Use any reasonable values of your choice. Close the part.
Step 7:
1-55
Activity - Constraining the Perimeter of a Sketch

The design intent for swimming pool requires that: The two larger radii are equal and must be controlled by a dimension. The four corner radii are equal and must be controlled by a dimension. The perimeter must be a constant value.
Step 1: Step 2:
Open the part le skt_perimeter and choose StartModeling. Activate the SWIMMING_POOL sketch.
1-56
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 3:
Investigate the existing constraints using Show/Remove Constraints. Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon. If necessary, toggle on All in Active Sketch. Verify the Constraint Type is set to All. Verify the Show Constraints option is set to Explicit.
Choose the rst constraint in the list, A5 Equal radius to A7. Investigate the highlighted curves on the screen. Select the Step Down the List button or use your down arrow key and read through the constraints to get an idea of the existing constraints in the sketch. Then Cancel the dialog.
1-57
Step 4:
Add the two dimensions shown.
1-58
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 5:
Constrain the perimeter of the sketch. Choose the Perimeter icon icon. from the dimension pull-down
Select all of the active curves, a total of eight.
Choose the Sketch Dimensions Dialog icon. Choose MB2 to create a perimeter dimension for the selected curves. Verify that a Perimeter dimension appears in the Dimensions list. (It may be a different "p"-number.)
If you did not get all of the curves selected, highlight the perimeter constraint in the Dimensions list and choose the Delete button in the dialog.
1-59
Step 6:
Edit the perimeter. Slide the slider bar to the left and right and observe the changes in the sketch.
Edit the Perimeter and other dimensions by entering values and/or using the slider bar. Step 7: Close the part.
1-60
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Controlling Heat Transfer in a Cooling Pipe

The design intent for cooling ns on a length of pipe requires that the cross sectional area of the ns should be controlled by the volume of uid in the pipe. Each ns perimeter should equal 1.25 times the cross sectional ow area. You will: Use a perimeter dimension to control the total perimeter. Equate the expression for the perimeter to 1.25 times the cross sectional area of the pipe. Open the part le perim_1 and if necessary choose StartModeling.
Step 1:
This part contains the following features: Cylinder Thru Hole - The diameter of the thru hole controls the diameter of the cylinder by maintaining a constant wall thickness. Sketch Using ToolsExpressions, examine the areaRatio expression.
1-61
Step 2:
Interrogate the sketch. Activate the FIN sketch.
Fit the view. The sketch is located by two constraints. The reference curve and datum plane (layer 61) are collinear (1) and the sketch arc and OD of the cylinder feature are concentric (2).
The sketch is not yet totally constrained.
1-62
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 3:
Add a perimeter dimension to the sketch. Make layer 1 invisible.
Choose the Perimeter icon icon.
from the dimension pull-down
Choose the Sketch Dimensions Dialog icon. Individually select the curves shown below.
Click MB2 to create the perimeter dimension. Note that there is a new dimension called Perimeter_p## and that the sketch is now fully constrained. Choose Close. You cannot edit the curves of a Perimeter constraint. If you miss a curve or get an extra, delete the constraint by highlighting it in the Dimensions list and choosing the Delete button in the dialog.
Choose Finish.
1-63
Step 4:
Extrude the sketch. Hold MB3 over a sketch curve until the radial pop up options appear.
Slide to the right to choose Extrude. The default extrude direction is normal to the plane of the sketch, ZC+ in this case.
Double-click the direction vector arrow to reverse the extrusion vector to the negative ZC direction.
Change the Boolean to Unite. Notice that since there is only one body available as a target, the system does not require you to select it.
1-64
mt10055_g NX 4
Use MB3 over the End symbol to change the option to Until Extended. You choose Until Extended so that the system knows the face you will select must be extended beyond its current boundary to trim the extruded sketch.
1-65
Select the bottom planar face of the solid (1).
Choose OK. Step 5: Create a circular array of the extruded n. Make layer 61 Selectable.
Choose Insert Associative Copy Instance. Choose Circular Array. Select the Extrude feature and choose OK. Enter: Number = 8 Angle = 360/8 Choose OK. Choose Datum Axis. Select the datum axis in the graphic window. Choose Yes. Choose Cancel.
Make all but the work layer invisible.
Step 6:
Capture the design intent for the n. Choose ToolsExpression. If necessary choose More Options. If necessary change the Listed Expressions option until ID is listed. Select the ID (SIMPLE_HOLE(1) Diameter) expression and change it to 4 and Accept Edit. Choose Apply.
1-67
1
Fit the view.
Notice that the ns have retained their original prole. If the cooling pipes volume is going to increase the cooling ns will also need to increase. Recall that an expression, areaRatio, relates each ns prole to the cross sectional ow area. This expression is associative to the hole feature and will update automatically. You need to link this value to the perimeter constraint.
Undo the last expression operation to return the heat pipe to its original conguration. Select the expression called Perimeter_p3 (FIN:SKETCH(5) Perimeter Dimension) (the digit following the _p in your expression may be different). Change the Formula to areaRatio and Accept Edit. While editing the ID expression highlight areaRatio in the list. Use MB3 Copy Name to assure that the spelling is correct, then type the rest of the expression. Choose Apply. The ns become slightly smaller. In a real life situation you might tweak the formula until the ratio exactly matches cooling requirements. Select the ID expression, change it to 4, and Accept Edit.
Choose OK.
Fit the view.
Notice how the ns have updated to meet the new ow requirement. Step 7: Close the part.
1-69
Summary
Sketch constraints allow you to capture and maintain design intent even after design changes occur. Through dimensions and constraints, you can adapt your solid models to the design intent of the nal product. In this lesson you: Applied Design Intent. Created Geometric Constraints. Auto Created Constraints. Displayed Constraints. Converted Sketch Curves To Reference Curves. Updated a Model. Added Objects to a Sketch. Constrained a Sketch by its perimeter.
1-70
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
Constraint Management
Purpose This lesson describes other constraint management tools as well as additional ways to use sketches. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create an Alternate Solution Reorder sketches Position Sketches on a Solid Body Locate a Sketch with Constraints Move a sketch using Reattach Mirror a sketch
2-1
Alternate Solution
Constraint sets may be valid in one or more congurations depending on the given geometry. Scalar dimensions have no positive or negative sign, they specify only an absolute value. This absolute value may be applied to specify a given distance between objects in one direction or the other. There are times when multiple solutions may be available for a given constraint set. At these times there is a need to ask the system to change the conguration based on the given set of constraints. NX provides this functionality as an Alternate Solution. Selecting the Alternate Solution icon from the Sketch Constraints toolbar will bring up a small dialog containing the options OK, Back, or Cancel. The Cue line prompts the user to "Select a dimension or circle/arc".
One alternate solution as it applies to a dimension would be the fairly simple case illustrated below. Constraints for horizontal and vertical have been applied to the appropriate lines, as well as collinearity between the two horizontal segments as shown. The dimension is selected for an alternate solution with the results as shown. The vertical dimension is valid in either case when it is applied as an absolute value.
2-2
mt10055_g NX 4
A second form of alternate solution can be applied to a circle or an arc, for example when two circles are constrained tangent to each other or a line is constrained tangent to an arc. This is illustrated below. In the case of the two circles, either solution is valid given the constraints supplied. Alternate Solution may be used to switch between the two if some other constraint causes the system to select the wrong conguration. Two Tangent Circles Select the large circle (1) rst and the small circle (2) second.
Line Tangent to an Arc Select the arc (1) rst and the horizontal line (2) second.
2-3
Activity - Alternate Solution

In this activity you will explore alternate solutions to constraint sets and the effects that different constraints have as they are applied. Step 1: Open alternate_1.
Step 2:
View the constraints. Choose StartModeling. Double-click on a sketch curve. If necessary toggle Show All Constraints to active and make sure Dynamic Constraint Display is inactive.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon. Ensure the List Constraints for radio button is set to All In Active Sketch.
2-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Change the Constraint Type to Tangent.
Select A1 Tangent to L6 to see the only tangent constraint in the sketch. Choose Cancel.
2-5
Step 3:
Add dimensions. Choose the Inferred Dimensions icon.
Select the bottom horizontal line and place a horizontal dimension on the screen. Select the circle and place a radius dimension on the screen.
2-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 4:
Obtain an Alternate Solution. Display the Alternate Solution icon on the Sketch Constraints toolbar. Optionally, you can use the ToolsConstraints menu.
Choose the Alternate Solution icon. The Cue line prompts you to "Select a dimension or circle/arc". Select the circle and the center vertical line.
The circle ips to the other side of the line. This is a valid alternate solution, the circle is still tangent to the line.
2-7
Step 5:
Obtain another Alternate Solution. Select the circle and the center horizontal line.
Since there is no constraint associated to the two objects selected, there is no alternate solution available. NX displays a message stating that there is no valid alternate solution for the selected objects. Choose OK to dismiss the message. Choose Cancel in the Alternate Solution dialog. Step 6: Add a Tangency constraint. Choose the Constraints icon. Select the circle and the center horizontal line.
Apply a Tangent constraint.
2-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 7:
Obtain an Alternate Solution. Choose Alternate Solution. Select the circle and the center horizontal line.
Heres what happened. The center horizontal line has six constraints associated to it: Horizontal Tangent to the arc Left endpoint is located midpoint of the left vertical line. Left endpoint is located on the left vertical line. Right endpoint is located midpoint of the right vertical line. Right endpoint is located on the right vertical line. When the alternate solution is applied to the line and circle, the top horizontal line collapses onto the bottom horizontal line. The two vertical lines now have a theoretical length of 0 (zero), which allows the middle horizontal line to meet its midpoint, point on curve, and tangent constraints.
Choose Undo Step 8:
to restore the geometry.
Add constraints to the center horizontal and vertical lines. Choose the Constraints icon. Select the left vertical line and the bottom horizontal line and apply an Equal Length constraint to them.
2-9
Step 9:
Obtain an Alternate Solution. Choose Alternate Solution. Select the circle and the center horizontal line. With the addition of the Equal Length constraint, the geometry now updates in the desired manner.
2-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Placing Sketches Where They Are Needed

Sketches require a placement plane, which can be a solid face or a datum plane. Sketches may be located in their plane by constraints with datum axes, datum planes, objects belonging to other sketches, non-sketch curves, or solid edges. Only features that are earlier in the Timestamp order (have a lower time stamp number) may be selected to constrain a sketch. Sketches may be located by one of two methods: Sketch constraints (dimensional and geometric) Positioning dimensions These two methods are mutually exclusive. If you use Positioning Dimensions, you cannot reference external objects when creating Dimensions or Constraints. If you reference external objects when creating Dimensions or Constraints, then you cannot use Positioning Dimensions. Positioning is supported by the sketcher primarily to permit sketches to be used in User Dened Features.
2-11
Activity - Creating and Positioning a Sketch

The function of this part requires a triangular pocket located relative to an angled face. The sketch position should update automatically if the angle of the face changes.
Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4:
Open fence_1. Choose StartModeling. Make layer 21 the Work Layer. Create a sketch of the pocket. Choose Sketch. Click on the sketch name, key in s21_pocket and press Enter. Select the larger top face of the block as the sketch plane.
2-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Select the upper half of the angled edge of the pad as the horizontal sketch axis. You assure that the positive direction of XC will point away from the more pointed end of the pad by selecting the edge at the end shown below.
You can reverse the direction by double-clicking the head of the x-axis vector.
Choose OK. If your display does not look like the graphic below, start over (choose FileCloseReopen Selected Parts).
Blend features are more intuitively edited as blends than as sketch curves. You will dene the shape of the pocket in this sketch with only three lines, and add the corner radii of the pocket later using blends.
2-13
The sketcher is automatically in prole mode as you start a new sketch.
Display the Create Inferred Constraints icon in the Sketch Constraints toolbar. Alternatively, you may use the ToolsConstraints menu.
Toggle Create Inferred Constraints
to inactive. (off)
In the middle of the placement face, create the three lines as shown below. Length values are approximate. Allow the rst line to snap to horizontal.
Allow the second line to snap to vertical.
2-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Be sure to snap the third end point to the starting point of the rst line.
Step 5:
List the current constraints. Choose Show/Remove Constraints. Ensure List Constraints for is set to All in Active Sketch, Constraint Type is set to All, and Show Constraints is set to Both. There should be no constraints, because Create Inferred Constraints was inactive when you created the lines. Choose Cancel.
Step 6:
Add geometric constraints. Add coincident constraints only, using automatic constraints.
2-15
Add a perpendicular constraint between the two lines shown.
Add a parallel constraint between the horizontal line and the long edge of the pad, as shown.
Step 7:
Add dimensional constraints. By design, the size of the pocket should be controlled by dening the lengths of the horizontal and vertical sides.
Choose Parallel. Select the horizontal line and place the dimension. Change the value to 6 and press Enter. Select the vertical line and place the dimension.
2-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Change the value to 4 and press Enter.
Choose Finish Sketch. Step 8: Extrude the sketch. Hold down MB3 to open the radial pop up menu over any of the sketch curves.
Slide right to choose Extrude. Extrude the sketch to a depth of 1 inch and subtract it to create a pocket. Step 9: Add a .5 inch blend to the inside pocket corners.
Step 10: Constrain the sketch position. Locate the sketch .75 inch away from the pad. Double-click on a sketch curve.
Choose Fit.
Choose Perpendicular.
2-17
Create the dimension from the horizontal sketch line to the edge of the solid (1) shown below.
Locate the 90 degree corner of the pocket 1 inch from the edge of the part shown below. Select the edge at the edge of the part (1) as shown. Select an end point at the 90 corner.
Use a cursor location to place the dimension. Enter a value of 1 and press the Enter key. The sketch automatically moves into position.
Notice that all three sketch curves change to the fully constrained color, and the status line reports that the sketch is fully constrained. Choose Finish Sketch . Review the updated model. Step 11: Verify the sketch positioning by editing the angle of the pad. Choose ToolsExpression. The pad has been positioned relative to the block. Its angle may be changed by editing an expression named fence_angle. Change the value for fence_angle to 35, press Enter and choose OK.
Note that the sketch remains parallel to the pad, .75 inch away, and remains 1 inch from the back of the part. In some cases if the edit to an edge used to position the sketch is great enough, an Alternate Solution to a dimension may occur. If either of the locating dimensions ips, perform an Alternate Solution on the applicable dimension to resolve the ip. Step 12: Close the part.
2-19
Activity - Positioning a Sketch

This structural frame requires pockets to minimize its weight.
You will control the thickness of the walls and the webs by adding appropriate sketch constraints. Drag and Alternate Solution will be useful tools as you work on the sketch.
Step 1: Step 2:
Open frame_1. Constrain the sketch using both dimensions and constraints to position the sketch curves relative to the solid edges and datum planes. Choose StartModeling. Set the Rendering Style to Wireframe with Dim Edges.
Double-click on a sketch curve.
Choose Fit.
Choose Constraints.
2-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Select the three sketch arcs (1) and the solid edge (2) shown below and apply a Concentric constraint.
Select the three sketch arcs and Apply an Equal Radius constraint.
Choose Inferred Dimensions.
2-21
Add a Radius constraint with a value of 2.25 to the arc (1) shown below.
2-22
mt10055_g NX 4
When you use a dynamic input window end each value entry with the enter key. For example, in the next step, use enter to complete the dimension value 0.2, and then activate the name eld and select all of the existing text. Next, type the name wall and again use enter to complete the edit. Create the wall dimension as shown below. Remember to name the expression wall.
If the sketch line is lying off the solid face instead of over the face, use Alternate Solution to ip the wall dimension.
Choose Constraints. When you apply constraints between datum features and sketch curves the constraints have to be applied individually. In the next example, select one line and one datum plane and apply a parallel constraint. Repeat for the rest of the lines.
2-23
Apply Parallel constraints to the objects as shown below.
You may avoid needing to use Alternate Solution later: drag these curves to their proper relationships after applying geometric constraints and before dimensioning. Apply the dimensions as shown below.
2-24
mt10055_g NX 4
When you key in the rst letter of wall you will have the option of choosing from a list of all functions and expressions. Since no function names or other variables start with w there will be only the one list entry to select. Click on your selection in the list, or use the arrow keys and enter to make a selection. When the value appears in the dynamic input window, use enter twice: one time to place the value in the input window and again to record the value and update the sketch.
Apply the remaining dimensions as shown below.
The sketch is now fully constrained and positioned on the solid body.
2-25
Step 3:
Extrude the sketch and subtract it from the solid to create the pockets. Use a Start distance of 0 and an End distance of 0.56.
Step 4:
Edit the chamfer feature. Choose EditFeatureEdit Parameters. Select the Chamfer feature and choose OK. Change the First Offset value to 1.5. Tab to the Second Offset and change it to 2.0. Choose OK twice. Examine the part to ensure the update was correctly applied. Look to see if any Alternate Solutions need to be applied to the dimensions from the datum planes.
Step 5:
Optional: Add blends to the solid edges.
2-26
mt10055_g NX 4
For the rst set of the rst blend, specify 0.125 on the vertical edges of the pockets. For the second set of the rst blend, specify 0.325 on the outer vertical edges of the solid.
For the second blend, using selection intent Tangent Curves, specify 0.0625 on the oors of the pockets.
Step 6:
Close the part.
2-27
Activity - Using Positioning Dimensions

The design requirements for this part will eventually require the sketch to be used as a user dened feature or UDF. When you use a sketch in a UDF, it is convenient to use positioning as an intuitive tool for placing and aligning the feature. First you will fully constrain the sketch using constraints. Next you will replace constraints that are specic to this solid body with exible positioning dimensions. Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Open position_1. Choose StartModeling. Use dimensional constraints to locate the sketch on the placement plane.
Choose Fit.
Choose Show All Constraints. Notice that there are two vertical, one horizontal and two tangent constraints.
Choose Inferred Dimensions. Select the arc center and the bottom horizontal edge of the solid body. Place a vertical dimension to the right of the part.
Change the value to 3 and press Enter. Notice that the status line indicates that 1 constraint is needed. Also notice that the vertical DOFs no longer appear.
2-29
Select the arc center again and the right vertical edge of the solid body.
Place a horizontal dimension above the part. Change the value to 2 and press Enter.
The sketch is now fully constrained
2-30
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 4:
Test the sketch to see if more exible positioning can be added with the current constraints. In some instances the sketch needs to be rotated 20 degrees as shown below.
Choose the Angular dimension type.
2-31
Select the objects in the order and at the locations as shown below.
Place the dimension to the right of the part. Notice how the dimension and horizontal constraint are displayed in the over constrained color. Also notice that the status line indicates that the sketch is over constrained. The angular dimension and horizontal constraint are presently redundant (over constrained). If you were to change the angular dimension value, the dimension would then be in conict with the horizontal and both vertical constraints.
Choose Undo.
2-32
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 5:
Prepare to create positioning dimensions. Add Positioning Dimensions on the Sketcher toolbar. (Actually, there is a stack of three icons.) Alternatively you could use ToolsPositioning Dimensions.
Choose Create Positioning Dimensions. An error window pops-up informing you that you cannot apply positioning dimensions when there are sketch constraints to external objects. This message is referring to the dimensions going to the solid body.
Choose OK. You will now remove the dimensional constraints to the solid body and replace them with Positioning Dimensions. In a future UDF, users who create instances of your sketch would apply similar positioning dimensions to meet their design intent. Select the two dimensions that position the sketch to the solid body.
Choose Delete.
Choose Constraints.
2-33
Choose the endpoint (1) shown below and apply a Fixed constraint.
Notice that the sketch curves change to the fully constrained color, and all degree of freedom indicators are removed. The sketch is now fully constrained with no external references. When you use positioning it will apply to the entire sketch. Step 6: Use a Positioning Dimension to dene the distance from the arc center to the lower edge of the solid body.
Choose Create Positioning Dimensions.
Choose Perpendicular. Select the bottom horizontal edge of the solid body. Select the arc and choose Arc Center. Choose OK to accept the value of 3.
Step 7:
Create a Positioning Dimension to dene the distance from the arc center to the right hand edge of the solid body. Choose Perpendicular. Select the right vertical edge of the solid body. Select the arc and choose Arc Center. Choose OK to accept the value of 2.
Step 8:
Create a Positioning Dimension to dene the angle of the sketch with respect to the lower edge of the solid body. Choose Angular. Select the objects in the order and at the locations as shown below.
2-35
Key in 20 and choose OK. Notice how the sketch rotated even though there are vertical and horizontal constraints present. This is because positioning dimensions operate on the entire sketch as a feature. Choose Orient View to Sketch.
Choose Fit.
Now you can see that the sketch was rotated and that the vertical and horizontal constraints are still valid relative to the sketch plane. Step 9: Edit the angle positioning dimension.
2-36
mt10055_g NX 4
Choose Edit Positioning Dimensions from the pull-down.
In the graphic window, select the angle positioning dimension. Key in a value of 45 and choose OK twice.
Choose Orient View to Sketch.
Fit the view.
2-37
Reattaching Sketches
You can reattach a sketch to a different planar face or datum plane than the one on which it was created. You can only reattach to a plane or face with an earlier time stamp. The Reattach option also displays any positioning dimensions for the sketch, and lets you redene the geometry referenced by them. After you choose the Reattach icon, the reattach input boxes display.
Sketch in place These options are from left to right: Sketch type Lets you change between Sketch in place and Sketch on path. Sketch Plane Lets you choose a new sketch plane or planar face. OK Lets you execute the reattachment. Cancel Quits the reattachment operation.
To reattach a Sketch in place: 1. Select a new datum plane or planar surface (optional). 2. Select a horizontal or vertical reference (optional). 3. Choose OK.
2-38
mt10055_g NX 4
Sketch on path These options are from left to right: Sketch type Lets you change between Sketch in place and Sketch on path. Path Lets you choose a new path or edit the existing one. Positioning Method Lets you change the positioning method. Alternate Solution This will be available when there are multiple positioning possibilities. OK Lets you execute the reattachment. Cancel Quits the reattachment operation.
To reattach a Sketch on path: 1. Select a new path or modify the existing path (optional). 2. Modify the sketch plane orientation: Normal to Path, Normal to Vector, Parallel to Vector, or Through Axis (optional). 3. Modify the placement of the sketch by dragging or choose among: ArcLength, % ArcLength, or Through Point (optional). 4. Choose OK. To redene a positioning dimension: 1. Select a displayed positioning dimension to redene. The original dialog used to dene the positioning dimension displays. 2. Follow the prompts to choose new reference objects for the positioning dimension. For information on positioning methods see the Modeling Online Help.
2-39
Reordering Sketches
In order to attach a sketch to a face or datum or dene a horizontal reference, the geometry must come before the sketch in Timestamp order. Reordering accomplishes this. Reordering is also necessary when you attempt to add generating or guide curves of a swept feature that occurs before the sketch. The sketch must be reordered before (earlier than) the swept feature that is generated or guided by the curves. Once the timing of the sketch relative to the swept feature is resolved, and the curves are added to the sketch, the curves may be constrained just as any other sketch curve. Sketches appear in the Part Navigator and the list of features presented when performing an Reorder. A sketch can be located anywhere after its reference geometry in the creation order.
2-40
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Reattaching a Sketch

Step 1: Open reattach_1. In this activity you will reattach a sketch that denes two cam blocks (1). The design has changed so that the blocks must be mounted on the opposite face, as shown below.
Step 2:
Investigate the current placement face and horizontal reference of the sketch. Choose StartModeling. Change the Rendering Style to Wireframe with Dim Edges.
Make the sketch layer 22 and datum layer 62 selectable. Use the push pin icon open position. Make sure the Part Navigator is in the Design View; i.e., Timestamp Order does not have a check beside it. to lock the Part Navigator in the
2-41
Expand the nodes Solid Body, Unite (13), Solid Body, Extruded (11), Direction, and Sketch (9) until the Horizontal Reference and Placement Face of Sketch (9) INSERT_RELIEF are displayed, as shown below.
One at a time, select Datum_Plane(2) and the Face node under Placement face, noting which entities highlight in the graphics window.
2-42
mt10055_g NX 4
Double-click the sketch icon beside Sketch (9) INSERT_RELIEF to activate the sketch.
Unpin the Part Navigator to expand the graphics viewing area. Step 3: Reattach the sketch. Display Orient View to Model on the Sketcher toolbar, or use the View menu.
Choose Orient View to Model. Choose Reattach. Select the face shown below.
Click on the Y axis of the coordinate system. Select the datum plane to dene the vertical direction.
Choose OK. Choose Finish Sketch.

Shade the model and review the part.
The sketch is now reattached to the dened face and the cam block features are rebuilt. Step 4: Close the part.
2-44
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Moving Sketches

The part for this activity contains two dimensional geometry for a switch base. The data may have originated from another system. You will selectively eliminate some of the geometry and constrain the remainder in sketches so that parametric control over the model may be dened by the geometry. You will initially create the sketches on the same plane. Later you will move two of the sketches into the proper orthogonal planes and extrude them to dene a solid model.
Step 1: Step 2:
Open switchbase_1. Move the curves required for each prole sketch to separate layers. Choose StartModeling. Choose FormatMove to Layer.
2-45
Select only the two circles in the "top" view and choose OK.
Key in 21 and choose Apply. Choose Select New Objects and move the lines shown below in the "front" view to layer 22.
Move the curves shown below in the "right" view to layer 23.
Step 3:
Create expressions for the diameter and height. Choose ToolsExpression. Create expressions: Name dia h Formula 3.75 5.75 Dimensionality Length Length Units Inches Inches
2-46
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 4:
Create a sketch for the top prole. Change the work layer to layer 21 and make all other layers invisible. Create a sketch named S21_TOP on the XC-YC plane.
Choose Fit. Add the two circles to the sketch. Step 5: Constrain the sketch for the top prole. Add constraints to position the sketch so that both circle centers are aligned with the two datum axes. Add a dimension for the outer diameter. Change the value of this expression to dia to associate it to the expression.
Choose Finish.
Choose Fit. Step 6: Move the datum plane and two datum axes to layer 61. They are no longer required for this sketch but will be referenced by the other sketches.
2-47
Step 7:
Create an extruded feature using the top prole. Change the work layer to layer 1 and keep layer 21 selectable.
Change to a Trimetric view orientation. (HOME key.) Extrude the sketch S21_TOP in the default (+ZC) direction using an End distance of h and a Start distance of 0.
Step 8:
Create a sketch for the front prole. Change the work layer to layer 22. Make layer 61 selectable and all other layers invisible.
Choose Fit. Create a sketch named S22_FRONT. Select the existing datum plane as the sketch plane and select the datum axis parallel to the XC axis as the horizontal sketch axis. Choose Fit.
Add all of the curves on layer 22 to the sketch. Step 9: Constrain the front prole sketch. In SketchPreferences make sure Dynamic Constraint Display is inactive (off) so you can see all of the constraints.
Use the Automatic Constraints vertical constraints.

2-48 Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved
to create horizontal and
mt10055_g NX 4
Add dimensions for the total height and width as shown below. The numeric sufxes you see may differ from the illustration.
Test the behavior of the sketch by changing the height constraint to 7.0 and the width to 5.0. Notice that the sketch does not satisfy the design intent and remain symmetrical when the expressions are changed. To satisfy the design intent you can add a reference line and additional constraints.
Choose Undo (twice if necessary) to change the dimensions back to their original values.
2-49
Create a vertical line between the midpoints of the two horizontal lines shown below and convert it to reference. After you create the line verify the inferred constraints and Undo to try again if necessary.
You may need to enable Mid Point in the Snap Point toolbar so that the system can infer the correct constraints. Remember that you can add multiple constraints to selected curves if you hold the Control (Ctrl) key as you select the curves. Add the new dimension as shown below and make the two pairs of lines (1) and (2) both Collinear and Equal Length.
Change the value of the expression for the total width to dia and the total height to h.
Choose Finish.
2-50
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 10: Create associative reference features to be used as attachment faces for the front and right prole sketches, and as location aids. Change the work layer to layer 62. Make sure layers 1 and 61 are selectable to display the solid and the other datum objects.
Choose Datum Plane and create a datum plane through the axis of the outer cylindrical face of the solid. Create another datum plane through the axis of the cylindrical face and at a 90 degree angle to the plane you just created.
Choose Datum Axis and create a datum axis through the axis of the cylindrical face of the model pointing in the ZC+ direction.
The front prole sketch will be attached to the datum plane that is parallel to the ZC-XC plane. However, the plane was created after the sketch and cannot be referenced as a target face unless it precedes the sketch.
2-51
Step 11: Reorder the sketch after the datum planes. Choose the Part Navigator icon. In the Part Navigator, place the cursor on the S22_FRONT:SKETCH node. The sketch will appear under Unused Items in the Design View. Press the right mouse button to display the pop-up menu, slide the cursor down to the Reorder After option, and select the last datum axis from the cascading menu.
2-52
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 12: Attach the front prole sketch to a datum plane. Make layer 22 selectable to display the sketch. Double-click on a sketch curve. Enable Orient View to Model on the Sketcher toolbar.
Choose Orient View to Model.
Choose Reattach. Select the datum plane that lies in the ZC-XC plane as the sketch plane. Notice the Datum Axis used for the horizontal sketch axis is still valid. It is not necessary to redene all steps during the reattach operation.
Choose OK.
2-53
Step 13: Position the sketch. Choose Fit. Add a constraint to make the centerline of the sketch Collinear with the datum axis through the cylindrical face axis (1). Add another constraint to make the lower horizontal line in the sketch Collinear with the datum axis that is parallel to the XC-axis (2).
2-54
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 14: Extrude the front prole sketch. Extrude the sketch S22_FRONT along the default direction (YC axis) using Start and End values Through All and choose the Boolean option Intersect.
2-55
Step 15: Create the sketch for the right prole. Change the work layer to layer 23, make layer 61 selectable, and all other layers invisible.
Create a sketch named S23_RIGHT. Once again, dene the sketch plane with the datum plane dened for the S21_TOP sketch and select the datum axis parallel to the XC axis as the horizontal sketch axis.
Choose Fit. Add all the curves to the sketch. Step 16: Constrain the right prole sketch. Choose Automatic Constraints. Set the Distance value to .01. Toggle on: Horizontal, Vertical, Coincident, Parallel, Tangent, and Equal Length. Choose OK.
2-56
mt10055_g NX 4
Create two vertical reference lines between the midpoints of the horizontal lines as shown below.
Add the dimensions as shown above. The numeric sufxes you see may differ from the illustration.
2-57
Change the value of the expression for the width to "dia" (1) and the value of the expression for the height to "h" (2) to associate them to the other sketches.
2-58
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 17: Attach the right prole sketch to the other new datum plane. Make layers 1 and 62 selectable.
Choose Orient View to Model.
Choose Fit.
Choose Reattach. Select the datum plane that lies parallel to the four at faces of the model.
Choose OK.
2-59
Step 18: Add constraints to position the sketch. Choose Orient View to Model.
Choose Fit. Add a constraint to make the centerline of the sketch collinear with the datum axis through the cylindrical face axis (1). Add another constraint to make the lower horizontal line in the sketch collinear with the datum axis that is parallel to the XC axis (2).
2-60
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 19: Extrude the right prole sketch. Change the work layer to layer 1.
Choose Fit. Extrude the sketch S23_RIGHT along the default direction (XC axis) using a Start and End distances of Through All and choose the Intersect Boolean option. Make all layers invisible.
Note that the work layer is never affected when you select the layer category All and then choose Invisible. Step 20: Edit the expressions to modify the part. Choose ToolsExpression.
If necessary choose More Options. Set Listed Expressions to User Dened. Change the value of the expression dia to 4.25 and the value of the h to 6.5. Choose OK to update the model. Step 21: Close the part.
2-61
Mirroring in a Sketch
The sketch mirror functionality provides a means for copying geometry and constraints within the context of a sketch whenever the sketch design intent is meant to be symmetrical. The mirror function may provide a time saving option. To mirror sketch curves: Choose Mirror. Select the mirror centerline. Select the curves to be mirrored. Choose OK or Apply.
The mirror centerline you select will be automatically converted to reference status if it is not already a reference line. A Mirror constraint is created between each new curve created through the Mirroring process and the original curve.
2-62
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Mirroring Sketch Objects

Step 1: Open mirror_1 and if necessary choose StartModeling.
This part le contains a sketch and an extruded solid body that represent half of a V-Block. You will mirror the sketch and update the model.
Step 2:
Activate the sketch. Double click on a sketch curve. The status line indicates that the sketch is fully constrained.
Step 3:
Mirror the sketch curves. Choose Mirror.
2-63
Select the vertical line (1) as the mirror centerline.
Click MB2 to advance the selection step to Mirror Geometry. Press the key combination Ctrl+A to select the remaining sketch geometry. Choose OK.
Step 4:
Edit the angle of the V-block. Double-click on the p2=60.000 dimension. In the dynamic input box key in 50 and press Enter.
2-64
mt10055_g NX 4
Notice that both sides of the sketch updated. Choose Finish Sketch. In the part navigator (Design View) verify that there is still only one solid body. After the mirror centerline was converted to reference status the remaining curves and their mirror images created a single closed loop. Step 5: Close the part.
2-65
Summary
Sketches can be recongured by using an alternate solution when more than one conguration applies to a given set of constraints.
Sketches also can be dragged to other locations or in relation to their own members. Managing sketches will allow you more exibility when you create your designs. Positioning sketches using dimensions or constraints or a combination of both can help you maintain design intent when related features change. Reattaching a sketch to another sketch plane offers you greater exibility in your nal conguration. In this lesson you: Applied Alternate Solutions to obtain the appropriate prole. Located sketches using constraints. Located sketches using positioning dimensions. Reattached sketches. Reordered sketches. Mirrored sketches.
2-66
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
Additional Sketching Techniques

Purpose This lesson describes additional techniques that may be used to manipulate sketches. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Edit a Dening String Suppress and Delete Sketches Animate Sketch Dimensions
3-1
Edit Dening String

Overview Sketches may be used to dene proles for extruded, revolved, or swept features and paths for swept features. Proles are called Section Strings and the paths are called Guide Strings.
Sketch objects that dene another feature of the solid model cannot simply be deleted due to the parent/child dependency relationship. Edit Dening String is accessed by displaying the icon in the Sketch Operations toolbar or via EditEdit Dening String in the sketch environment. This option allows objects to be added to or removed from a string of objects dening a Section String or Guide String that has been used to create a solid feature. When the Edit String dialog displays, the system shows a list of features associated with the active sketch. By default, the top feature in the list is highlighted in the dialog and the sketch objects associated with the feature are highlighted in the graphics area.
To add objects to the dening string, simply select them. To remove objects from the dening string, hold down the Shift key while selecting them.
An option menu is provided to allow ltering of selectable objects. Options are provided for All (the default), Curve, Edge, Face, and Sketch. The radio buttons at the top of the dialog, Section and Guide, are for instances where sketches are used both as a section string for one feature and as a guide string for another feature. In these cases the system provides for editing of dening strings of the non-active sketch because of the associativity of the sweep along guide feature.
3-3
Deleting or Suppressing Sketches

Overview Since sketches are features of the model, they may be deleted or suppressed by choosing EditDelete or EditFeatureSuppress. Sketches may also be deleted or suppressed from the Part Navigator.
3-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Edit Dening String

In this activity you will modify the prole of a part that already exists by changing the curves that dene the prole. Step 1: Open bbqcover_1.
Step 2:
Activate the sketch dening the prole.
Choose StartModeling. Choose EditSketch. Since S21_CROSSSECTION is the only sketch available, it is automatically opened for editing. Step 3: Change the prole dening the part. Make layer 1 Invisible.
Choose Studio Spline
on the Sketch Curve toolbar.
Use the Through Points method. Verify that the degree is 3. Make sure that End Point is active on the snap point toolbar.
Start with the upper left endpoint on the sketch as shown. Follow with points 2, 3, and 4 as cursor locations. Finish with the upper right endpoint as shown.
2 3 4
Choose OK to signal the end of point specication.
Choose Constraints. Select the left angled line and the left endpoint of the spline as shown below. Make sure the spline is highlighted when selecting the left endpoint.
Apply a Slope of Curve
constraint to these objects.
Repeat the previous action for the right angled line and the right endpoint of the spline.
Step 4:
Add six new dimensional constraints to the spline points as shown below. Your numeric sufxes may differ. Be careful to preserve the relationships illustrated.
Step 5:
Edit the dening string for the model. Display the Edit Dening String icon in the Sketch Operations toolbar.
Choose the Edit Dening String icon.
3-7
In the dialog the Section string for EXTRUDED(4) is the only choice available.
With the Edit String dialog still displayed, select the spline to add it to the string. Hold down the Shift key and select the top horizontal sketch line to remove it from the string. Choose OK.
3-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 6:
Convert the extraneous line to a reference line. This line is still needed because the spline is dimensioned to it. Hold down MB3 over the line until the radial pop up options appear. Slide down and to the right to chooseConvert To/From Reference.
Examine the new and improved barbecue cover. Step 7: Close the part.
3-9
Activity - Suppressing and Deleting Sketches

In this activity you will suppress and delete a sketch and observe the effects on features that depend on it. Step 1: Open delete_1.
Step 2:
Suppress a sketch. Choose StartModeling.
Choose EditFeatureSuppress. Choose the sketch named S21_CAM from the Feature Selection dialog. The dependents of the sketch are also selected. This includes all of the features except the datum plane and axes used to dene the sketch plane. Choose OK, and observe the effect on the model. Step 3: Unsuppress the sketch. Choose EditFeatureUnsuppress. Choose all of the suppressed features from the Feature Selection dialog (Choose the top feature in the list and drag with MB1 to the bottom of the list). Choose OK and again observe as the model updates. Step 4: Delete a sketch. Pin the Part Navigator in the open position.
Make sure that you are in the Design View, with Timestamp Order inactive. Expand the Dependencies window. Expand the node for the bottom feature in the hierarchy, Extruded(4). Note that the arcs and lines that make up the extruded section are all named, and all nodes can be further expanded.
Make sure the Extruded(4) node is selected, so that Details are visible. If necessary, expand the Details window In the Dependencies window, note that both the Children and Parents nodes can be expanded.
If necessary, expand the Parents node in the Dependencies window. Examine the parent-child relationships of the feature. Expand any one of the nodes for lines or arcs under Extruded(4). Note that Sketch(3) S21_CAM is the parent of the root feature of the solid body, Extruded(4). Note that the only parents of the sketch are the datums used to position it. Place the cursor over either of the Sketch(3) nodes, then click MB3 and choose Delete. A Notication window pops up informing you that deleting this feature will affect other features.
Choose Information The Information window lists the other features that will also be deleted, every feature except the datums. Close the Information window Choose OK in the Notication window.
Note that all dependents of the sketch are also deleted. There is nothing under the Model Node. The datums now appear under the Unused Items node.
Step 5: Step 6:
Close the part. Examine the customer defaults that affect the behavior of the system as you delete features. Choose FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults. Choose ModelingGeneral, and click the Delete and Suppress tab. On the Delete and Suppress page hover the cursor over the question mark icon for each option to examine a brief explanation of what the option does. Cancel the dialog without saving any changes.
3-13
Animate
The Animate function dynamically displays the effect of varying a given dimension over a specied range. Any geometry affected by the selected dimension is also animated. The behavior of the animation is relative to the existing dimensions and constraints.
Access Animate by displaying the Animate Dimension icon in the Sketch Constraints toolbar, or via ToolsConstraints in the sketch environment.
Dimensions list box: Lists the dimensions that can be animated. Value: The value of the currently selected dimension. Lower Limit: The smallest value that the dimension will be during the animation. The default limit is the selected dimension value minus 10%. Upper Limit: The largest value that the dimension will be during the animation. The default limit is the selected dimension value plus 10%. Steps/Cycle: The number of times that the dimension value changes when it moves from the upper limit to the lower limit (or vice versa). Display Dimensions: Optional: lets you display the original sketch dimensions during the animation.
3-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Animating Sketch Dimensions

Step 1: Step 2: Open animate_1. Animate the rst sketch. Choose StartModeling. Double-click on a sketch curve.
Toggle Show All Constraints
to enabled.
The constraints that presently exist in this sketch are: Lines are either horizontal or vertical. Lines are equal length to each other. Arcs are equal radius to each other. Lines and adjacent arcs are tangent. Display Animate Dimension in the Sketch Constraints toolbar.
Choose Animate Dimension. Pan the sketch so that none of the geometry is hidden behind the dialog.
Select the p5=1 dimension. Type the following values: Lower Limit = 0.25 Upper Limit = 2.75 Steps/Cycle = 20
Choose Apply.
The sketch animates the radius dimension within the animate limits and the present constraints of the sketch. Choose Stop. Change the Steps/Cycle value to 40 and choose OK. Changing the number of steps per cycle slows down the animation. Remember to start relatively fast (low step count) and increase step count only within the ability of your computer to meet your needs. Choose Stop
Choose Finish. Step 3: Animate the second Sketch. Change the work layer to 22 and make layer 21 Invisible. Double-click on a sketch curve. The constraints in the sketch consist of a xed horizontal line and 4 angular dimensions that are associative to each other.
3-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Choose Animate Dimension. Select the p0=43.2 dimension. Choose OK to use the default values. If you are using a space ball, you may zoom and pan during the animation so that you can see the entire range of motion. Choose Stop Edit the p2 dimension formula to read p1*9 . Use the sketch dimension dialog or the formula editor.
Choose Animate Dimension. Select the p0=43.2 dimension. Set the Steps/Cycle back to the default value, 20. Choose OK to accept the remaining defaults. The animation now dynamically reects the new dimensional value. Choose Stop
Choose Finish. Step 4: Animate the third Sketch. (Optional) Change the work layer to 23 and make layer 22 Invisible.
3-17
Review the sketch constraints. Notice the reference line with the constant length constraint.
Choose Animate Dimension. Select the p9=3 dimension. Choose OK to accept the defaults. Choose Stop when you are done viewing the animation.
Choose Finish. Step 5: Close the part.
3-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Summary
The Edit Dening String feature in NX provides the ability to add or remove objects from sketches to change the shape of the sketch. When the strength analysis of your design indicates that you need another rib, you can accommodate the change with a minimum of delay. Suppressing or deleting sketches can provide you a means to create varying congurations of your nal product. In this lesson you: Edited the dening string of a swept feature. Deleted, suppressed, and unsuppressed sketches. Animated sketch dimensions.
3-19
Lesson
Basic Free Form

Purpose Most designers need more control than they can achieve with only lines, arcs, planes, cylinders, and other analytic shapes. Spline Curves and sheets such as various sweeps and meshes take design beyond analytic geometry into you can freely construct any form you require, thus the term free form. Objectives In this introductory lesson you will learn how to: Create splines using three basic approaches Create a sketch on path Create V-Sweep bodies Discover additional NX functionality
4-1
Basic Free Form
Splines
A spline is a standard curve in most CAD systems. Unlike lines and conic curves, the spline can be adjusted to virtually any shape in two or three dimensions. The term spline originated from a long exible strip of wood, metal, or plastic used to lay out various curved shapes. Weights were attached to hold the spline in place. To modify the curve, the weights would be moved. Spline mathematics simulates, and sometimes improves upon, the behavior of physical splines. In our system splines are implemented as Non-Uniform Rational B-splines or NURBS.
Their exible nature and variety of data interpretation methods make splines the foundation of free form modeling. Spline Creation Methods These are the basic methods you can use to create splines: By Poles the spline gravitates towards each data point (pole) but passes through only the two endpoints. This method lends it self well to aesthetic designs. Through Points the spline passes through a set of data points. This method is well suited when there are a small amount of precise data points through which a curve must pass. Fit a specied tolerance or segment count is used in "tting" the spline to its data points; the spline does not necessarily pass through the points. This method is used to control the curve complexity versus precision. With large amounts of technical data, such as output from a uid ow calculation, a t spline using tolerance can minimize the number of data points, making the spline and surfaces made from it easier to use. The resulting curve is not only better behaved, but smoother and accurate to within whatever manufacturing tolerance you specify. With a large amount of approximate data such as scan data, t using segmentation control can yield a simple and elegant curve. Perpendicular to Planes the spline passes through and is perpendicular to each plane in a set. This method is largely used to create curves to help control more advanced free form constructions.
Basic Free Form
Studio Splines interactively create associative or non associative splines. You can create Studio Splines by dragging either dening points or poles. Studio splines were developed for the aesthetic designer who needs to watch a curve develop as the denition progresses.
4-3
Basic Free Form
Creating a Spline
Your customer has supplied you with you a design for a casting. The design consists of a simple cylinder with a central gear well. Your challenge is to design a piece of a smooth plastic case. The case must stay close to the cylinder at both ends, but bulge smoothly outward to accommodate the gear well.
In this activity you will complete the rst step in your design approach. You will create a spline that passes through certain points supplied by your customer. The spline will act as a limiting curve for the rounded part of the case, indicated above by the arrow.
4-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
Step 1:
Open spline. This part contains an existing sketch containing seven points though which your spline must pass.
Step 2:
Activate the CASE_UPPER_BLEND_LIMIT sketch. If the Modeling application is not already active, start it now. Double-click any sketch point to activate the sketch that contains the points. Make sure the sketch is in the sketch orientation.
If necessary, choose Orient View to Sketch. Step 3: Blank the sketch dimensions. Choose Blank on the Utility toolbar.
Choose Class Selection. Choose TypeDimensionOKSelect AllOK.
4-5
Basic Free Form
Step 4:
Create a Studio Spline, Through Points, using the seven existing points. Choose Studio Spline from the Sketch Curve toolbar.
Verify that Through Points is the active Method. Verify that the Degree is 3 and that no other option is active. Make sure that Existing Point is active on the Snap Point toolbar.
Begin by selecting the point at the bottom of your screen. Continue to select points working upward in the sequence shown.
The spline takes shape as you continue to indicate points. After the seventh point is selected, choose OK. Notice how the spline roughly follows the contours of the casting. Step 5: Choose Finish Sketch and close the part.
4-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
Sketch on Path
Sketch on Path provides a single denition process that allows you to create a datum plane perpendicular to a string of curves or edges and a sketch with origin and orientation related to both the path and the datum. Sketch on Path makes it easy to create input for the Variational Sweep or V-Sweep command Sketch on Path captures the master section Guide curves such as curves or edges can be captured by the sketch using Intersect Choose from several orientation functions to control the sketch plane relative to the path: Normal to Path Normal to Vector Parallel to Vector Through Axis
The datum axes are automatically calculated by face properties adjacent to the path Easily move the sketch plane along the path using the Reattach function Reattach a template Sketch in place to make it into a Sketch on path The location of the sketch on its path is dened by a pair of expressions, one for arclength and one for the percentage. If used in dimensions of the sketch on path, these arclength and percentage expressions will update the sketch dimensions according to the current position of the sketch The arclength and percentage expressions can be used to dene design intent in a v-sweep V-sweep generates the full range of values of the arclength and percentage expressions corresponding to all positions of the section along the path The percentage expression divided by 100 is a fraction between 0 and 1; thus pn/100 (where pn is the name of the percentage expression) can be used identically to the controlling parameter in law curves
Basic Free Form
V-sweep
V-Sweep is a free form feature in which the majority of design intent is captured by at least one sketch. A sketch on path controls the dening section of a v-sweep. The sketch contains a point at its origin, which always remains on the path. This point may be used by geometric or dimensional constrains on sketch curves. Additional sketches, curves, or edges may be used to dene rails for the sweep.
in the sketch (Sketch Operations To dene a rail, create an Intersect toolbar) and select a curve or edge string as the rail. V-sweep can create simple geometrically controlled variations:
In the above picture the distance measured radially across the upper plane of the shape is constant. The outside rail controls angle and extent of the outer face.
4-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
V-sweep can create complex variation using expressions like those in law curves:
4
In the above picture the distance measured radially across the upper plane of the shape increased geometrically, controlled by an expression: p32=10+(p29/100)*15 where p32 is the distance across the upper face, and p29 is the percentage parameter of the sketch on path
4-9
Basic Free Form
Embedded Sketches
Some functions, Extrude, Revolve, and Variational Sweep for example, can use a sketch or a set of section curves as input. (Variational Sweep specically requires a Sketch on Path as input.) You have a choice to make about how you proceed to create a section. If you want to extrude, revolve, or sweep a sketch more than once, you can create a sketch in the normal way. If you want to use the sketch only as the basis for one body, you may create the sketch on-the-y, from within the dialog for the body you are creating.
When you create a sketch in this manner it is embedded in the feature you were creating. An embedded sketch will not be visible in the Part Navigator. You can always edit an embedded sketch. First edit the parent feature and then choose the Sketch Section icon in the feature dialog.
4-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
Externalizing a Sketch If you later decide that you want to use an embedded sketch in another feature, you can: Located the parent feature (Extrude, Revolve, or Variational Sweep under the body) in the Part Navigator.
Choose MB3Make Sketch External
The sketch will then appear in the navigator like any other sketch created by InsertSketch.
4-11
Basic Free Form
Activity - Creating a V-Sweep with Sketch on Path

Your customer has supplied you with you a design for a casting. The design consists of a simple cylinder with a central gear well. Your challenge is to design a piece of a smooth plastic case. The case must stay close to the cylinder at both ends, but bulge smoothly outward to accommodate the gear well. In this activity you will complete the second phase of design, a variational sweep with an embedded sketch to determine the changing cross section of the case as it is swept along the length of the cylinder. Step 1: Open sketch_on_path.
The part contains a line extending a bit longer than the cylinder at both ends. You will use this line as the path for your sketch. Step 2: Step 3: Make layer 1 the Work Layer. Begin to create the v-sweep feature. If the Modeling application is not already active, start it now. Choose InsertSweepVariational Sweep.
Choose Sketch Section. The system recognizes that you need a sketch on path for a variational sweep. You are immediately presented with the path selection options.
Basic Free Form
Step 4:
Create a Sketch on Path with origin 60 mm along the straight line shown above from the end near the datum csys. Select the straight line at the end nearest the datum csys as your path. Notice that a datum plane and csys drag handles appear on the path at the point you indicated. Drag the origin drag handle to a point about 60 mm along the line, as shown below.
It will be more convenient if the sketch is oriented so that you look along the line from the end you selected. Double-click the Z axis handle one time, to ip the sketch normal to point towards the opposite end of the line.
4-13
Basic Free Form
When the Z axis ips, the X and Y axes are opposite to the current orientation of the part as seen in a trimetric view.
4
You only need to ip one of the X or Y axes to correct the orientation. Double-click the Y axis handle. The sketch should now be oriented as shown:
Choose OK.
4-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
Step 5:
Complete the sketch by adding three curves as shown.
4
Horizontal line, Length ~90 mm
Click and drag to enter arc mode. Create tangent arc, Radius ~65 mm , Sweep Angle 70 to 80
4-15
Basic Free Form
Length Angle
66 279.87
Drag next line until tangent to the arc, length ~65 mm Step 6: Step 7: Make layer 62 selectable. Constrain the sketch as shown.
Point on Curve, line end to datum axis
4-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
4
Collinear, line to datum plane
Collinear, line to datum plane
4-17
Basic Free Form
Point on curve, line end to datum axis At this point the sketch still needs one constraint. As the sketch moves along the path, you want the upper end of the arc to stay on the spline. In other words, you want the spline to act as a rail for a variational sweep feature. The arc will have a larger radius where the spline is farthest from the angled datum plane at the right, and a smaller radius where the spline is closer to the angled datum plane.
4-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
Step 8:
Create an Intersect to constrain the arc. Choose Intersect on the Sketch operations toolbar. Select the spline as a rail.
Choose OK. Step 9: Constrain the arc end point to be coincident with the new rail. The Intersect operation added a new vertex (or point) to the sketch. In Constraints, use Quick Pick to be sure you select the intersection point. Select the near end of the arc, as shown.
Add a coincident constraint. The curves change to the fully constrained color.
Basic Free Form
Step 10: Use Reattach to drag the sketch to approximately the midpoint of the path.
4
Observe how the radius of the arc updates when you nish the reattach operation.
Step 11: Choose Finish Sketch. Step 12: Complete the Variational Sweep. When you choose Finish Sketch you are returned to the Variational Sweep dialog. Within a second or two, the sketch is automatically selected, and a preview is automatically displayed.
4-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
Choose OK. Step 13: Make layer 62 invisible. Step 14: Thicken the new sheet body into a solid body. Choose InsertOffset/ScaleThicken Sheet. Change the First Offset to 2.0. The Second Offset should be the default, 0.0. Select the sheet body you just created. The direction vector displays at the point where you select the sheet.
4-21
Basic Free Form
Verify whether the direction vector points toward the casting or away from it. If the vector points toward the casting, make the First Offset 2.0. If the vector points away from the casting, make the First Offset 2.0. Choose OK. Step 15: Examine the clearance between the bodies. Choose ViewOperationSection.
Enable 1 Plane. Choose YC-Plane Orientation. Choose Flip Plane Normal. Verify that Cap Display is set to Specify Color.
4-22
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
Drag the normal handle to observe how the new cover design wraps around the gear well.
Choose OK to end the section denition. You can choose ViewOperationSection Toggle at any time to hide or display the most recently dened view section. Step 16: Investigate the body structure of the casting. Pin the Part Navigator in the open position. Verify that Timestamp Order is not enabled. (Option is not checked.) Under the Model node, expand the lowest Solid Body node.
Basic Free Form
The two Solid Body nodes are arranged in order of their creation, with the rst body at the bottom or root of the tree, and the most recent body at the top. Sheet Bodies are arranged separately. If you were to create a second sheet body now, it would appear at the top of the tree, above the node containing the variational sweep. Examine the structure of the body. The body consists of several features, including a shell, some blends, a unite with another solid, and a cylinder at the root.
Step 17: Edit the cylinder to a Height of 400. Choose MB3Edit Parameters over the Cylinder (1) node.
Choose Feature Dialog.
4-24
mt10055_g NX 4
Basic Free Form
Change the Height to 400.
Choose OK in both dialogs to update the part. The sketch containing the associative spline, the path for the v-sweep, and the v-sweep body itself all update along with the cylinder.
Step 18: Close the part.
4-25
Basic Free Form
Summary
In this lesson you: Created a free form curve, a studio spline through a set of specied points. Created a Sketch on Path; a sketch designed to dene a three dimensional shape. Created a free form body, a variational sweep. Discovered embedded sketches. Discovered the Thicken Sheet dialog. Discovered view sectioning.
4-26
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
Expressions
Purpose This lesson describes various aspects of the expression functionality. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Cut, Copy, and Paste functions in Expressions Create comments in Expressions Create Conditional Expressions Suppress a feature by an expression Reference Measurements of geometric properties via expressions
5-1
Expressions
Overview
Expressions are arithmetic or conditional formulas that dene the characteristics of features. You can use the Expressions Editor to dene the formula strings for the expressions in your part. By editing the formulas, you can edit your model parameters. You do not have to type complex text strings to dene the formulas. You can use expressions to parametrically control the relationships between the features of a part, or between parts in an assembly. For example, you can express the thickness of a bracket in terms of its length. If the length of the bracket is altered, the thickness is automatically updated. You can use expressions to dene and control many dimensions of a model, such as the dimensions of a feature or a sketch. You can easily create many types of intelligent expressions based on measurements and inter-part references. All expressions have a single, unique name and a string or formula that can contain a combination of variables, functions, numbers, operators, and symbols. Expression names are variables that you can insert in the formula strings of other expressions. This can be helpful in breaking up lengthy formulas as well as dening relationships that can be used in place of numbers. Expression formulas are evaluated for values. Expression Name length p39 (FLANGE(6) Bend Allowance Formula) Formula 5*width Value 20
(p26+(p64*0.44))*rad((-p24)) -18.84955592
p16 45.0 (EXTRACT_REGION(7) Angle Toler)
45
Expression names are no longer case sensitive, with the following exceptions: Expression names are case sensitive if their dimensionality is set to Constant. Expression names are case sensitive if they were created before NX 3.
When expression names are case sensitive, they must be referenced exactly when used in other expressions.
5-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
The Expressions Dialog

The Expressions Dialog with Less Options
Expression Name
Alphanumeric characters and embedded underscores Cannot use special characters, such as -, ?, * or ! Must begin with a letter
2 3 4 5
More Options Formula Dimensionality Units Choose from Constant, Length, Area, Volume, Mass, and many others Units appropriate to the dimensionality will be available in a pull-down The system will handle unit conversions automatically if, for example, you specify inches in a metric part Not active during editing or if dimensionality is constant
Functions, Measurements, Create Inter-Part Reference, Delete Press F1 for help on expressions any time you are using the Expressions dialog.
5-3
Expressions
The Expressions Dialog with More Options
1, Same as with 35 Less Options 6 Functions, Measurements, Create Inter-Part Reference, Edit Inter-Part Reference, Open Referenced Parts, Delete 2 Less Options 7 Accept Edit 8 Reject Edit 9 Spreadsheet Edit 10 Import Expressions from File 11 Export Expressions to File 12 Expression list List contains columns for Name (followed by usage in the part), Formula, Value, Units, and Comment 13 Listed Expressions Choose from User Dened, Named, Filter by Name, Filter by Value, Filter by Formula, Unused Expressions, Object Parameters, Measurements, and All Not active unless Listed Expressions is in a ltered setting
14 Expression Filter
5-4 Design Applications Using NX
Expressions
Expression List
The expression list displays when More Options has been selected. The listing contains several columns: Name: This lists the expression names currently available with the Listed Expressions settings. The name is followed by the name of the associated object or feature and the parameter option with which the expression is associated. For example, you might see: p2 (EXTRUDED(1) End Distance) p8_u (POINT(6) Point on surface along u) Formula: The formula is a constant value or mathematical expression which appears to the right of the equal sign in the simple equation format name=formula. The simple format appears in certain places such as the listing window or in text les for expression import and export. NX provides tools to help you specify function names, names or formulas of existing expressions, or measurements of geometry. This makes the expression editor extremely versatile and powerful. Value: This is the numeric value of the formula. Units: This column displays the Units selected after the dimensionality of the expression was specied, if they exist. The system remembers units and converts values when it is appropriate to do so.
Comment: Optional additional information a designer may need to include can be stored in comments.
5-5
Expressions
You may control the order of the listed expressions by clicking the name at the top of the column. For example, you may sort by name (the default), by name in reverse order, by formula, and so on.
5-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Listed Expressions
The Listed Expressions pull-down list denes which expressions are listed in the Expressions dialog when More Options has been selected. User Dened lists only expressions you created via the dialog Named lists only user dened expressions and expressions you have renamed Filter by Name lists expressions with names that match the lter
5
Filter by Value lists expressions with values that match the lter Filter by Formula lists expressions with formulas that match the lter Unused Expressions Expressions that are not referenced by any feature or other expression This is useful for part cleanup. Object Parameters Lists expressions associated with a selected feature You must select a feature in the graphic window or Part Navigator. Measurements shows all measurement expressions in the part le All lists all expressions in the part Filters you enter are saved during your session. They can be reused as needed via the pull-down, even in other parts.
5-7
Expressions
System Expressions Expressions created automatically by the system are named with a number, preceded with a lower case p, as with p53. System expression are automatically created during many Modeling operations. Sketch Dimensioning - An expression is created for each dimension (i.e., p2=3.5436) Positioning of a Feature or Sketch - An expression is created for each positioning dimension Feature Creation - Expressions are created for the creation parameters of many features (such as, extrusion start and end limits, revolution angle, hole depth, etc.) Mating Condition Creation
User-Dened Expressions User-dened expressions are any expression that you create yourself with the Expressions Editor. For example, you could create an expression named width with a formula string of 5.0. You could then use this expression to dene the dimensions of a feature by entering width in the appropriate parameter entry eld. Cut, Copy, and Paste The expressions dialog supports cut, copy and paste using MB3 commands. The window supports the standard windows editing keys such as arrows, home, and end. Additionally, when you are entering a formula, you may MB3 over a row in the list window and choose Enter Name or Enter Formula. The name or formula is inserted at the cursor position in the Formula eld.
5-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Comments Comments can be entered in two ways. One method is to double-click over the comment column beside a particular expression in the list. This activates the Comment dialog:
The other approach is to type a double forward slash (//) after the math formula in the formula window. Anything appearing after the double forward slashes is ignored by the formula interpreter, and is displayed in the comments column of the list window. length = 2*width //comment text Expression Operators Operators may be classied into arithmetic, conditional, and relational/Boolean. A full listing of operators is provided in Appendix C.
5-9
Expressions
Insert Function Use the Insert Function icon function to insert into a formula. to locate any standard or user dened
Built-in functions include the following examples, and many more listed in Appendix C: Name abs arcsin sin pi Description Absolute Value, abs(x)=|x| Returns the inverse sine of a given number in degrees Sine, sin(x) is the sine of x, x must be in degrees. The function pi() takes no arguments and returns the value of pi.
The function icon replaces the arrow symbol in parameter entry options when a formula was used for a particular value. The value shown cannot be edited directly. You can click the icon to choose to edit the formula in the Expression dialog, convert it to a Measure, or make the value constant. You have two choices for changing a formula to a constant value. You may select a recently used value or Make Constant to keep the present value of the formula.
5-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Activity - Working with Expressions

In this activity, you will create associativity by linking certain expressions to others, and make the expressions easier to understand by renaming and adding comments. Step 1: Open express_1.
Step 2:
Examine Information for existing expressions. Choose InformationExpressionList All. Notice how the expressions are listed in simple equation format: name=formula on the left followed by values (as comments) on the right. Choose InformationExpressionList All by Reference. Notice how this listing shows information about the parent feature and the function of the parameter associated with each expression.
Step 3:
Examine the existing expressions in the Expression dialog. If necessary choose StartModeling. Choose ToolsExpression. If necessary, choose More Options.
5-11
Expressions
Set Listed Expressions to User Dened. The only expression that was entered into the dialog is thickness. Change Listed Expressions to Named. Several more expressions with descriptive names appear, and thickness remains in the listing. Named expressions consist of User Dened expressions plus any that have been renamed. Notice that the associated feature and the parameter the expressions represent are also listed in the name column. Click the Name heading in the listing window. Notice that the same expressions are listed but they now appear in reverse alphabetic order. Change Listed Expressions to All.
Additional expressions appear in the list. These system expressions are all named with the letter p followed by a unique numeric sufx. Change Listed Expressions to Filter by Name. Change the lter to p* and press enter. Only the system expressions that have not yet been renamed are now displayed.
5-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Step 4:
Rename some expressions. Highlight the p0 row in the listing.
Notice that the name and formula now appear in their respective edit windows. Accept Edit is inactive because no changes have been made. The system identies p0 as the taper angle for feature EXTRUDED(1). In the Name edit window highlight the existing text and then type a more descriptive name, ext_angle. Notice that as soon as you begin to type the Accept Edit button becomes active Press Enter when the new name has been entered. In this particular interaction the enter key and Accept Edit have the same function. When you are using the keyboard it is usually more convenient to use the enter key; while using the mouse it can be more convenient to click Accept Edit. When you press enter p0 is renamed and disappears from the list. ext_angle does not match the lter string p*. Change the lter to ext*. Now ext_angle is listed by itself, because no other expressions start with ext.
5-13
Expressions
Activate the pull-down menu in the lter window and choose p* from the pull-down list. Recently used lters are listed, making it easy to switch back and forth.
Continue to rename expressions p1 to p4 using the information in the listing window and this chart as a guide. p1 p2 ext_start ext_end ext_off1 ext_off2
p3 p4
When you are nished renaming, toggle the name lter to ext*. All ve of the parameters for EXTRUDED(1) should now appear. Change Listed Expressions to All. Click the title of the Name column until the names are listed in alphabetic order. We renamed the system expressions is this example for convenience. It is not necessary to rename system expressions; however, it may be easier for downstream or future designers to understand a part if expressions have meaningful names. Step 5: Build associativity between the inside blend and outside blend. Select blend_outside.
5-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Activate the MB3 menu over blend_inside.
Choose Insert Name. In the edit windows, notice that you are still editing blend_outside, and in the formula window blend_inside has replaced the previous value. Key in a + at the end of the current formula. Scroll the expression list until you can see thickness. Use the MB3 menu over thickness to Insert Name. The formula should now read as follows: blend_inside+thickness Since you are already using the mouse, choose Accept Edit. . Notice that the formula for blend_outside is now updated in the list window. Now the part will maintain a constant wall thickness. If the inside blend changes the outside blend will update accordingly. Step 6: Add a comment to an expression. Select hole_v in the expression list.
5-15
Expressions
Using the MB3 menu over hole_v choose Edit Comment.
In the comment editor key in: hole vertical position and press Enter. Notice that the comment now appears in the comment column. Select hole_h in the list. Edit the formula as shown below: length/2 // hole horizontal position and press Enter. Notice that this comment also appears in the comment column. Commenting in the formula with // allows NX to recognize comments from older versions. Step 7: Close the part. Adding comments is another way of making your part les easier to understand, not only for you but for down stream users.
5-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Activity Dimensionality in Expressions

The purpose of this activity is to use expression dimensionality to mix units within a part le. The part consists of a 50 x 100 mm steel plate; however, some dimensions are specied in inches. The available stock to be used is .125 inch ground steel. A drilled hole is required for a 1/420 UNC thread. The tap drill for 1/420 is an F drill, diameter .257 inches. The tapped hole must be centered on the long dimension and 1 inch from the long edge as shown.
5
Step 1: Step 2: Create a new mm part ***_units where *** is your initials. Choose StartModeling.
5-17
Expressions
Step 3:
Create an expression for the thickness as a length in inches. Using the Expression dialog create a new expression by entering the name: thick Make certain that dimensionality is set to length.
Use the units pull-down to observe the various units available, and choose in (inches). Key in 0.125 as the formula.
Choose Accept Edit. Choose OK. Step 4: Create a block feature. Use 50 mm as the Length (XC). Use 100 mm as the Width (YC). For the Height (ZC) choose parameter entry options. Choose Formula.
5-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Specify the expression thick as the height.
Accept the edit and choose OK to return to the block dialog. Notice that the expression was automatically converted to its mm equivalent. Notice also that the height text entry eld is now insensitive, and that the formula icon has replaced the parameter entry options arrow for the height parameter.
Choose OK to create the block.
5-19
Expressions
Step 5:
Add 6 mm blends to two edges as shown.
You can select edges rst, and then use the MB3 menu over a selected edge to blend.
Step 6:
Add the hole. with the hole dialog open, select the placement and through faces rst. In the diameter entry window type 0.257in (no space!) and then choose OK.
Apply a perpendicular dimension from either of the XC parallel edges and use the Formula parameter entry option to specify half of the BLOCK Size Y dimension as the rst placement dimension. Specify another perpendicular dimension from the longest (unblended) edge. Use the text entry window to specify 1.0in (no space). (If the window inherits the formula from the previous entry, it will be insensitive to typing. Use Make Constant before typing in the above value.)
5-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Step 7:
Examine the expressions. Choose ToolsExpression. Set Listed Expressions to All. Notice that only the thick expression was given dimensionality in. The diameter and one positioning dimension were created on the y, so the units were specied by appending the desired unit value directly to the formula. The numeric part of your system expression names may vary from the illustration.
Step 8:
Close the part.
5-21
Expressions
Conditional Expressions
You have the ability to develop design rule relationships between certain elements of your model. One way to accomplish this is through conditional expressions or conditional equations. Conditional expressions are created by using the if (then) else structure that uses the following syntax: single_variable = if (this condition is true) (then this) else (this) width = if (length>=8) (3) else (2) Alternative syntax is shown below without some of the parentheses. width = if (length>=8) 3 else 2 This means: If the length is greater than or equal to 8, the width shall be 3.
If the length is less than 8, the width shall be 2. Syntax and the command portions of the statement must be lower case.
5-22
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Suppression by Expression
Using this option, you can use an expression to suppress a feature using the expression editor, which provides a list of suppress expressions to edit. This function is not available if Delayed Update on Edit is active.
If a child feature has its own suppress expression, its suppression status will be controlled by that instead of by its parents suppress status (i.e., the child is not automatically suppressed when its parent becomes suppressed). Child features that do not have their own suppress expressions are automatically suppressed when their parents suppress.
5-23
Expressions
Suppress by Expression Dialog Options

Function Create for each Description Allows you to create an expression for the suppression of individual features selected from the list box. Allows you to create a single expression that controls the suppression of all features selected from the list box. Allows you to delete the selected features suppression expression. The list box displays all features which contain a suppression expression. Allows you to delete the selected features shared suppression expression. The list box displays all features which contain a shared suppression expression. If you select a feature, the list box highlights the other features which share that same expression. Allows you to limit the features that appear in the list box. Lists the features that can be selected for a suppress by expression operation. Allows you to generate a report that lists features which contain a suppression expression.
Create shared
Delete for each
Delete shared
5
Filter List box
List
5-24
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Procedure Select one or more features in the list window in the Select by Expression dialog. Select an option. Choose Apply.
The system generates the new expressions and updates the feature selection list. All previously selected features are now controlled by expression(s); therefore, they are moved from the Create list to the Delete list. If the expression value is 0 the feature is suppressed. With an expression value of 1 the feature is unsuppressed.
5-25
Expressions
Activity - Creating Conditional Expressions

In this activity, you will work with a part similar to one you worked with in an earlier activity. You will develop conditional expressions to capture a revised design intent.
Illustration only this is not a screen image Assume that the design intent of the part has changed as follows: The length is 2 times the height. The width is equal to the height. The hole diameter is a function of the height as illustrated in the table below. Part Height >6 >4 but <=6 >2 but <=4 >1 but <=2 <=1 Hole Diameter 5.5 3.5 1.5 0.75 0.0
5-26
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
The hole can be constrained by conditional expressions to capture the intent as follows: hole_dia = if (height>6) (5.5) else (hole_c) If the height is greater than 6, hole_dia will equal 5.5; otherwise evaluate expression hole_c. hole_c = if (height>4) (3.5) else (hole_b) If the height is greater than 4, hole_dia will equal 3.5; otherwise evaluate expression hole_b. hole_b = if (height>2) (1.5 ) else (hole_a) If the height is greater than 2, hole_dia will equal 1.5; otherwise evaluate expression hole_a. hole_a = if (height>1) (.75) else (hole_sup) If the height is greater than 1, hole_dia will be 0.75; otherwise evaluate expression hole_sup. hole_sup = if (height<=1) (0) else (1) If the height is less than or equal to 1, suppress the hole feature; otherwise do not suppress the hole feature. Step 1: Step 2: Open express_2 and activate the Modeling application. Change the height and width Expressions. Choose ToolsExpression, and if necessary choose More Options. Choose length from the Expressions listing. In the following edits, do not forget the Insert Name is available if you wish to use it. Edit the formula to be 2*height, and press Enter. Choose width. Edit the formula to be height, and press Enter. Choose OK. The model updates to reect the changes.
Expressions
Choose Fit. Choose PreferencesSketch. Change the Dimension Label to Value.
5-28
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
The display changes to show the value of the expressions instead of the formulas.
Illustration only this is not a screen image Step 3: Create the hole suppression expression. The design intent species that if the height is less than 1 then the hole diameter will be 0.0. If you attempted to edit the hole diameter to 0.0 you would receive an error. You can meet this aspect of the design intent by creating a conditional expression that controls feature suppression.
Choose EditFeatureSuppress by Expression. Ensure that Create for each is selected. Select the Simple Hole feature. Choose OK.
Expressions
Step 4:
Edit the hole suppression expression to meet the design intent. Choose ToolsExpression. Set Listed Expressions to Filter by Name and if necessary switch to the p* lter, which should still be available from the previous activity. The system expression just created to control the suppression status of the hole feature will have the information (SIMPLE_HOLE(4) Suppression Status. Since all other system expressions were given names and no name started with p, the new expression is the only one in the list. With a value of 1 the hole feature is currently unsuppressed. If the value were 0 the hole feature would be suppressed. Select the suppression expression in the list. Rename it to hole_sup but do not hit enter yet.
Edit the formula to be if(height<=1)(0)else(1) and press Enter. Now the hole_sup expression has captured the design intent as specied at the beginning of the activity.
5-30
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Step 5:
Create the remaining Conditional Expressions. Variables (expression names) used in a formula must be previously dened. Set the expression display to All. Create the expressions shown below: Name hole_a hole_b hole_c Dimensionality Constant Constant Constant Formula if (height>1) (.75) else (hole_sup) if (height>2) (1.5) else (hole_a) if (height>4) (3.5) else (hole_b)
Step 6:
Update the hole diameter to use the expressions just entered. Select hole_dia from the list. Edit the formula to be: if (height>6) (5.5) else (hole_c) and press Enter.
Step 7:
Test the Design Intent. If necessary set Listed Expressions to Filter by Name. Enter h* as the lter. Choose height from the list. Edit the formula to be 7, and press Enter.
Choose Apply and choose Fit. Choose height from the list. Edit the formula to be 5, and press Enter. Choose Apply. Choose height from the list. Edit the formula to be 3, and press Enter. Choose Apply.
Expressions
Choose Fit (MB3). Look at the value of hole_dia from the list. Is the value correct in regards to table at the beginning of the activity? Choose height from the list. Edit the formula to be .75, and press Enter. Choose OK. Did the hole update as required by the design intent?
Illustration only this is not a screen image Step 8: Close the part.
5-32
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Measurements
Use the measurement options to obtain measurement values from objects in the graphics window for your expression formulas.
When you obtain a measurement an expression for it is created and inserted at the cursor position of the expression formula you are editing. The measurement expression is evaluated with the rest of the expression. Measure Distance - Uses the Analysis Distance function to measure the minimum distance between any two NX objects such as points, curves, planes, bodies, edges, and/or faces. The system calculates the three-dimensional distance and the two-dimensional distance relative to the XC, YC plane. Measure Length - Uses the Analysis Arc Length function to measure the arc length of a curve or line. You can use selection intent and section building to measure the length of a set of curves between intersection points. Measure Angle - Uses the Analysis Angle function to display angle measurements between two curves, between two planar objects (planes, Datum Planes or Planar Faces), or between a line and a planar object. Measure Bodies - Uses the Analysis Measure Bodies function obtain multiple expressions for volume, mass, radius of gyration, centroid x, centroid y, centroid z, and surface area of solid bodies. Measure Area - Uses the Analysis Measure Faces function to calculate area and perimeter values of body faces. The system creates multiple expressions for area and perimeter.
5-33
Expressions
Creating and Editing Measurements

Common Options
When you choose Measure Length, Measure Volume, or Measure Area the above icon options bar displays. Measure Distance and Measure Angle include these options and several more. Information displays the specied measurement in the Information window without actually creating an expression. OK creates the measurement and the associated expression(s). Cancel returns to the expression dialog without creating an expression.
5-34
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Distance Options
When you choose Measure Distance the Distance icon options bar appears.
Distance(the default) returns the three dimensional distance between two selected objects. Projected Distance returns the distance as seen in a plane normal to a vector. The vector constructor appears. Screen Distance is not available for the purpose of creating an associative measurement. Length provides the same interaction as Measure Length. Measure to a point is not available for creating associative measurements. Other functions give you the same abilities. Measue Minimum Distance is the default for measure distance. Measure Minimum Distance (Local) nds a local minimum (if one exists) near the point you pick the object. For example, consider an undulating spline curve with several local minimum distances to a line.
Measue Maximum Distance nds the maximum distance between two objects.
5-35
Expressions
Angle Options
When you choose Measure Angle the Angle icon options bar appears.
By 3 Points allows you to select three associative points. By Objects (the default) allows you to select two curves, two planar objects, or a line and a planar object. By Screen Points is not available for the purpose of creating an associative measurement. Object (the default) allows you to select objects as listed above. Use Feature Direction when you want to determine the direction of a feature such as a cylinder. When you select the feature, the system indicates the direction with an arrow(s). is the default for measure distance. Vector constructor allows you to specify a direction. 3D Angle (the default) gives the true angle in three dimensional space. Angle in WCS XY Plane projects the selected angle to the WCS XY plane. Inner Angle (the default) measures the angle inside the lines of the angle Outer (Major) Angle measures the angle outside the lines of the angle Measurements use the Analysis functions. They are documented under GatewayGateway Menu & Dialog ReferenceAnalysis. If you want to save several stand alone measurements at one time, consider using the Analysis function because it offers Apply (Ctrl+MB2) to measure and continue. The analysis dialog offers additional options to save the measure feature or create the line.
5-36
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Measures and Measurements

When you use the Expressions dialog to create a measurement you may think of it as a stand alone measurement. Stand alone measurements can be ltered in the Expression dialog. For every stand alone measurement expression the system creates a Measure feature.
The Expressions dialog lists the value and units of each measurement, but note that the formula column will always read (Measure). Measure refers to the feature that was created. The name column will show the type and timestamp of the measure feature, i.e.; distance; angle; and so on.
5-37
Expressions
Measure features can be seen in the Part Navigator under the Measures node.
When you highlight a measure feature in the Part Navigator the associated measurement expressions and their values are listed in the Details window, and the Measure is highlighted in the graphics window.
5-38
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Measurements During Parameter Entry You may create embedded measurements by choosing the parameter entry options icon to the right of any parameter entry window. Measurements constructed in this manner do not need a Measure feature to manage them; they are attached to the feature you were creating when you specied the measurement. The appearance of embedded measurements in the Expressions dialog reects this difference.
5-39
Expressions
Activity - Applying Measurements

In this activity you will capture some of the design intent with measurement expressions. Line A, an imaginary line, always starts and ends at the corners as illustrated below. Line B, the center line of the hole, is always 90 to Line A and passes through Edge C. The hole depth is always 80% of the F value. The intersection of Line A and Line B is always located at the center of Line A.
5-40
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
Open measure . Verify that the Modeling application is active. Extrude the sketch 250 mm in the default direction and Fit the view. Make layers 21 and 61 invisible. Create reference geometry to orient the hole feature. Choose Datum Axis. Using the Two Points method, select the two endpoints as shown below and choose OK.
Step 4: Step 5:
Choose Datum Plane.
5-41
Expressions
Select the two edges shown below and choose Apply.
Select the datum plane and datum axis, enter 90 for the angle, and choose Apply.
5-42
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Select the new datum plane and the endpoint shown below and choose OK.
5-43
Expressions
Step 6:
Create a stand alone measurement expression. This measurement will provide the "D" value:
Choose ToolsExpression, and if necessary choose More Options.
5
Choose Measure Distance.
Select the endpoints as shown below and choose OK. It might be useful to set the Snap Point options to limit the types of points you can select. Only End Points are necessary for this measurement. For simplicity the new reference features are not illustrated.
5-44
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Set Listed Expressions to Measurements. Notice the new expression has a value of approximately 287.2 mm, and the formula in the list is (Measure). The name of the corresponding feature appears in the Name column, probably p12. (It may differ if you previously deleted anything.) Notice that in the Formula edit window the name of the measurement expression appears. When you choose one of the Measure icons in the Expressions dialog you are actually invoking the Analysis function to create a measurement feature. When you choose OK in the analysis icon option bar the measurement feature is created and you are returned to the Expressions dialog. The system assumes you now want to use the embedded expression for the new measurement feature in yet another new expression. If you entered a new name and accepted the edit at this point you would have the measurement expression, and another expression pointing to it.
Choose Reject Edit. Now the new expression that was pending is cancelled, but the measurement feature is still in the list because it was already complete when you left analysis. Rename the distance measurement expression just created to diagonal. Notice that when you select a stand alone measurement expression only the name may be edited. The formula eld is insensitive. Change Listed Expressions back to All. The next measurement expression will be an embedded measurement to control the depth of the hole.
5-45
Expressions
Step 7:
Create the hole feature. Recall that the hole depth must be 0.8 times the F value:
Choose Hole.
Make sure the Simple icon is selected. Select the last datum plane just created as the placement face.
5-46
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
If required, choose Reverse Side, so the tool body intersects the extrusion.
Accept the default Diameter of 25 mm and the Tip Angle of 118 degrees. To create an embedded measurement, choose Parameter Entry Options beside the Depth entry eld.
Choose Measure.
5-47
Expressions
Select the datum plane through the datum axis and endpoint as shown below and choose OK.
5
Notice that the parameter entry eld for the Depth is now insensitive. The parameter entry options icon has been replaced by the measure icon. This indicates that a measurement was created to control the depth.
5-48
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Choose the measure icon to open the Parameter Entry Options list Choose Formula. In the Expressions dialog, append * 0.8 to the formula for the pending new Depth parameter. (The numeric sufx after distance may vary from the illustration.)
5
Choose Accept Edit. Notice that the pending Depth expression now has a formula of distance18*0.8. (The digits may vary.)
At this point the hole is not constructed therefore a system parameter (p#) has not yet been assigned. The Name column reads simply Depth.
5-49
Expressions
Choose OK to return to the hole dialog.
Note that the parameter entry icon beside the Depth is now Formula. Choose OK to create the hole.
Choose Point onto Line
and select the datum axis.
Choose Horizontal. Choose the Datum Axis in the graphic window as the Horizontal Reference. Select the endpoint on the datum axis, shown below, as the target object. For simplicity the reference features and pending hole body are not illustrated.
5-50
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
In the positioning dialog choose the parameter entry option Formula for the current dimension.
Key in or use the Copy name method to edit the value of the CurrentParm to diagonal/2. This satises the design intent for the hole position. Choose OK to exit from the Expression dialog. When you return to the positioning dialog Apply the new horizontal dimension.
Expressions
Because the position is fully specied, the dialog will close and the hole is created. Step 8: Edit the values of the extrude feature to test the design intent. In the graphics window, place your cursor over the extruded body until it prehighlights and chose MB3Edit Parameters. Click over the End dynamic input box. Key in 125 and press Enter. Choose OK to update the model. The solid body updates per the design intent.
Repeat the edit to make End equal to 500 and again update the part. The hole remains on the midpoint of the diagonal. Step 9: Examine the expressions that were created in the Expressions dialog. Use the key combination Ctrl+E to open the Expressions dialog. Set Listed Expressions to Measurements.
Expressions
Notice that only the stand alone measurement named diagonal is listed. Set Listed Expressions to Object Parameters. Carefully select the hole feature (not the extrusion). Notice that the embedded measurement for depth now has a system name such as p13 (it may vary) and the formula is distance11*.8 (the numeric sufx after distance may vary).
5
Dismiss the Expressions dialog. Step 10: Examine the expressions that were created in the Part Navigator. It may help to pin the resource bar in the open position.
Place the Navigator in the Design View (Timestamp Order off). Select the SIMPLE_HOLE feature in the tree.
5-53
Expressions
If necessary expand the Details area. Notice that the same parameters are listed in simple equation format.
5-54
mt10055_g NX 4
Expressions
Summary
You can use the expression editor eld to perform calculations. You may then copy the value into an actual expression. If you enter an arithmetic statement without an expression name, the system will simply evaluate your statement and will place the value below the expression editor eld. You can create comments when entering a formula by using double forward slashes "//" after the formula and before the comment. When an expression is renamed, it is changed in every occurrence where used. Also, all expression names must be unique. Conditional Expressions allow you to develop design rule relationships between certain elements of your model. Suppression by Expression is a tool that may be used to suppress individual or groups of features based on the value of a single expression. You may use Measurements to create a feature parameter based on some geometric property. In this lesson you: Created and edited expressions. Suppressed a feature using an expression. Created comments in expressions. Created conditional expressions. Created measurement expressions.
5-55
Lesson
Duplicating Features
Purpose This lesson describes some of the various options you may use to create duplicate features. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create a Mirror Body feature Mirror Features Copy and Paste Features
6-1
Mirror Body
Mirror Body lets you mirror an entire body about a datum plane. You can use this, for example, to form the other hand of a left or right-hand part. When you use this option, the system creates a separate feature whose name is Mirror. This feature is listed in the Part Navigator. When you mirror a body, the Mirror feature is associative to the original body; it has no editable parameters of its own. The Mirror Body function is set to use an At Timestamp option. This means that any additional features added to the master body will not be reected in the mirrored body. There is not option to change this at creation time. If the design intent for the mirrored feature is to reect all future features in the master body, then it must be done after the fact using Edit Parameters. Edit the mirror feature and toggle the At Timestamp option to off. To apply the mirror feature functionality, choose InsertAssociative CopyInstance or choose the Instance Feature icon. and then choose Mirror Body.
The following statements describe the mirror feature and its relationship to the original body and the datum plane:
If you change the parameters of a feature in the original (master) body, causing the original body to change, those changes are reected in the mirrored body, providing that those features occurred before the mirror feature (if the At Timestamp option is toggled on). If you edit the parameters of the associated datum plane, the mirrored body changes accordingly. If you delete the original body or datum plane, the mirrored body is also deleted. If you move the original body, the mirrored body also moves. Features can be added to the master body, but will only be added to the mirrored body if At Timestamp has been toggled off. Features can be added to the mirrored body, however, the features will exist only in that body. Features created in the master body, after a mirror instance operation, can be reordered before the mirror instance so that they are also reected in the mirrored body.
6-2
If At Timestamp is toggled off, reordering the mirror function is not possible. You can Unite the original body (1) and mirrored body (2) to create a symmetrical model (3), as shown below.
Procedure Select one or more bodies to mirror. Select a datum plane.
Editing a Mirror Choose Edit Parameters on the desired mirror body. Select the original body of the mirror operation. Adjust the Timestamp setting to on or off.
6-3
Activity - Rectangular Instance Arrays & Mirrored Body

The part requires an array of holes, one of which has been modeled. You will creating a rectangular instance array of the small hole along the top at face of this part. The resulting array of holes can be updated with a single edit. Additionally, a symmetric body is required. One half of the body has been modelled. After you instance the hole feature you will mirror the existing body and unite to obtain the completed body. Step 1: Open mirror_body and choose StartModeling.
ZC YC XC
Step 2:
Create a Rectangular Instance Array. Choose Instance Feature. Choose the Rectangular Array option. You will be creating a row of holes, so you will choose the simple hole listed in the dialog as the feature to instance. Choose SIMPLE_HOLE(3) and then OK. Enter these values: Number Along XC = 5 XC Offset = 7 Number Along YC = 1 YC Offset = 0 Choose OK.
6-4
mt10055_g NX 4
A temporary display of the elongated hole locations are displayed in the graphics area.
Choose OK (or Yes.) The rectangular instance array is complete.
Choose Back so that you can try Mirror Body.
6-5
Step 3:
Create a Mirrored Body Instance. You will now learn how to use the Mirror Body Instance option to create a feature that is an inverse copy using a datum plane (1) and a solid body (2).
Choose the Mirror Body option. The cue prompts you to select the bodies to mirror.
Select the solid and choose OK.
You must mirror the body about a datum plane. The cue prompts you to select the datum plane. Select the datum plane to complete the feature. The mirrored body is created as a separate solid. Note the edges (1) of the two solid bodies.
Although the mirrored body is a separate solid, it is still associated to the other solid and the datum plane. If you were to delete the original body or datum plane, the mirrored body would also be deleted. Cancel the Instance dialog.
Step 4:
Verify the new feature. Open the Part Navigator order inactive). in the Design View (Timestamp
Highlight the highest body in the tree.
Notice that it is the new mirror body that highlights in the graphics window. The Design View feature tree shows the most recent body at the top. For this reason some people call this the body view or part view. Under a body, notice that its features are also shown with the most recent at the top. Since the entire body was mirrored, subsequent changes to any features parameters in the original body would be reected in the mirrored copy. Specify Timestamp Order. Notice the new MIRROR feature at the bottom of the list.
6-7
Step 5:
Unite the two solid bodies into one solid. Choose Unite. Select both the original and the mirrored bodies and choose OK. The two solids are united into one solid body.
Choose Part Navigator. Notice there is now only one body, and the new feature UNITE(7) is at the top of the list.
Step 6:
Close all part les.
6-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Mirror Feature
Mirror Feature allows you to create symmetrical models by mirroring selected features through a datum plane or planar face. To create a mirrored body you would normally use the Mirror Body option. Mirror Feature, however, lets you mirror features within a body. Output from this option is a feature named MIRROR_SET. During the edit of a MIRROR_SET feature, you can redene the mirror plane and add or remove features to it. To apply the Mirror Feature functionality, choose InsertAssociative CopyInstance, or choose Instance Feature and then choose Mirror Feature. ,
1 Feature to Mirror 3 Add
2 Mirror Plane 4 Remove
6-9
Selection Steps
Feature to Mirror - Lets you select the features in the part that you wish to mirror. To specify a feature to be mirrored, highlight it in the Features in Part listing and use the Add button to add it to the Features in Mirror listing. Mirror Plane - Lets you specify the planar face or datum plane through which to mirror the selected features. Description Allows you to limit the number of entries displayed in the Features in Part listing. Standard wildcards can be used (i.e. EX*, * or *PROFILE). Allows you automatically add the dependent features of another feature to the Features in Mirror list. When on, species that all features in the body will be included in the Features in Mirror list, one feature from the Features in Part column must be selected and added to the Features in Mirror list for this to take effect. Displays the names of features that exist in the part. Displays the names of features that have been selected from the Features in Part listing. Allows you to add selected features in the Features in Part listing to the Features in Mirror listing. Allows you to remove selected features from the Features in Mirror listing.
Function Filter
Add Dependencies All in Body
6
Features in Part Features in Mirror Add
Remove
6-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Procedure
Select Mirror Feature from the Instance dialog. If desired, toggle on Add Dependencies or All in Body Select the features to Add. Choose the Add button. Choose the Mirror Plane button. Select the plane to mirror through. Choose Apply.
6-11
Activity - Creating and Editing Mirror Features

In this activity you will apply the mirror feature in several different ways to achieve this design intent:
Step 1: Step 2:
Open part le mirror_feature_1 and choose StartModeling. Mirror the boss feature. Choose Instance Feature. Choose Mirror Feature.
Ensure that Add Dependencies and All in Body are toggled off. Select BOSS(6) and choose Add.
Choose Mirror Plane. Select the datum plane in the graphics window. Choose OK. Notice that the boss sticks out the bottom of the block feature. It is important that you understand the construction techniques that were used to create the solid body. In this case a trimming function was used on the original boss. Choose Cancel.
6-12
mt10055_g NX 4
If necessary pin the Part Navigator in the open position. If necessary display the Design View. (Toggle Timestamp Order to inactive.)
Locate the Mirror Set feature. The Mirror Set, the newest feature, will be at the top of the tree under the solid body.
Double-click over the instance icon for the MIRROR_SET. Locate TRIM_BODY(8) under Features in Part and Add to Features in Mirror. Choose OK until the part updates. Notice that the boss does not protrude through the bottom of the block. Step 3: Mirror the boss and its dependencies. Once again double-click over the instance icon for the mirror feature in the Part Navigator. Toggle Add Dependencies to on. Select BOSS(6) in the Features in Mirror and choose Remove. it
Select BOSS(6) in the Features in Body and choose Add. Notice that the dependencies are now added.
Choose OK until the part updates. Step 4: Identify dependencies of one of the counter bore holes. Select COUNTER_BORE_HOLE(11) in the Part Navigator. If necessary expand the Dependencies area, and expand the tree until all dependencies are shown (i.e.; until no plus signs (+) remain.)
Notice in the tree structure that BLOCK(0) and BLEND(10) are highlighted. By default, magenta highlighting indicates that they are parent features of the selected hole feature. Also notice that CHAMFER(13) is highlighted in cyan. This marks it as a child feature of the selected feature. The same relationships are revealed in detail in the Dependencies window, where you can see that the blend is also a child of the block. Step 5:
6-14
Mirror the counter bore hole.

Choose Instance Feature. Choose Mirror Feature. Ensure that Add Dependencies is toggled on. Select COUNTER_BORE_HOLE(11) and choose Add. Notice that the chamfer feature was not added automatically. Choose Cancel. Select CHAMFER(13) feature in the Part Navigator.
Examine the Dependencies window. Notice that the chamfer feature is applied to both counter bore features. If an attempt had been made to mirror the chamfer feature with only one counter bore hole feature, an error might have resulted, depending which features edge was selected rst in the chamfer. The next step will show how to remedy this situation. Step 6: Remove an edge from the chamfer feature. Use MB3 on the CHAMFER (13) feature in the Part Navigator to Edit Parameters.
6-15
Remove the edge shown below by holding the shift key down and selecting it.
Choose OK. The chamfer is no longer applied to the edge of the second counter bore hole. Step 7: Mirror the counter bore hole. Choose Instance Feature. Choose Mirror Feature. Ensure that Add Dependencies is toggled on. Select COUNTER_BORE_HOLE(11) and choose Add. Notice that the chamfer feature is added automatically.
Choose Mirror Plane. Select the datum plane in the graphics window. Choose OK. Step 8: Close the part.
6-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Copy/Paste Feature
The Copy, Copy Feature and Paste functions let you copy features and paste them within the same part, or from one part le to another. When you paste a feature, you can dene whether the new feature should be connected to its original feature. Copy and Copy Feature If you select features, you can then use EditCopy Feature or EditCopy to copy them. EditCopy can copy assembly components, whereas EditCopy Feature cannot. You can copy one or more features by selecting them from the graphics window or the Part Navigator and then choosing the EditCopy, EditCopy Feature or the Copy icon on the Standard toolbar. If you copy another set of one or more features, they replace whatever was previously copied. If no features are selected, choosing the Copy Feature option displays a dialog with the following: a list of all features that you can choose from for the copy operation, a list of features that are currently selected, and the Add Dependent Features check box. Use the Add Dependent Features option if you want a features dependents also selected along with the feature. Once you have copied one or more features you can paste them using EditPaste.
6-17
Paste When you choose EditPaste, the Paste Feature dialog appears.
6-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Expression Transfer Mode

The Expression Transfer Mode options dene how the expressions in the pasted feature should be related to the original expressions: Function New Description Creates a new expression for the pasted feature that is separate from the original feature. The value of one expression can be changed without affecting the other. Creates an expression for the pasted feature that is associated to the original feature (i.e. p10=p4). This link can be broken by simply removing the reference to the original expression and replacing it with another value. If the copy is in the same part le the expressions of the original feature are used. If the copy is to a different part le then Instance of Original works the same as Link to Original, and an interpart expression is created.
Link to Original
Instance of Original
Parent Transfer Mode The Parent Transfer Mode options specify how parent curves of pasted features should be dened: Function Copy Original Curves Prompt for New Description Creates a copy of the parent curves for the pasted feature. The system prompts you for new curves that will replace the original curves in the pasted feature. The parent curves of the original features are also the parent curves of the pasted feature within the same part.
Instance of Original
6-19
Other Options
The list window shows all the external references for the feature you are pasting. Each unresolved reference has the symbols (-) in front of it. As you resolve a reference (e.g., by selecting placement faces, etc., on the part where you are pasting the feature), the symbols change to (+). You do not always have to resolve all of the references before you can paste the feature. For example, if you copied a sweep feature with 10 curves, the unresolved references include 10 curves. But if you only supply 5 curves before choosing OK, the system may succeed in creating the sweep. If the Parent Transfer Mode is Copy Original Curves, the references for the external curves are marked as resolved. (There may be other unresolved references.) If you select geometry that has a direction vector, Reverse Direction lets you reverse that vector. If the feature has no external references, the Paste Feature dialog appears without the list window and Reverse Direction option. Considerations when using the Copy/Paste Feature Before using the Copy/Paste feature across part les you should evaluate the downstream impacts.
In general there are no issues to consider when the use of the Copy/Paste feature is in a single part le. However, when the feature is applied across part les with any intended associativity, the user must consider if those part les will always maintain a relationship where the system may apply the associative feature.
6-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Copying a Sketch

In this activity you will use a prole dened by a sketch in more than one place in the model.
Step 1: Step 2:
Open cover_valve_body_2 and choose StartModeling. Copy a sketch to create a new feature. Place the cursor over a sketch curve, press MB3 and choose Copy.
Step 3:
Paste the sketch feature to the top of the block. Change work layer to 22. Choose EditPaste from the main menu bar. Set the Expression Transfer Mode to New. Since the actual sketch itself was copied there is no need to select an option for Parent Transfer Mode.
6-21
Select the placement face (1), vertical reference (2), and the sketch external reference (3) as shown below.
Choose OK to paste the sketch.
The different Vertical Reference caused the sketch to rotate and the External Reference was needed to locate the sketch. In the original sketch there was a concentric geometric constraint between the arc and the boss. When you select the circular edge of the boss as an external reference, it is used as the edge for the concentric constraint in the pasted sketch. Step 4: Rename the sketch. Choose Sketch. From the Sketch Name pull-down menu, select S21_FLANGE_0. The layer assignment for the sketch is 22, the name suggests differently.
6-22
mt10055_g NX 4
Click once on the sketch name to highlight and key in S22_Flange. Press the Enter key and the sketch name will update. Step 5: Change the sketch. Choose Fit. Double-click on the radius dimension, enter .5 and press Enter. The sketch is modied. Double-click on the horizontal dimension, enter 4 and press Enter. The sketch is modied.
6
Step 6: Use the sketches to create features of the model. Hold MB3 over one of the curves from the original sketch (S21_FLANGE) until the radial pop up options occur.
Slide the cursor to the right to choose Extrude. Double-click the head of the direction vector to set positive ZC (to intersect with the existing body). Use 0 as the start value and 1 as the end value.
Choose the Unite option.
6-23
Choose Contol+MB2 (or Apply) to create the feature without ending the interaction.
Select one of the curves from the copied sketch (S22_FLANGE) Verify that positive ZC the extrude direction Change the End value to 1.625. Once again choose the Unite option. Choose OK.
Step 7:
Test the associativity. With the cursor on the boss feature, click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters. In the graphics area click on p5=2.250. Key in 2.75.
6-24
mt10055_g NX 4
OK until the part updates.
Notice that both sketches update. Step 8: Close the part.
6-25
Summary
Duplicating features reduces the time you use to create multiple occurrences of the same or mirrored feature. Mirror Body lets you mirror an entire body about a datum plane. You can use this, for example, to form the other hand of a left- or right-hand part. When you use this option, the system creates a separate feature whose name is Mirror. Mirror Feature allows you to mirror features within a solid body about a datum plane on planar face. The copy/paste feature allows the duplication of features within or across part les. It also can be used where feature orientation does not conform to either circular or rectangular array envelopes. In this lesson you: Created a Mirrored Body. Created a Mirror Feature. Copied and Pasted Features.
6-26
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
Assembly Functions
Purpose This lesson introduces functionality available within the assemblies application. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Activate and interpret the Assembly Navigator window Use the pop-up and pull-down menu options in the Assembly Navigator window to manipulate the assembly Rearrange Components in the Assembly Navigator Check clearances of components within an assembly
7-1
Assembly Functions
Assemblies Application
Assemblies licenses are controlled by the Assemblies option on the Start Menu. Toggling Assemblies to active (on) starts the Assemblies license, displays the Assemblies toolbar, and expands the functions available in the Assemblies pull-down menu. Assemblies may also be toggled on by choosing the Assemblies icon from the application toolbar. By default, the Assemblies application will be toggled off at the beginning of your very rst NX session. When you exit from NX the setting (on or off) is (by default) remembered in subsequent sessions. If you do not want the Assemblies application state to be remembered, change the Customer Default setting Assemblies, General, Miscellaneous, Restore Assemblies Application. Customer Defaults are accessed via FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults. As shipped, defaults are dened only at the individual user level. Your system administrator can create and control site and group settings and can determine whether or not you may modify your individual settings. Your classroom environment should include site and group settings. Also, at the user level, various assemblies settings, reference sets in particular, should be dened.
7-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Assemblies pull-down menu

When the Assemblies application is toggled off, the Assemblies pull-down menu has less options (1) than when the Assemblies application is toggled on (2).
Some of the functions in the Assemblies pull-down menu such as WAVE and Advanced are dependent on the availability of other licenses. Some of the options shown in the menu may be hidden, because the menus show only the most popular and the recently used options. In the example (2) above, the options with the gray background were hidden until the menu was expanded.
7-3
Assembly Functions
The Assembly Navigator

The Assembly Navigator gives you a graphical display of the assembly structure of the displayed part in a separate window, and provides a quick and easy method of manipulating components in an assembly. For example, you can use the Assembly Navigator to select components for various operations, as well as to perform assembly management functions such as changing the work part, changing the displayed part, blanking and unblanking components, and more. The Assembly Navigator represents the assembly structure displayed as a tree. Each component is displayed as a node in the assembly tree structure. Many of the functions in the Assembly Navigator can also be found in cascade menus under the Assembly pull-down, however to have the options available you must rst start an Assemblies license by selecting StartAssemblies. Opening the Assembly Navigator
on To open the Assembly Navigator, click the Assembly Navigator tab the resource bar. Once open, you may choose to keep it open by selecting the pin in the upper right corner. If you wish to open the Assembly Navigator in a separate window, simply double-click the tab.
7-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Selecting Components
When you can select components using a dialog (e.g. InformationObject), you can also select them using the Assembly Navigator by choosing the appropriate node with MB1. You can select single or multiple components. When selection is complete, you can process the components in the list by choosing OK from the dialog. To select multiple components in the Assembly Navigator, select the rst component and then either: Use Shift+MB1 on another component to select all the components between those components. Use Ctrl+MB1 on another component if you want only it and the rst component.
You can also use Shift+MB1 on components in the graphics window or Ctrl+MB1 on components in the Assembly Navigator to deselect them. You can select components from the graphics window. If a component is the rst logical selection it will be selected automatically. You have the option of using Top Selection Priority Component (C) if other objects in the work part are tending to interfere with your selection. Components are identied on the Quick Pick menu. You can use the Components lter in Quick Pick to lter only components.
Quick Pick listing components, features, bodies.
Same selection ltered for Components.
7-5
Assembly Functions
Identifying Components If you click MB1 while the cursor is over a non-work part whose check box has a red check, that part is highlighted. The highlighting stays until you select another part. (Hovering the cursor without clicking MB1 has no effect.) If you hover the cursor over a part that is not visible (e.g., blanked, on another layer, out of the reference set, unloaded), a box dening the boundaries of the component appears in the graphics window. The box disappears when you move the cursor to another part. This only happens when the Preselect Invisible Nodes preference is toggled on. Checkboxes for parts that are not visible will have a thin gray check or no check.
7-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Pop-Up Menu Options

If you position the cursor over a node in the tree that represents a component and click MB3, a pop-up menu will appear. The options that appear on the menu are determined by the type of component that is selected.
7
Blank / Unblank Blank or unblank components and subassemblies. (Blanking a subassembly causes it and all its components to be removed from the graphics display. Unblanking a component restores it to the graphics display.) Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete will allow you to Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete Components within the Assembly Navigator. Replace Reference Set Replaces the display of a component in the graphics screen with one of its reference sets. Reference sets are discussed in the next lesson.
Assembly Functions
Open Opens various components within the assembly structure.
Close Closes the selected component (the Part option) or the entire assembly (the Assembly option). If the part has been modied, the Part (Modied) option will be active to alert you that you might wish to rst save the le. Once you have closed the component part, you can later reopen it using the Open option. If you selected multiple components, Part closes only the components that are not modied, while Part (Modied) closes all of them.
Properties Duplicates the AssembliesComponentsProperties option for assembly components. This will be discussed in depth later in this lesson.
7-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Drag and Drop in the Assembly Navigator

While holding down MB1, you can select a component, drag, and drop it into another subassembly. If the component is dropped onto a piece part, the piece part will turn into a subassembly. Only loaded components can be dragged. Drag and Drop will not work under the following conditions: The target is not loaded. The dragged component already has an instance of the target as its child, which would create a cyclic assembly structure.
You can choose to receive a warning message after you have dragged and dropped components. This can be toggled on and off in PreferencesAssembliesWarn on Drag and Drop.
7-9
Assembly Functions
Activity - Activating and Using the Assembly Navigator

The intent of this activity is to explore Assembly Navigator functionality. Step 1: Step 2: Open hole_punch_assm and choose StartModeling. Choose StartAssemblies and verify that the application is now active. Activate the Assembly Navigator. Choose Assembly Navigator. Pin the Assembly Navigator open. Step 4: Verify the part names corresponding to visible geometry in the assembly Select various nodes in the Assembly Navigator, notice the associated component geometry highlights in the graphics screen. Step 5: Use the Assembly Navigator to select components. From the Assembly Navigator window, select one of the hp_punch_block nodes.
Step 3:
Choose InformationObject. The information window appears automatically, listing data about whatever objects were selected when the Information option was chosen. Examine the data in the information window. Close the Information window. Step 6: Collapse and expand the assembly node.
7-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Click on the Expand/Collapse button, as shown below, to collapse the assembly tree.
Click on the Expand/Collapse button again to expand the assembly tree. Step 7: Pack a component that has multiple occurrences. Place the cursor over one of the hp_punch nodes. Press MB3 and choose Pack from the pop-up menu. Step 8: Blank and Unblank components. Using the MB3 pop-up menu, Blank the hp_lever. Note that the hp_lever component geometry has disappeared from the graphics display. Blanking and unblanking can also be accomplished by simply clicking on the check box. Using the check box, Unblank the hp_lever. Step 9: Change the Displayed Part and the Work Part using the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu. Using the MB3 pop-up menu, make the hp_frame the Displayed Part.
Assembly Functions
Step 10: Change the Displayed Part back to the hole_punch_assm. Place the cursor over the node in the Assembly Navigator. Press MB3 and choose Display Parenthole_punch_assm. The initial behavior at this point is governed by a default, AssembliesGeneralWork PartMaintain Work Part. If the option is active the frame would remain as the work part. If the option is inactive the work part will be the displayed part. This initial behavior will be overridden in subsequent sessions by setting a preference in PreferencesAssemblies. Step 11: Change the work part. Over the packed hp_punch node, press MB3. Notice that one entry, Make Work Part, is in bold text font. When a menu item is in bold text it means that action is the double-click action. Close the MB3 menu without choosing an action. (Click somewhere else.) Double-click on the icon for the hp_shaft component in the navigator. Notice that the shaft becomes the work part. Other parts change color according to an assemblies default setting and preference, Non-Work Part Color. Step 12: Close all parts.
7-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Specifying Columns
You may add, remove or reorder columns in the Assembly Navigator by placing your cursor over any header in the Assembly Navigator, clicking MB3 and sliding down to Columns in the subsequent menu. When that menu expands you may choose to turn on or off a particular column, or choose Congure to open the Assembly Navigator Properties dialogue.
7-13
Assembly Functions
Assembly Navigator Properties
Columns list box - The list of possible columns that may appear in the Assembly Navigator. The columns that are currently visibly are checked. The position of the columns in the Assembly Navigator may be modied by choosing the Move Up or Move Down buttons. The rst column in the Assembly Navigator must be one that identies the component, such as Part Name, Component Name, or Descriptive Part Name. The system will not allow you to move any other choices to the top of the list. Attribute - Allows you to enter an Attribute Name which may then be added to the Column List Box by selecting the Create icon beside the window. Any Attribute added to the list box may be deleted by choosing the Delete icon below the Move Down icon.
7-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Assembly Navigator Columns The columns that can appear in the Assembly Navigator are described in the following table. Column Descriptive Part Name Component Name Part Name Read Only Description Displays the descriptive part name of the part. Displays the component name of the part. This column will be blank for the displayed part. Displays the le name of the part. Displays the current read status of the loaded parts: = Read & Write = Read Only = Partially Loaded = Read only (Part Family Member) Tells if a part has been modied in the current session: = Modied blank = Unmodied Displays the mating or variable position of the parts: = Unconstrained = Partially Constrained = Fully Constrained Displays the number of components in the assembly or subassembly, including the assembly or subassembly itself. Displays the name of the current reference set. This column will be blank for the displayed part. Tells whether a part is out of date: = Out of date blank = Up to date File Description Units Weight (lb) Weight (g) Weight (kg) Displays the le description, where one is dened, of the part. Indicates whether part is inch or metric. List the weight of the part in pounds. List the weight of the part in grams. List the weight of the part in kilograms.
Modied
Position
Count
Reference Set Out of Date
7-15
Assembly Functions
Column Weight Status
Description Indicates whether: = Weight OK. = Asserted weight. = Unreliable value. = Outside weight limits.
Color
Displays the color of the part, if it has been modied in the assembly. "Not Set" indicates that the color attribute from the component part le is being used. Displays the current layer of the component. "Original" indicates that the original layers of the component le are being used. Indicates whether a part has been deformed. Species the active arrangement for the displayed part. For each component in the assembly, this column species the components used arrangement. If there is only one assembly arrangement in a part, this column is blank for all components of that part. This emphasizes the components where you can choose a different arrangement.
Layer
Shape Arrangement
Position Control
Species the highest-level parent (in the displayed assembly) that controls the selected components position. This column is blank if the component is unloaded or if the highest-level controlling parent is the immediate parent.
7
Suppression Control
Species the highest-level parent (in the displayed assembly) that controls the selected components suppression state. This column is blank if the component is unloaded or if the highest-level controlling parent is the immediate parent.
7-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Column Transient
Description A transient part status indicates that the part was generated from a non-NX representation, such as a virtual assembly structure or a foreign CAD system. A transient part behaves like regular parts in most ways, except that it cannot be saved as an NX part le, nor will any UGMASTER dataset be added to an item revision in NX Manager. Instead, the NX part representation is regenerated from the non-NX item representation each time it is opened. If you want to change a transient part to a regular NX part, you can use the Remove Transient Status option on the parts Assembly Navigator node pop-up menu.
Incomplete
An incomplete part is one whose NX occurrence structure does not represent the full assembly structure found in Teamcenter Engineering. An incomplete structure provides a much less cluttered Assembly Navigator display than a full display would. It can also provide greatly enhanced performance over generating a complete NX assembly structure that encompasses the entire BOMView Revision (BVR) structure. Incomplete parts behave like regular NX parts; only the Assembly Navigator display is affected.
Filtered
Indicates whether the Assembly Navigator shows a ltered view or a complete view for each assembly. NX Manager only Shows whether a component is just a reference component
Reference-Only
7-17
Assembly Functions
Component Properties
The Component Properties dialog provides status information about the selected component(s), as well as the ability to modify many of the component properties (such as blank, layer, suppress, attributes, and the component name). The Component Properties dialog may be accessed in several ways: Select the component from the Assembly Navigator and choose Properties from the MB3 pop-menu. Select the component from the graphics screen and choose Properties from the MB3 pop-up menu.
7-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Assembly Property Page

The Assembly page lists the Load Status, and has options to Blank, change the Layering method, or open the Information window. If any modications to Color, Translucency and/or Partial Shading have been performed at the Assembly level this is indicated. Removing any of those toggles would cause the component object to use the Color, Translucency and/or Partial Shading attributes from the component part le.
7-19
Assembly Functions
Attributes Property Page

The Attributes page provides the Title and Value of each existing attribute, a button that lets you Delete the highlighted attribute, and text elds that let you create new or edit existing attributes. When editing attributes, you can only edit or delete part attributes if the component is the displayed part. Creating attributes while the assembly is the displayed part will generate assembly level object attributes.
7-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Parameters Property Page

The Parameters page shows the Component Name, Assembly Arrangements, the Active Arrangement, and the Part Family options Update and Information. The part family Information option is also available from AssembliesReportsFamily Report.
7-21
Assembly Functions
Weight Property Page

The Weight page shows information about the components weight (if loaded) and options as to when to update the Weight data (On Save or Now).
7-22
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Part File Property Page

The Part File page shows information about the components part le (if loaded) such as: Header Status, Header Description, Machine Format, File Compression, Part File Format, Part File Type, Creation Date, and Creation Time. If the Mating Constraints of any component have been saved they will be listed at the bottom of this page.
7-23
Assembly Functions
General Property Page

The General Property Page is another opportunity to change the Component Name of the part. On this page the names can be indexed, specically located, or deleted. Access to the information window is also available.
7-24
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Check Clearances
This provides a simple way to check the clearances between components in the displayed assembly. A status will be listed describing a touching or hard interference with the selected components. This may be accessed by choosing AssembliesComponentsCheck Clearances or the Check Clearances icon on the Assemblies toolbar.
7-25
Assembly Functions
Activity - Assemblies User Interface

The intent of this activity is to familiarize you with conguring the Assembly Navigator, editing component properties, and checking interference. Step 1: Open the part le plate_assm. choose StartModeling and verify that the Assemblies application is on. Change the columns in the Assembly Navigator. Pin the Assembly Navigator open. Place your cursor over the Descriptive Part Name header, click MB3 and select ColumnsCongure. Check the box in front of Component Name. Choose OK to nish changing the Assembly Navigator columns. Adjust the width of the Assembly Navigator to see the Component Name column. Step 3: Rename a component object using the Component Properties dialog. In the graphics screen, move the cursor over the mt_plate_1 component.
Step 2:
With the cursor over the component, click MB3.
7-26
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
On the pop-up menu, choose Properties.
Choose the Parameters tab from the Component Properties dialog. Change the Component Name to PLATE_1, and Apply the dialog.
Notice the component name has changed in the Assembly Navigator. Choose Cancel. Component names and le names can differ. This allows you to easily distinguish between multiple component instances of the same part le. Step 4: Check clearances for one of the plate components.
Assembly Functions
Choose Check Clearances. Select the upper mt_plate_1 component and OK. The system will identify touching interferences with the bushings and spacers.
Select one of the interferences from the list and choose Isolate Interference. All components except those involved in the selected interference will be blanked. You can also double-click on an interference to perform an isolation. Choose Cancel. Step 5: Close all parts without saving.
7-28
mt10055_g NX 4
Assembly Functions
Summary
The Assembly Navigator provides a graphical display of an assembly which allows you to quickly and easily select components and manipulate the assembly. In this lesson you: Used the pop-up and pull-down menu options to perform operations on components in the assembly. Checked clearances between components within an assembly.
7-29
Lesson
Reference Sets
Purpose Reference sets allow you to limit the amount of information displayed in an assembly by component parts. When you display all of the data that is contained in the component parts to an assembly, the assembly view can become very cluttered and difcult to manage. Reference sets will also allow you to show alternate representations or simplied versions of the model. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create reference sets in components Replace reference sets for individual components in an assembly Dene default reference sets in Load Options Edit reference sets. Observe the creation of automatic reference sets by the system.
8-1
Reference Sets
General Concepts Concerning Reference Sets

A reference set is a named "subset" or "group" of data that is dened in a component part (a piece part or subassembly). Reference sets can be used at the next level assembly to control what is displayed from the component part. Below, illustration 1 depicts a component part. Illustration 2 shows a reference set that may be dened within the component part.
A reference set may contain the following data: Name, Origin, and Orientation (translation matrix) Geometric Objects, Datums, Coordinate Systems, Component Objects Attributes (non-geometric information used for a parts list)
Using Reference Sets After a reference set is dened in a component part it can be used in an assembly. There are two primary reasons for using reference sets. Exclude, or "lter" unwanted objects in a component part so that they do not appear in the assembly. Represent a component part in the assembly with alternative or simpler geometry than the complete solid body.
Reference sets let you control the amount of data that is loaded from each component and viewed in the context of an assembly. A well-managed reference set strategy can lead to: Faster load times Reduced memory usage Less cluttered graphics displays
8-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Default Reference Sets

Every component in an assembly may access ve system managed reference set conditions: "Entire Part" condition "Empty" condition Model Reference Set Lightweight Reference Set Simplied Reference Set
The Entire Part Condition The Entire Part condition is the default component part condition and refers to all model geometry in a part regardless of any dened reference sets. Displaying the Entire Part is a quick way to address all model geometry in a component.
8-3
Reference Sets
Empty The "Empty" (1) reference set is used as a place holder in an assembly when the part geometry need not be seen. The Model (2) reference set contains the solid geometry of the component part.
When a component is replaced with its Empty reference set, any associative drafting objects in the assembly will be retained according to the Retain Annotations setting in PreferencesDrafting. When the geometry reappears by replacing reference sets, the drafting objects will return to their active state. When an assembly is opened, a component represented by an empty reference set will remain unloaded.
8-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
The Model Reference Set

By default NX provides a special reference set known as the Model Reference Set. The basic concept behind the model reference set is to collect the objects that you want to use for visualizing or doing mass analysis. Typically, objects you would see once the part is physically manufactured comprise the model reference set. The Model Reference Set contains the actual model geometry, which can include: Solids Sheets Disassociated faceted representations
Whenever a solid, sheet, or disassociated facet body is created, it is automatically added to the parts model reference set under the following conditions: The work part must be a piece part. Disassociated facets and solid bodies always get added. Sheet bodies are added two different ways, according to a default setting, FileUtilitiesCustomer DefaultsAssembliesSite StandardsReference SetsContents. If the setting is Sheets and Solids, the current default, sheet bodies are always added to the model reference set. If the setting is Solids Priority, a legacy default, then sheets are added only if there are no solid bodies in the reference set. Under this setting the assumption is that sheets created after the rst solid are there only to help modify the solid or to construct additional solids. Construction and reference geometry, such as curves or datums, are ignored.
The system uses the model reference set in several operations or calculations, including: Weight or mass Bounding box size (for spatial ltering) True shape data (for spatial ltering even more accurate than bounding boxes) Lightweight reference set Teamcenter Visualization translation les (.jt les) The above applications are advanced topics and may require additional licensing. Please consult the Help les for more information.
8-5
Reference Sets
Your company can specify a reference set name for the model reference set. To simulate a company standard for this class we customized the model reference set name to be BODY. The default name for the model reference set is MODEL.
The Model Reference Set Name is set under the Assemblies Site Standards section of Customer Defaults. Notice from the illustration that defaults may be specied at various levels, some or all of which may be read-only. The same page allows you to specify whether component objects are added to the model reference set of an assembly automatically. The default is to add them automatically. You may also specify additional reference set names that will be recognized as model reference sets during Teamcenter Visualization translation.
8-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
The Lightweight Reference Set

A lightweight reference set is one that contains a facetted representation of each body in the model reference set, and optionally, certain easily represented geometry: Planar faces Cylindrical faces Conical faces Centerlines Lines Arcs Approximate circles
The system maintains the lightweight reference set automatically during part save if a name for it is dened in customer defaults:
8
To simulate a company standard for this class we customized the lightweight reference set name to be LITE. The lightweight reference set has several advantages: Retrieval is faster. Less system memory is used. Attribute information is still available. Dimensions to the assembly are associative.
Reference Sets
The Simplied Reference Set

The simplied reference set is maintained automatically if you dene a name for the Simplied Reference Set Name customer default, such as ENVELOPE. To simulate a company standard for this class we customized the simplied reference set name to be ENVELOPE at the User level.
Once you have dened the simplied reference set, any wrap assembly or linked exteriors that you create are automatically added to this reference set.
8-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
User Dened Reference Sets

Mate Reference Sets If you want to access the datums used by your assembly for mating, a reference set that contains those datums may be useful. You can also switch to the entire part reference set to access the mating datums but if this makes your display too cluttered, consider establishing a standard reference set, such as MATE, that includes only the necessary datums. Another (often better) way to control datum visibility is to use layers. Layer control has several advantages over using reference sets, including: If you follow the standard of placing components on their original layers and allocating a standard range for datums, you can quickly determine which layer can be used to turn the datums on and off. When you use partial loading, if the datums are included in the currently active reference set, the part will not be forced to load more data than necessary.
Drafting Reference Sets Some parts use reference geometry that needs to be dimensioned in drawings, but is not needed otherwise. You can put such geometry into a reference set, such as DRAFTING, to be used in drafting non-master les. You can also place view dependent objects, such as utility symbols and dimensions, into reference sets, to enable them to be seen at the assembly level. For example, the part below was designed as a cable around a given centerline. You would not normally want to see the centerline in assemblies, but you might need it for a dimension in a drawing.
8-9
Reference Sets
Representing Components with Simple Geometry You may want to create one or more reference sets that contain simple representations of components. Large or complex parts can affect assembly performance. For example, if your assembly contains a sheet metal door with hundreds of louvers, using a reference set that represents the door as a simple block may improve performance. The illustration shows simplied reference sets consisting of only a simplied solid and the guide string of a tube.
Using these SIMPLE reference sets in the assembly will let the component load faster, use less system memory, and allow for quicker graphic updates, yet still display selectable geometry for the component.
8-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Right Hand and Left Hand Parts One application of reference sets is to control the use of left-hand and right-hand parts in an assembly when both congurations are in the same component part le. This can be achieved with the following procedure. Create a solid for either the right or left hand part. Mirror the solid body using InsertAssociative CopyInstanceMirror Body. Create a reference set named "RH-BODY" and add the right hand solid to it. Create another reference set named "LH-BODY" and add the mirrored solid to it Specify the appropriate reference set when adding the part to the assembly. Specify attributes for the right and left hand reference sets to differentiate them in the assembly, especially if generating a parts list. Right and left hand parts can be created in separate part les using the Wave Geometry Linker. In this case, different reference sets would not be required.
8-11
Reference Sets
Creating Reference Sets

There are three situations in which you can create a reference set: In a component part, outside of an assembly, when the component is the displayed part and the work part. In a component part, when designing in context of an assembly with the assembly being the displayed part and the component the work part. From an assembly during creation of a new component. (Top-Down). The reference set will exist in the new component.
Automatic Reference Sets Once you have dened customer default names for the model, lightweight, and simplied automatic reference sets, the system automatically adds objects that you create to the appropriate reference set. You can, however, modify a model, lightweight, or simplied reference set by (for example) adding or removing objects, as described above in "Modifying a Reference Set". You cannot modify the permanent reference sets (entire part and empty).
8-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Reference Sets may be created and edited by choosing FormatReference Sets from the menu bar.
After choosing the Create icon (1) you will be prompted to enter a name for the reference set and select the objects to include in the reference set. The following rules apply to reference set names: Must be 30 characters or less. They are not case sensitive. The system automatically converts all names to uppercase characters. We recommend that you use a common name for reference sets to make it easier to replace them in the assembly and to assist those using the component as a master model. Setting a model reference set name and using automated reference set addition in the user defaults makes standardization easy.
8-13
Reference Sets
Origin and Orientation You can dene a reference set coordinate system and origin in the Create Reference Set dialog.
If Create Reference Set CSYS is toggled to No, the reference set will use the Absolute orientation and origin by default. If Create Reference Set CSYS is toggled to Yes, you will be prompted to specify an orientation using the coordinate system orient menu and specify an origin point using the Point Constructor dialog. The orientation and origin of the reference set will not affect the location of the components in existing assemblies. Creating reference set origin and orientation is primarily done by companies who need to specify a rigged position, otherwise this feature is not recommended as Best Practice. Variable positioning or arrangements (discussed later) are easier, more powerful, and more visible to the user. Add Components Automatically If Add Components Automatically is toggled to Yes, any new components added to the assembly are also added to the reference set. All existing components are selected automatically and will be added to the reference set unless you explicitly deselect the components that you do not want. This is particularly useful if you adopt a standard for model and lightweight reference sets.
8-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Reference Set Information

You can obtain information about reference sets that reside in the work part by choosing InformationAssembliesReference Set from the main menu bar or by selecting the information icon from the FormatReference Sets dialog.
When you request information on a reference set using the InformationAssembliesReference Set method, the system will: Highlight the members of the set in the graphics window. Display the origin and orientation in the graphics window. Provide a listing of relevant data in the Information window.
When you request information on a reference set by selecting the information icon from the FormatReference Sets dialog, the system will: Provide a listing of relevant data in the Information window.
8-15
Reference Sets
Activity - Taking a look at Reference Sets

In this activity, you will verify the contents of the model reference sets created automatically by NX in piece parts of a subassembly (xed_jaw_assm), which is a component of a larger assembly (vise_assm). You will see the reference sets have common names, "BODY", as dened by the system environment variable.
Step 1:
Verify the Do Not Load Components setting. Choose Open. Ensure the Do Not Load Components option is off.
Step 2:
Open the part xed_jaw_assm and choose StartModeling.
Step 3: Step 4:
Verify that the Assemblies application is active. Open the Assembly Navigator. Choose Assembly Navigator
and pin open.

mt10055_g NX 4
8-16
Reference Sets
Step 5:
Verify the reference set in the xed jaw. In the Assembly Navigator, select the xed_jaw node with MB3 and choose Make Displayed Part.
Choose FormatReference Sets. Notice the BODY and LITE reference sets are already created and is listed as Model ("BODY") and Lightweight (LITE), which identies that they were created automatically. We are taking advantage of customer defaults that allow us to name the reference set that contains only the appropriate model geometry, in this case just the solid body, and the lightweight reference set that contains a facetted body created when the part is saved. The default name for the model reference set is MODEL, so the Reference Sets dialog would display Model (MODEL). Step 6: Verify the contents of the model reference set. Select Model ("BODY") from the dialog and choose the information icon. Note the data in the Information window and then minimize it. Step 7: Verify the contents of the lightweight reference set. Select Lightweight ("LITE") from the dialog and choose the information icon. Note the data that was appended in the Information window and close it. Choose Close in the dialog.
Reference Sets
Step 8:
Make the xed_jaw_assm the displayed part and work part. In the Assembly Navigator window select the xed_jaw node with MB3 and choose Display Parentxed_jaw_assm.
Step 9:
Verify a reference set in the context of the assembly. In the Assembly Navigator, double-click on the jaw_plate node to make it the Work Part. Choose InformationAssembliesReference Set. Choose the BODY reference set from the list. Choose OK. Note the data in the Information window and Exit it. Now notice the highlighted geometry in the graphics window. Notice similar information is shown using this method of interrogation, however if you dismiss the information window the geometry that is contained in the reference set is highlighted in the graphics window and CSYS vectors are displayed at the component origin. Choose Cancel in the Choose Name dialog.
Step 10: Do not close this part, you will use it in the next activity.
8-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Replacing Reference Sets

Although reference sets are created in the component parts, you actually use them in the next level assembly. You can benet from using reference sets by: excluding unwanted objects from the assembly to reduce clutter. representing components with simpler geometry to improve system performance.
While working in context of an assembly, you may often need to change the display of various components to show different reference sets. The action of changing the currently displayed reference set of components in an assembly is termed replacing reference sets.
8-19
Reference Sets
Replacing Reference Sets with the Assembly Navigator

The MB3 pop-up menu in the Assembly Navigator is a convenient way to replace reference sets for individual components. When you select the Replace Reference Set option on a component node in the Assembly Navigator, a menu of existing reference sets in that component appears with the one currently displayed in the assembly insensitive.
Choosing a reference set from the list changes the display of that component as it appears in the assembly.
Although you perform this action on a component node in the Assembly Navigator, you are actually changing the reference set name that is stored with the component object in its parent assembly.
8-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Replacing Reference Sets for Selected Components

Procedure Optionally, set the top selection priority to Components. Select the Component(s) With the cursor over a selected component, press MB3 and choose Replace Reference Set. With multiple components selected, it may be necessary to use the "Selection" option to choose the desired Reference Set for all selected components.
8-21
Reference Sets
Replacing Reference Sets in Context of an Assembly

Another way to replace reference sets in an assembly is by choosing FormatReference Set from the main menu bar and then choosing Set as Current. This option only works if your work part is set to the component of which you would like to replace the reference set. One benet with this dialog is that you can create the reference set in context of the assembly and then immediately use the new reference set by choosing the Set as Current icon in the same dialog.
By an Assembly Preferences default (Display as Entire Part) when you make a component the work part the entire part reference set is automatically displayed.
This behavior is initially controlled by the Customer Defaults setting Assemblies, General, Work Part, Display using Entire Part Reference Set. Currently, once you have set the assemblies preference, this information is stored in your prole and overrides the customer default.
8-22
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Activity - Replacing Reference Sets in an Assembly

In this activity you will replace the reference sets displayed in the xed jaw assembly. Step 1: Make the xed_jaw_assm the work part. In the Assembly Navigator, double-click on the xed_jaw_assm node to make it the Work Part. Step 2: Review the currently displayed Reference Sets using the Assembly Navigator. It may be necessary to stretch or scroll through the Assembly Navigator window to see the Reference Set column. You may remove the Component Name column if you wish.
Even though there are reference sets named BODY in each of the three components of the xed jaw assembly, you have not yet told the assembly to display them.
8-23
Reference Sets
Step 3:
Replace the reference set for the xed jaw. In the Assembly Navigator window, select the xed_jaw node with MB3 and choose Replace Reference SetBODY from the pop-up menu.
The system updates the display of the xed jaw so that you only see the solid. The other components will still be displayed in their entirety. You can easily replace the reference set for multiple occurrences of a component on the same level of an assembly by packing the nodes rst.
8-24
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Step 4:
Replace the reference set for the plate_screws using Global Selection. Select both plate_screws from the graphic window with MB1. On one of the highlighted components, choose MB3. Choose Replace Reference SetBody.
Both of the components are displaying their BODY reference sets so only the solid bodies are displayed.
8-25
Reference Sets
Step 5:
Replace the reference set for the jaw_plate while working in context of the assembly. In the Assembly Navigator window, select the jaw_plate node with MB3 and choose Make Work Part from the pop-up menu. Choose FormatReference Sets. Select Model ("BODY") from the list then choose the Set as Current icon. Choose Close. In the Assembly Navigator, double-click on the xed_jaw_assm to make it the work part.
Step 6:
Verify that the reference sets were replaced. In the Assembly Navigator review the current reference sets.
Step 7:
Close all parts without saving.
8-26
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Editing Reference Sets

There are options to delete, rename and change the contents of existing reference sets available in the Reference Sets dialog. (FormatReference Sets)
Function Delete (1) Rename (2) Add Objects (3) Remove Objects (4)
Description Allows you to delete the highlighted reference set. Allows you to rename the highlighted reference set. Allows you to add objects to the highlighted reference set. Allows you to remove objects from the highlighted reference set.
Use InformationAssembliesReference Set to visually verify the contents of a reference set as well as receive an information window displaying contents.
8-27
Reference Sets
Deleting Reference Sets

The process of deleting a reference set does not delete any geometry. It merely eliminates the "list" of information associated with the geometry. If the reference set you are deleting is being used in a loaded assembly, the conrmation message will tell you that it is in use.
If you delete a reference set that is used in an assembly, when you open or return to the assembly, it will show the entire part (default condition). Renaming Reference Sets Renaming a reference set allows you to change its name without having to delete and recreate the set. If you rename a reference set that is used in a loaded assembly, the system will automatically change the name stored with the component object in the assembly. If the assembly is not loaded when the reference set is renamed, when you open the assembly, it will show the entire part (default condition).
8-28
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Load Options and Reference Sets

It is possible to replace reference sets as you open an assembly. This is useful if you are working with a large assembly and do not know what reference sets were displayed when it was last saved. You can dene the reference sets to be loaded in the Load Options dialog. Choosing Default Reference Sets expands the Load Options dialog to include additional options. When an assembly is opened, the system will try to load the rst reference set in the list from each component. If a component does not contain this reference set, the system will try to load the next reference set in the list. The system will continue to look down the list until it nds a reference set that can be loaded. The Move Up and Move Down buttons are used to reorder the list and change the hierarchy of the reference sets. As Saved, Entire Part, and Empty are default entries in the list. They can be moved up or down but cannot be removed from the list.
8-29
Reference Sets
Apply to All Levels If Apply to All Levels is inactive reference set defaults may not be applied to subassembly components. This will happen if a subassembly was loaded using a user-dened reference set, including the lightweight reference set. The subassembly components will use the reference set that the subassembly reference set was displaying when it was last saved. This can be an advantage if you save a subassembly that is displaying its lightweight reference set while a component you are working on has the entire part or model reference set displayed. The lightweight reference set of the subassembly will then refer to the entire part for that one component, until such time as the subassembly is saved in context with a different conguration of reference sets. With Apply to All Levels inactive and lightweight reference sets preferred, parts that were displaying entire parts or model reference sets will be opened still displaying entire parts or model reference sets. If you nd that it is inconvenient to have geometry retrieved for whatever subassemblies were saved displaying geometry, toggle Apply to All Levels to active.
If Apply to All Levels is active all components of subassemblies will be loaded using the specied reference set(s) regardless of how subassembly reference sets were saved. The preferred reference set behavior will cascade all the way down to the piece part level. Load Options Files
You can specify a load options le name and location: load_options.def is the default name. You can specify names with meaning to your methods of working, to distinguish a lightweight preference from a simplied representation, for example.
8-30
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Dening Search Directories

The Dene Search Directories button expands the Load Options dialog so that you can add or remove search directories. Options are also available to change the order of the directory list.
1 2 3 4 5 6
List of current search directories (three dots includes subdirectories). Enter new directory to add to list. Adds entered directory to list. Removes selected directory from list. Moves highlighted directory up in list. Moves highlighted directory down in list.
A low level of conguration control can be imposed by separating le versions into specic directories. Because the directories are searched in the order shown, paths can be dened to ensure that you are accessing the appropriate version of a part. In the example listing above, the system rst looks for each component in the users home directory and subdirectories (G:/Users/smith...), then a common project directory and subdirectories (G:/project_x/common...), and nally, the release directory (G:/project_x/release). The order of the directories can dramatically affect the time it takes to open an assembly. If possible, you should include smaller directories with the most components rst and larger directories with fewer components last.
8-31
Reference Sets
Activity - Load Options and Reference Sets

You are uncertain how an assembly was last saved. This is a relatively large assembly with 104 components. You will specify the reference set you want to load (if it is present in a component) is the lightweight reference set, and that of other components as empty, by using the Load Options dialog before opening the assembly. If some components do not load you will investigate the reasons for it and use reference set editing to make necessary corrections.
Step 1:
Activate the load options dialog. Choose FileOpen.
Choose Options.
8-32
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Step 2:
Set up search directories. The assembly is located in several sub-folders inside your parts/car folder. You will instruct the system to look only below to parts folder for components. This method increases performance with large assemblies. Set the Load Method to Search Directories.
Choose Dene Search Directories.
8-33
Reference Sets
Choose Browse beside the New Directory window. (1) Browse to your home directory and for there to your parts/car directory, and choose OK. Your instructor will help if you cannot locate your home directory.
In the New Directory input box: Press the End key to move to the end of the path. Remove any trailing slash that is present and add three periods after the word car (no spaces!) as shown above, (2).
Choose Add. Remove any other default path that was present when you rst entered the dialog. Verify that the list box is similar to the illustration. (4) Your full home path will appear where the word (home) is in the illustration. Leave the Load Options dialog open.
Reference Sets
Step 3:
Dene preferred reference sets. You will instruct the system to load only lightweight reference sets; that is, only facetted bodies. If some components do not contain facetted bodies you prefer not to load the component at all. This scheme assures optimum memory usage and performance with a large assembly. Choose Default Reference Sets.
In the New Reference Set input box key in LITE (1) and then choose Add. (2)
8-35
Reference Sets
In the Preferred Reference Sets list choose Empty, as shown below left.
Choose Move Up until Empty appears immediately below LITE, as shown above right. Toggle Apply to All Levels to active.
8
Choose OK to set the load options you have dened. You are returned to the Open Part File dialog. Step 4: Open the bntn_demo_mockup assembly. Navigate to your parts/car folder and open bntn_demo_mockup. In a few seconds the assembly is opened.
Reference Sets
Step 5:
Examine the assembly structure and how it was opened. Pin the Assembly Navigator in the open position. Drag the resource bar wide enough to view all of the Assembly Navigator columns, as shown below. Display the Assembly Navigator toolbar.
Choose Expand All in the Assembly Navigator toolbar. Examine the structure, taking note that while most components are displaying the lightweight reference set, three of them are displaying their Empty reference set: bntn_new_wing bntn_upper_mount (two instances) You can see where the missing components are located on the graphics screen if you move the cursor over one of the corresponding nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
Step 6:
Examine the currently available reference sets for new_wing.

Reference Sets
Over the new_wing node in the Assembly Navigator choose MB3Replace Reference Set as a quick way to see what reference sets exist in the part. Notice that, other than the two permanent conditions, the new_wing part contains only a Model Reference Set named MODEL.
The part contains this reference set because it was saved using the out-of-the-box defaults. Step 7: Examine the defaults settings for User and Site. Choose FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults. Expand Assemblies and select the site standards page as shown below.
8-38
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Chose the Site Defaults Level. As NX is shipped the default name for the model reference set is MODEL. A lightweight reference set is not dened. Thus, when the part was saved MODEL was created automatically, but not a lightweight reference set. Choose the User Defaults Level. Notice that BODY is the Model Reference Set, LITE is the Lightweight Reference Set, and Additional Model Reference Set Names contains PART SOLID PRODUCT MODEL. With these settings, saving the part should create a LITE reference set. Since MODEL is a valid name for the Model Reference Set, you would expect that a BODY reference set would not be created upon save. Cancel from the defaults dialog. Replace the reference set for the new_wing with MODEL. Step 8: Edit the Reference Sets in the bntn_new_wing component part. Double-click on the bntn_new_wing node to make bntn_new_wing the work part. Notice in the Assembly Navigator that the Entire Part is displayed for bntn_new_wing, because it is now the work part.
Reference Sets
Choose FileSave. Choose FormatReference Sets. Notice that a LITE reference set now appears. The Model Reference Set is still named MODEL because that is a valid name for it. If the MODEL reference set is removed, the next save should dene BODY as the model reference set. Highlight the MODEL reference set in the list and choose Delete:
Leave the Reference Sets dialog open. While observing the open Reference Sets dialog choose FileSave. The BODY reference sets appears in the list as you save the part.
8-40
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Leave the Reference Sets dialog open. Step 9: Repeat the update for bntn_upper_mount. Display the Entire Part for bntn_upper_mount. Make bntn_upper_mount the work part. Delete the MODEL reference set. Save the work part, observing the appearance of the two reference sets dened for the classroom. Notice that the other instance of bntn_upper_mount is still displaying the Empty reference set. The two part instances you edited are displaying Entire Part. You could correct the display manually, but you need to test whether the assembly will open according to the options you specied now that the two parts have been updated. Step 10: Close all parts, without saving any other part. Choose Yes in the warning dialog. Step 11: Open bntn_demo_mockup. In the Assembly Navigator examine the reference sets that were loaded for each part. If anyone failed to set Apply to All Levels, they will see the same results as before; however, with Apply to All Levels active and all components containing lightweight reference sets, the lightweight sets are displayed regardless of how their owning subassemblies were saved. Choose InformationObject and move the cursor over the graphic window.
Reference Sets
Notice as each object pre-highlights that the Status line indicates the object is a facetted body.
Cancel from selection. Step 12: Restore the default load options. Check that the Load Method, Preferred Reference Sets, Apply to All Levels, and the Search Directories are correct. Load Method Preferred Reference Sets Apply to All Levels Search Directories From Directory As Saved, Entire Part, Empty off your home path followed by ...
Choose OK when the options are correct. Step 13: Close all parts.
8-42
mt10055_g NX 4
Reference Sets
Summary
Reference sets are used to limit the amount of information brought into an assembly or subassembly. They allow you to create different displays of the same assembly or component to simplify the assembly or provide alternate congurations. In this lesson you: Created reference sets. Replaced reference sets. Dened a hierarchy of reference sets to be loaded using Load Options. Edited Reference Sets by deleting one that was not needed. Observed the automatic creation of model and lightweight reference sets during le save.
8-43
Lesson
Deform Part
Purpose You can dene a part as capable of assuming more than one shape when it is added to an assembly. This functionality is especially useful for parts such as springs or hoses which often take on different shapes, sizes, and positions. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Dene Deformable Parts Add Deformable Parts to an Assembly Edit Deformable Parts in the Assembly
9-1
Deform Part
Deform Part Overview

In order to use deformable (also known as exible) components, two phases must be completed for each part: Dene Deformable Part: denes the shapes into which the component can be deformed. You must have write access to the part le or do a Save As operation to save it to a le that you can write to. Deform Part: selects one of those shapes for a particular use. You must have write access to the assembly where the deformation occurs, but you do not need write permission to the part itself.
The two phases can be done at different times or by different designers. In some cases, you may perform both operations; in other cases, you may be providing the deformable parts for others to use in their assemblies, or you may create an assembly with parts whose deformation denitions have been provided by other designers. You can dene a part as deformable either before or after adding it to an assembly. The Assembly Navigators Shape column shows which components in your assembly have been deformed, and which are capable of deformation but have kept their default shape. Deformed in displayed assembly
Undeformed component
9-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
Dening Deformable Parts

The process of utilizing exible components is to specify which parts are deformable, and dene the ways in which each can be deformed. Then, when the component is being added to an assembly, the shape for that instance is specied. A part is dened as a Deformable part by choosing ToolsDene Deformable Part.
Deformable Parts Dialog The dialog contains the following options or pages in the denition of a deformable part: Denition Features Expressions (optional) References (optional) Summary (optional)
9-3
Deform Part
Denition
The Denition dialog allows you to specify a name for the part and an optional URL for a document to provide further instructions.
9-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
Features
The Features dialog allows you to specify which features will be deformable as the part is added to an assembly.
9-5
Deform Part
Expressions
The Expressions dialog allows you to select available expressions to create input parameters in the deformable part. The expressions available are based upon the Features that were selected in the previous step. The Deformable Input Expression description may also contain embedded spaces. You may give the expressions meaningful names that will be displayed when you are prompted.
Expression Rules The Expression Rules options allow you to dene how you will supply values for the selected Input Expressions when you deform the component in an assembly: None gives you an input window where you may enter any value for the expression. By Whole Number Range gives you a slider bar option with an upper and lower value limit.
9-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
By Number Range is similar to the above, but allows decimal values.
By Options allows you to input exact values that you expect to be used. End your input by choosing Done. (1) When you deform the component in an assembly you must use one of your predetermined values.
9-7
Deform Part
References
The References page displays and allows the user to add to the reference information for the part. You may also enter a more meaningful description in the New Prompt eld for each of the available References.
9-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
Summary
The Summary page displays an overall collection of data for the deformable part.
The View Details icon allows you to display the summary in an information window, which could then be saved as a text le or printed. If you need to include edits that you make later in the model, you must delete the deformable feature and recreate it.
9-9
Deform Part
Deforming a Component in an Assembly

Once a deformable component has been dened, it may be deformed as you add it to an assembly. If the deformation does not need any outside references, you can position or mate it in the assembly as you would any other component. Deformations that have outside references cannot be mated or repositioned. For example, the assembly position of a deformation that uses a guide or section curve is based on the location of its reference curve in the assembly. If the component was previously mated, a dialog that says the mating constraints will be removed is displayed. The input parameter dialog for the deformable component appears after the positioning or mating dialog.
9-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
Editing a Deformed Component

You can edit components after adding them to an assembly, including making them deformable and deforming their shape. Select a valid component to dene a deformation. To deform the part in the assembly, choose from: AssembliesComponents Deform Part The selected components popup menu in the graphics window The EditDeform option on the components pop-up menu in the Assembly Navigator
The Deform Component dialog will display.
In the Deform Component dialog, select the assembly level in which you want to place the deformation. If the shape that you want to use is not dened for that level, choose New. This takes you to a input parameter dialog that has the parameters or prompts that you need to dene for that component. (You earlier specied which parameters and prompts are necessary in the Dene Deformable Part procedure.)
9-11
Deform Part
Other options on the Deform Component dialog let you edit the deformation parameters of the selected assembly level, delete a deformation, and get information about deformed shapes on the selected assembly level. Use the Assembly Navigators Shape column to check a components deformation status: whether it is currently deformed, whether it is capable of deformation but has kept its default shape, or whether it is not currently deformable.
9-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
Activity Making a Part Deformable Using a Guide String

You have a design for an o-ring as manufactured and assembly in which the same o-ring is tted to a winding channel. You will dene a deformable component for the o-ring. Step 1: Step 2: Open o_ring. Dene Features and/or expressions that will deform in the assembly. Verify that the Modeling and Assemblies applications are active. Choose ToolsDene Deformable Part. Expand the menu if necessary.
In the Denition dialog, enter O-Ring for the name of the feature that will be created. Press Enter and then choose Next.
With the Features dialog displayed, select the tube feature from the graphics window. The feature is automatically added to the Features in Deformable Part list. If you select features in the list you must use the Add Feature arrow to add them. Choose Next. In the Expressions dialog, choose Next because an expression will not be specied as the deformable characteristic in this part le.
Deform Part
The Reference dialog is displayed. This area will list any external references that will be needed at the assembly level. You will change the window prompt that comes up when this component is added to the assembly. Rename the prompt by selecting the guide string reference from the large window and then type in O-Ring Guide String in the "New Prompt" window and then press Enter.
The line in the larger window should update.
Choose Next.
9-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
The Summary dialog appears listing what has been selected to be deformed.
Choose the Finish button.
9-15
Deform Part
Step 3:
Open the Part Navigator and verify the new feature O-Ring(xx).
The navigator might need to be refreshed to display the new deformable feature. If the O Ring feature is not displayed in the feature tree, change back and forth between the Design View and timestamp order. Step 4: Set the load options. Choose FileOptionsLoad Options. Turn off the Use Partial Loading option and choose OK.
9-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
Step 5:
Open the pan_assm part.
Step 6:
Add the o_ring component. Choose Add Existing Component. Select o_ring and choose OK. Set Positioning to Absolute and choose OK. Indicate a point anywhere near the assembly for the component origin, or, simply accept the default by choosing OK. The O-Ring dialog prompts you to resolve the reference.
9-17
Deform Part
Select the green curve in the center of the groove in the pan lid and choose OK. Choose Cancel. Step 7: Change the length of the lid. Make pan_lid the work part. Choose ToolsExpression. Select the Overall_Length expression (set the lter if necessary) and change the formula to 17. Choose OK to update the model. Notice how the deformed O-Ring updated. Step 8: Close all parts, do not save.
9-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Deform Part
Summary
Components may assume more than one shape when they are added to an assembly through the use of Flexible Components. This functionality is especially useful for parts such as springs or hoses which often take on different shapes and/or sizes. In this lesson you: Dened Deformable Parts. Added Deformable Parts to an Assembly. Edited Deformable Parts in the Assembly.
9-19
Lesson
10 Top-Down Assembly Modeling

Purpose One method of assembly modeling is to build the component part les in context of the assembly, in other words, build parts around other parts. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create a new component using the Top-Down method Design a component in context Build associativity across parts in the assembly using the WAVE Geometry Linker Edit Linked Geometry Edit the Timestamp for a link
10
Top-Down Assembly Modeling
Top-Down Design
Top-Down assembly modeling is the process in which you create a new component part while working in context of the assembly. Since the denition of a component part is dictated by its function within the assembly, you rst create the geometry in the assembly. Then, when you want to work with this geometry as a component, you push the geometry into its own part le leaving only a pointer (the component object) in the assembly. Design in Context is the process in which you dene geometry in one part to reference geometry in some other part. It is accomplished while the uncompleted component is the work part and is displayed in the context of the assembly. This process can be applied when a hole in one component part needs to be positioned to some feature in another component part. In top down design, components are created and edited in context of the assembly. The new components are created while the assembly is both the displayed part and the work part. Procedure There are two basic methods to create a component top-down. Move Geometry Method Create geometry in the assembly (sketch, curves, solid, etc.) Create a new component and add the geometry to it.
Empty Part Method Create an "empty" component object in the assembly. Make the "empty" component the Work Part. Create the geometry in the component part.
10
Creating a New Component

A new component is added to the work part by choosing the option from the AssembliesComponentsCreate New in the main menu bar. This function may also be started by choosing the Create New Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar.
You may select geometry to add to the new component part (Move Geometry Method). If no geometry has been created you can immediately choose OK (Empty Part Method).
The units of the new part will be the same as the parent.
10
After a part le name is designated for the new component, you can specify information in the Create New Component dialog .
Component name: The name of the component object. The default name for the component is the name of the part le. Reference Set Name: The name of a reference set to be created with the new component. If none is specied, no reference set is created. All geometry selected will be added to the reference set. Layer options: This denes what layer any added geometry will be placed. The choices are Work, Original or As Specied. Component Origin - Determines the origin and orientation of the component part. If Copy Dening Objects is toggled off, selected geometry that depends on dening objects that were not selected will be left out of the new component. If this option is toggled on, all selected geometry and dening objects are copied to the new component. Delete Originals - Determines the fate of the original data in the assembly le if geometry is selected.
10
Verifying the Creation of a New Component

Since the graphics display does not necessarily change, it may not be obvious that a new component was created. There are a few ways to verify the creation of a new component. Activate the Assembly Navigator and look for the new component node. Select the node with Mouse Button 1 to highlight the geometry that belongs to it. List components using AssembliesReportsList Components and look for the new component in the list. Change the work part to the new component using AssembliesContext ControlSet Work Part. Read the Status line.
10
Activity - Top-Down Assembly Modeling

In this activity, you will create a new component for a locator in the context of the assembly. Step 1: Step 2: Open xture_assm. Choose StartModeling and verify the Assemblies application is active. Display the Create New Component icon in the Assemblies toolbar. Step 3: Create the geometry in the assembly. Choose InsertDesign FeatureBlock. Use the Origin, Edge Lengths option to create a block of the following size and dene the origin of the block at the top left corner of the baseplate as shown. Hint: Select one of the line endpoints at corner (1). X Length = 2 Y Length = 2 Z Length = 1
ZC YC XC
10
Step 4:
Create a new component for the block. Choose AssembliesComponentsCreate New.
Be careful not to choose the Create New Parent icon. Select the block you just created and then choose OK. In your directory enter ***_locator for the le name of the new component and choose OK. (*** represents your initials.) In the Create New Component dialog , make sure Delete Originals is toggled on and choose OK. Because Delete Originals was turned on, the geometry was copied to the new component and then deleted from the assembly. Step 5: Verify that the new component was created. Choose Assembly Navigator. With MB1 select the ***_locator node; notice the locator block highlights. Step 6: Close all parts; do not save.
10
Considerations of Selecting Data During Component Creation

Adding data to a new component can be thought of in terms of moving or copying the data into the new part. If Delete Original is turned on, data is moved; otherwise it is copied. All geometry, whether moved or copied, will have the same color, layer and blank-status as the original. The occurrences of that geometry created in the assembly will "look" identical to the originals. If you attempt to "move" an object, and some other object which you are not moving depends on that object, then the selected object will in fact be "copied". If you select a sketch (which has been extruded) to be moved to a component, but you do not select the associated extruded body, the sketch will be copied. If you select a line which is part of a sketch to be moved to the component, but you do not select the sketch, the line will be copied. If you copy only a sketch and the sketch has a swept solid associated with it, the copied sketch will not be associated to the solid. If the sketch is attached to a face, the body it is attached to will be copied. If you move a solid that was created from a sketch, the sketch is copied. Any expressions that the sketch uses are copied into the new part. Any expressions that are not required by the sketch are not copied. Any sketch dimensions associated with the sketch are copied.
10
Designing in Context of an Assembly

Designing in Context is the process by which you dene geometry in one part by referencing geometry in another part. When designing in the context of an assembly, the component part in which you are adding the geometry must be the work part and the assembly must be the displayed part. Creation or editing of geometry will take place in the work part, yet geometry in other components will be selectable. It is important to remember that when a component is added to an assembly, the geometry is not being copied into the assembly but rather it is being referenced by the assembly. Changes made to the component part will immediately be reected in the assembly. If multiple occurrences of the same component exist in an assembly, they will all update because they are referencing the same component part. Selecting Geometry Outside the Work Part When working in the context of an assembly many functions allow you to select geometry from components other than the work part. This is useful when specifying a location with the Point Constructor dialog or checking a clearance using InformationObject or AnalysisDistance. In the example below, a block is created in the current work part by dening diagonal points (1) relative to geometry in non-work parts, eliminating the need to calculate and enter numerical values for the edge lengths.
The size and position of the block in the example above are not associative. Associativity between components can be attained through the use of the WAVE Geometry Linker, Interpart Expressions, and Mating Conditions, which are covered later in the course.
10
Sketching in Context
Sketching in context is the ability to create and edit sketches in a component part while the assembly is displayed.
When working with sketches in context of an assembly: Existing objects belonging to the sketch can be selected in any occurrence of the work part. If the Work Part is changed while working on a sketch, the active sketch will be updated and you will be presented with the Sketch Tools dialog for the new Work Part.
10
Introduction to Interpart Modeling

The WAVE Geometry Linker provides a means to associatively link geometry from another component part in an assembly into the Work Part. The linked geometry is associative to the parent geometry so modifying the parent geometry will cause the linked geometry in other parts to update. Different types of objects can be selected including points, curves, sketches, datums, faces, and bodies. The linked geometry can be used for creating and positioning new features in the Work Part. This function is accessed by choosing InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker or by displaying the WAVE Geometry Linker icon on the assemblies toolbar.
The At Timestamp toggle lets you specify where the linked feature is placed in the feature list. When turned off, any new features later added to the original geometry will be reected in the linked geometry. When turned on, any new features will not affect the linked geometry. Blank Original lets you blank the original geometry so that the linked geometry in the Work Part will be easier to select while the assembly is displayed.
10
Create Non-associative allows you to create a link of the original geometry so that the linked geometry in the Work Part is non-associative. The linked geometry is automatically created as a Broken Link. The WAVE Geometry Linker is on by default. Some sites have chosen to disable it via the customer default Assemblies, General, Interpart Modeling, Allow Interpart Modeling. Geometry Types Several different types of geometry can be selected. Points Curves/Edges Sketches/Strings/All Edges of a Face Datums Faces Regions (of Faces) Bodies Mirrored Bodies Routing Objects
When selecting the geometry to copy, you also need to consider how permanent the geometry will be. If you copy as little geometry as possible to do the job, performance will be improved but updates will be less robust when the parent geometry is altered. For example, if you copy individual curves to another part, the link may not update correctly if one of the curves is deleted. On the other hand, if you copy an entire sketch, curves may be removed or added to it and the link will still update.
10
10-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Considerations when Interpart Modeling Before using the WAVE Geometry Linker, the user should evaluate the downstream impacts. Do not use the WAVE Geometry Linker just because you can. This is a very powerful tool that adds another level of complication to the assembly.
10
Activity - Designing in Context of an Assembly

In this activity, you will add a workpiece to the xture assembly and then edit the locator in context to complete the design. The Design Intent of the locators is to hold a workpiece (1) in place during a drilling operation. Material must be removed from the locators (2) so that they conform to the size of the work piece and do not extend out over the opening in the baseplate (3). Holes must be added to the locators so that they can be attached to the baseplate. The xture design must be associative; it must update if the workpiece changes.
Later, a drill template subassembly (not shown) will be clamped over the dowels. There will be several drill guide bushings located on the template over the opening in the xture. Drill bits (and some chips) will pass through the workpiece and safely into the opening.
First you will modify the locator so that it does not extend out over the opening in the baseplate. You will reference a sketch in the baseplate to subtract the necessary material from the locator. Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Open xture_assm2. Choose StartModeling and verify the Assemblies application is active. Create a linked sketch. Change the Work Part to locator. Change the Work Layer to 15 and make layer 21 selectable.
10
10-14
The linked geometry will reside on Layer 15.

Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved mt10055_g NX 4
If necessary, display the WAVE Geometry Linker icon on the Assemblies toolbar, or use InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker.
Choose WAVE Geometry Linker.
Choose Sketch/String. Select the sketch (1) used to create the opening on the top of the baseplate. The sketch is hidden by the solid edges. Select where shown below
Choose OK. Step 4: Extrude the linked sketch and subtract it from the locator. Set the Work Layer to 1. Hold MB3 over the sketch until the radial pop up icons appear, and slide right to Extrude. Make sure the preview body is pointing upward through the locator. If not, choose Reverse Direction.
10
Set the End limit to Until Selected.
Select the top face (1) of the locator as the trimming face.
Set the Boolean option to Subtract and choose OK.
Since there is only one possible target body in the part you do not have to select it. Next, you will add a workpiece component and use its solid to subtract material from the locator. Step 5: Add the work piece component. Change the Work Part to xture_assm2.
10
From the Assemblies toolbar choose Add Existing Component.
Choose the Choose Part File button from the Select Part dialog. Choose the part work_piece from the parts directory. In the Add Existing Part dialog, set: Reference Set to BODY. Positioning to Absolute. Layer options to Original.
Choose OK. Notice that ZC is not zero in the following action! Dene the origin at XC=0, YC=0, ZC=0.5 and choose OK. Choose Cancel. Step 6: Create a linked body of the work piece. Change the Work Part to locator. Change the Work Layer to 16. The linked geometry will reside on Layer 16.
Choose Body. Toggle Blank Original to on so that the linked geometry will be easier to see. Select the work_piece solid body and choose OK. Step 7: Subtract the linked solid from the locator. From the cascading Boolean icon stack on the Feature operation toolbar, choose Subtract. Select the locator block as the target solid.
10
Select the work piece as the tool solid and OK to accept.
Step 8:
Add a hole as corner relief. Choose Hole. Enter a Diameter of 0.2. Select the top face as the planar placement face at the approximate position shown below.
Select the upper face of the pocket (shaded darkly above) as the through face. Choose OK.
Choose the Point onto Point icon
to position the hole.
Select the endpoint (1) shown as the target
Next, you will create holes in the locator that are associated with the holes in the baseplate.
10
10-18
Step 9:
Create linked geometry for the holes to be aligned with the baseplate.
Choose InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker.
Choose Point.
Change the Point Method to Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center and select the upper edge of the blind fastener hole in the baseplate as shown below. The linked point is created immediately when you select the edge. No conrmation or OK action is needed.
The hole is drilled at the tap size for a 1024 UNC machine screw. Since we need a clearance hole in the locator, we need only associate the center point.
Choose the Curve icon and select the upper edge of the dowel hole in the baseplate shown.
This hole is intended for a dowel pin. It is machined all the way through to make the dowel easier to knock out, should the need arise. The size is not quite correct for a standard 3/16 inch dowel. You will later test associativity of the linked curve when you correct the size of the hole. Choose OK.
10
Step 10: Extrude the linked curve. Set the Work Layer to 1.
Choose Extrude. Select the linked curve you just created as the section string. Make sure the preview body is pointing upward through the locator. If not, double click the vector head or choose Reverse Direction. Set the End limit to Until Selected. Select the top face of the locator as the trimming face. Set the Boolean option to Subtract. Choose OK to accept default offsets and taper of 0 (zero). Step 11: Create a counterbore hole.
Choose Hole.
Choose Counterbore for the hole type. Enter the following values: C-Bore Diameter = 0.3 C-Bore Depth = .25 Hole Diameter = 0.2
Select the top face of the locator for the planar placement face. Select the bottom face of the locator for the Thru Face. Choose OK.
10
Choose Point onto Point
to position the hole.

mt10055_g NX 4
Select the linked point you created as the target.
Make all layers invisible. Layer 1, the Work Layer, will not be affected. Step 12: Add another locator. Make xture_assm2 the work part. Replace the Entire Part reference set of the Locator with the BODY reference set. Choose Add Existing Component. Select the locator and choose OK. Ensure the following settings: Multiple Add = Off Reference Set = BODY Positioning = Reposition Layer options = Original
Choose OK. Select an origin point a short distance away from the assembly.
10
Click MB1 to select the positioning CSYS XY rotate handle shown below. You will use this handle to rotate the component.
Set the Snap Increment to 90. Drag the csys 180 degrees.
Choose the Point onto Point icon. Select the rst and second points as shown below.
The locator snaps to the desired position. Choose Cancel. In the next few steps you will make changes to the baseplate and workpiece to demonstrate the associativity of the linked geometry in the locator. Step 13: Edit the sketch for the pocket in the baseplate. Change the Work Part to baseplate.
10
Choose Sketch.
Select the S21_POCKET sketch in the Sketch Toolbar List Box to activate it. Fit the view. Double click on the dimension, offset=1.000. Enter a new value of 1.5. Press Enter to update the sketch.
The offset expression controls the distance the sketch curves are from the edges of the block.
Choose Update Model. Update Model is available because you used the Edit method to change the sketch. The default double- click action species Edit with Rollback, under which Update Model is not available.
Choose Finish. Notice that the subtracted corner of the locators has updated to match the baseplate.
10
Step 14: Edit the positioning dimension of a hole in the baseplate. In the Part Navigator click MB3 on Circular Array (13) BLIND_HOLE_PATTERN and choose Edit Positioning. Choose Edit Dimension Value. Select the positioning dimension p29=1.625 and change the expression value to 1.25. Choose OK until the model updates. When the position of the hole was changed, the linked point and the counterbore hole in the locator moved with it. Step 15: Edit the diameter of the dowel hole. In the Part Navigator click MB3 on Instanced Simple Hole (10) and choose Edit Parameters. In the graphic window click on the dimension p23=0.200. Edit the value to .187 and choose OK until the part updates. When the diameter was changed the linked curve and the extruded hole in the locator also updated. Step 16: Edit the width of the workpiece. Change the Work Part to work_piece. Use the key combination Ctrl+Shift+U (unblank all of part) to display the original work piece solid. Choose ToolsExpression. Choose the expression width. Change the value to 4.75. Choose OK to update the model. Notice that the locators update to match the workpiece. Step 17: Change the Work Part to xture_assm2.
10
10-24
Step 18: Close all parts; do not save.

Localized Interpart Modeling

Localized interpart modeling is the ability to relate the geometry of interacting parts in an assembly. This has two distinct advantages in assembly modeling: Reduces the cost of design changes. Maintains design integrity.
This reduces cost since changes made to a single part can be automatically propagated to other related component parts in the assembly. Design integrity is maintained because the parts will always have correct geometric and positional relationships. A gasket (1) is derived from a parent face (2) in a housing. If the size or shape of the parent face changes in the housing, the gasket will change accordingly (3) in the assembly (4).
10
Interpart Modeling Applications

Interpart modeling can be applied to different areas including tooling and manufacturing engineering. Part in process modeling Mold/Die Core/Cavity design
10
Part in Process Modeling

Part in process modeling allows you to validate and illustrate a manufacturing process plan. A cast part (1) is used to derive a machined part (2). A linked solid is created in the machining part from the casting. Then, features unique to the machining are added to it.
The above method is primarily used by companies who design their own cast parts and tooling. It is usually much easier to add features that remove material from a properly constructed casting model than to add draft and machining material to a purely functional design. The nished machined part (1) is designed rst and subsequently the cast part is dened by adding material using offset and simplify features (2).
The above method is primarily used by companies who design pattern tooling based on a nished part design. Much extra work and communication is needed to design a casting that provides just enough stock material, an acceptable parting, and sufcient draft for the casting process without interfering with the t and function of the part.
10
Mold/Die Applications
Interpart modeling can be applied to create an associative mold or die from a nished piece part. A solid body (1) can be linked from one part into another (2) where features can be applied to dene the cavity in the mold or die (3).
10
Activity - In Process Parts

You will apply interpart modeling to derive a machined part from an existing cast part. In the step below please replace *** with your initials. Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Create a new inch unit part called ***_process_housing. If necessary choose StartModeling. Verify that the Assemblies application is active. Add the casting part as a component. Choose Add Existing Component. Choose Choose Part File. Select the part cast_housing from your parts directory. Set the following parameters: Reference Set = Body Positioning = Absolute Layer options = Original and position at WCS 0,0,0. Choose Cancel.
Step 5:
Create a component part for the machining. Choose AssembliesComponentsCreate New. Choose OK (because you are not adding any objects). Enter ***_machined_housing in your directory and choose OK.
10
10-29
Accept the default component settings. Step 6: Create a linked body in the machined part. Change the Work Layer to 16. Change the Work Part to ***_machined_housing. If necessary, display the WAVE Geometry Linker icon on the Assemblies toolbar, or use InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker.
Choose Body. Toggle Blank Original to on, if necessary. Select the casting solid body and choose OK. The following step assumes you are procient in feature-based modeling. You may add only one or two of the features, if desired, and continue to the next step. The purpose of the activity is to illustrate the basic procedure for dening in-process parts. Step 7: Add features to dene the machining solid. Create a Simple Thru Hole with a diameter of 1.126 inches in center of part. 1 2 3 Through hole Groove Array of Holes
10
Create a Rectangular Groove with a diameter of 1.625 inches and a width of 2.5. Align the top of the groove (1) with the uppermost circular edge (2) of the part.
Create a Simple Thru Hole with a diameter of .312 inches diameter and position it .5 inches in both directions in one corner of the part (choose the bottom edges). Create an Instance Array of the .312 inch hole with 2 holes and a 3 inch offset in both the XC and YC directions. The features were added to the linked body in the machining part which is still associated with the solid body in the casting. Step 8: Edit the cast part. Choose EditBlankUnblank All of Part (or Ctrl+Shift+U) to see the original cast solid body. Change the work part to cast_housing. Edit the boss feature, changing the diameter to 1.75 and the height to 2.75. Note the change to the "machined" solid. Step 9: Close all parts; do not save. In this activity you produced the machined model by linking the cast model into another component of an assembly and then applying the appropriate features to it. If in your industry, it is typical to create the machined model rst, then the cast model can be developed by linking the machined model into another component of an assembly and then removing the features that dene the machining.
10
Activity - WAVE Geometry Linker - Mirror Body

You will create the last component for this assembly using the WAVE Geometry Linker - Mirror Body function.
Step 1:
Open the wave_assm assembly. Open wave_assm.
Choose StartModeling. Verify that the Assemblies application is active.
10
Step 2:
Create a new part le for the next component in your assembly. Choose AssembliesComponentsCreate New. Choose OK. Replace *** with your initials in the next instruction. Enter ***_left_side for the part name. Set the following parameters: Component Name: left_side Reference Set: (leave blank) Layer options: Original Component Origin: Absolute
Choose OK. Step 3: Create the left side part by using the WAVE Geometry Linker mirror function. If necessary display the WAVE Geometry Linker icon in the Assemblies toolbar. Make ***_left_side the work part. Change the work layer to 20. If necessary, display the WAVE Geometry Linker icon on the Assemblies toolbar, or use InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker.
Choose Mirror Body.
10
From the graphics screen, select the inter_right_side (1) as the part to mirror; conrm your selection if necessary, then choose OK.
Select the Center Datum Plane (2) of inter_body as the plane through which you will mirror the part. Choose OK.
10
10-34
Step 4:
Make inter_body the work part.
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 5:
Modify the part by changing the end distance of the extrude feature to 2.00 (was 1.3) as shown below.
Step 6:
Make wave_assm the work part. Notice that the left hand component was shifted to accommodate the larger connecting part. The shift occurred because the part was mirrored through a center datum in inter_body. When the center datum location changed, the left hand component was positioned appropriated.
Step 7:
Close all parts; do not save.
10
Editing Links
Links may be edited by choosing EditFeatureEdit Parameters and selecting a linked feature. Linked features have an edit dialog similar to the one below.
While this dialog is displayed you can select new parent geometry for the link being edited. The new parent geometry must be the same type as the old geometry (curve, datum, solid body, etc.). Parent indicates the parent geometry type. If the feature was linked, but the link has been broken, the parent is shown as Broken Link. Part shows the name of the part where the parent geometry is located. At Timestamp lets you specify the timestamp at which the linked feature is placed. If this option is toggled on one of the parent part features may be selected from the list to specify a new timestamp location for the linked feature being edited. If this option is toggled off, all features in the parent part will be reected in the linked feature.
10
10-36
Break Link lets you break the association between the linked feature and its parent. This means that the linked feature will no longer update if its
parent changes. You can later dene a new parent by selecting geometry with the cursor. Replacement Assistant opens the Replacement Assistant dialog to help you edit the source of the linked or extracted feature. Flip Curve Direction / Flip Face Normal lets you ip the default face normal, the curve direction, or other objects. Broken Links A link may become broken for several reasons: The parent geometry is deleted. The path from the linked geometry to its parent part is broken. This can occur if the component containing the parent geometry is removed or substituted. If you deliberately break the link using Edit Feature dialog.
Broken links can be repaired with the Edit Link dialog. Deleting Parent Geometry To prevent unintentional deletion of the parents of linked geometry, a message will warn you if a delete operation would cause interpart links to break. When parts containing linked geometry are loaded this warning applies to operations using EditDelete, the Delete icon, and MB3 menus on the graphics screen or in the Model Navigation Tool.
The Information option provides details about the links that will be broken in an Information window.
10
Activity - Editing a Link

You will create a linked curve used to create a pin and edit it by associating it with a different edge. Step 1: Open the part wave_block_assm, choose StartModeling, and verify the Assemblies application is on.
Step 2:
Create a new empty component for a pin. Choose Assemblies ComponentsCreate New. Choose OK. Enter a part name ***_pin (where *** represents your initials). Set the following parameters: Layer options = Original Component Origin = Absolute
Choose OK to create the component. Step 3: Link a curve from the block into the pin component. Change the work part to ***_pin and the work layer to 15. Choose InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker.
10
Choose Curve.
Select the top edge of the hole in the block shown below.
Choose OK to create the linked geometry. Step 4: On layer 1 create a solid for the pin . Make layer 1 the work layer. Extrude the linked curve downward (-ZC) using an End distance of 1.5.
Step 5:
Edit the parent geometry. Change the work part to wave_block. Make sure Delay Interpart Updates is inactive; i.e., ToolsUpdateDelay Interpart has no check mark.
10
Change the Diameter of the hole SIMPLE_HOLE(2) to .375.
The hole moves slightly after editing because it is positioned by tangent point rather than by center point. Step 6: Edit the linked curve in the pin. Change the work part to ***_pin.
Choose EditFeatureEdit Parameters.
10
Select the feature LINKED_CURVE(0) from the feature list and choose OK. This dialog appears:
Select the top edge of the larger hole with the cursor in the graphics area. This edge will be the new parent of the linked feature.
10
Choose OK twice to update the part. The pin updates to the size and location determined by the new parent edge.
Step 7:
10
Activity - Editing the Timestamp of a Link

You will create a linked mirrored body and then edit its timestamp to exclude some features that are in the parent body. Step 1: Open the part wave_bracket_assm and start the Modeling and Assemblies applications. This assembly contains only one component for the left hand part. The component consists of a solid body and a datum plane to be used for mirroring.
Step 2:
Create a new empty component to contain the mirrored body. Choose Assemblies ComponentsCreate New. Choose OK. Enter a part name ***_bracket_rh where *** are your initials. Use the following settings in the Create New Component dialog: Layer options: Original Component Origin: Absolute
Choose OK to create the component. Step 3: Create a linked mirrored body. Change the work part to ***_bracket_rh. Choose InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker.
10
Make sure At Timestamp is toggled off.
Choose Mirror Body. Select the left hand bracket solid as the body to mirror and choose OK. Select the datum plane as the plane to mirror through and choose OK. Fit the view to see the mirrored body. All features from the parent body are reected in the mirrored body.
Step 4:
Edit the timestamp of the linked mirrored body to exclude the three holes in the vertical ange. Move the cursor over the newly linked body, click MB3, and choose Edit Parameters. Toggle At Timestamp to on.
10
Select SIMPLE_HOLE(5) from the list of features and choose OK.
This will change the mirrored body as if the link had occurred immediately after SIMPLE_HOLE(5) was created. The three holes in the vertical ange do not appear in the mirrored body because they were created after SIMPLE_HOLE(5).
Step 5:
10
Summary
Top-Down Assembly Modeling allows you to build components in relation to other components within the same assembly. Interpart modeling methods allow you to relate geometry of interacting parts in an assembly. In this lesson you: Created new components using the Top-Down method. Designed in Context of the assembly. Created components using interpart modeling. Built associativity across component parts in an assembly using Geometry Linker. Edited the timestamp for a link. Edited linked geometry.
10
Lesson
11
11 Interpart Expressions
Purpose Interpart Expressions enable components in any given assembly to share parameters. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create and apply referencing interpart expressions Understand and recognize overriding interpart expressions.
11-1
Interpart Expressions
11
General Concepts
Interpart Expressions (IPEs) allow the user to establish relationships between expressions of separate part les. A change to an expression in one part le may change an expression in a different part le, thus altering the geometry of that part. IPEs may be created between any two part les, not necessarily between components of an assembly. Please pay particular attention to the Tips and Recommended Practices near the end of this chapter. Your system administrator may choose to disable IPEs at the site, group, or user level. If you want to constrain a hole in a part called abc.prt so that its diameter is always linked to the pin diameter in a part called xyz.prt. You would create the following expression in the assembly le. abc::dia=xyz::dia + clr The above expression links a value between the two part les. When either the expression dia (diameter) in xyz.prt or clr (clearance) in the assembly le are changed the hole diameter in part abc.prt automatically changes. The result is reected in the assembly.
11-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Types of Interpart Expressions

Interpart expressions can be created in two basic forms, referencing or overriding. Referencing Expressions Referencing expressions are used to reference an expression from one part to an expression in another part. This means that the value of one expression will depend on the value of an expression in another part. For Referencing expressions create the link in the formula window. There are two ways that referencing expressions can be used. The driving expression can be created in the assembly and be referenced by the component parts below it.
11
The alternative is to have one component reference an expression in another component directly.
11-3
11
Overriding Expressions
Overriding expressions are those that are created in an assembly and have an interpart link in the Name. Although they reside in the assembly, they assign a value to an expression in a component part. The expression in the component part will take on this value when the component is opened with the assembly. For overriding expressions create the link in the name window. you can cut a newly created link from the formula window and paste it in the name window. In the example below, the hole_dia expression in the block part is being overridden by the expression in the assembly which sets it equal to the pin diameter.
The expression being overridden will appear as locked.
This means that it can only be edited from the expression in the assembly which is overriding it. This can be found by listing the references for the locked expression.
11-4
mt10055_g NX 4
To list references, use the MB3 menu over a locked expression.
11
A report structured like this example is generated in the listing window:
Overriding expressions can only be created in an assembly and used to override the value of an expression in one of its components.
11-5
11
Creating Interpart Expressions

Interpart expressions are created and edited in the Expression dialog found under ToolsExpression. The lower portion of the dialog with less options contains one icon related to interpart expressions:
11-6
mt10055_g NX 4
The same dialog with more options has three icons related to Inter-Part expressions:
11
Create Interpart Reference Edit Interpart References Open Referenced Parts
When creating links, it is also possible to create a link by simply entering the expression in the Formula entry eld using the correct syntax, i.e. x=part_name::expression_name. If your lename includes hyphens (-) then the part name alone should have quotes placed around it, i.e. x="123-4567-890"::length
11-7
11
Edit Interpart References

The Edit Interpart References dialog is activated upon selection of the Edit InterPart References icon and choosing the part containing the referenced expression
Function Change Referenced Part Delete Reference
Description Allows you to change all expressions that refer to the part selected so that they refer to a new part. Allows you to break the relationship with a selected part and replaces the formula of the expression with the current value. Similar to Delete Reference except it will delete ALL interpart references in the current work part.
Delete All References
When changing references, the expressions must exist in both parts. If this is not the case, the system will display a message that it will assign the missing expressions their current numeric values.
11-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Load Parts
The Load Parts dialog is activated upon selection of Open Referenced Parts. It provides the following options:
11
Function PartsAll Modied PartsAll Referenced Load All Parts in List
Description Lists only those unloaded or partially loaded parts whose expressions have been modied. Lists all unloaded or partially loaded parts with expressions referenced by the work part. Allows you to fully load all parts listed.
The OpenComponent Fully option in the Assembly Navigator can also be used to fully load and update a components interpart expressions.
11-9
11
Activity - Creating Interpart Expressions

In this activity, you will create interpart expressions so that the diameter of a pin in one part is related to the diameter of a hole in another part. Step 1: Create a new mm part ***_block_assm and start the Assemblies Application if necessary. Add the part block as a component and position it at absolute coordinates 0,0,0. Add the part pin as a component and reposition as illustrated below.
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 4:
Create expressions in the assembly that will be referenced by the pin and the block. Choose StartModeling. Choose ToolsExpression. Create the following expressions: Dimensionality Length Length Unit mm mm Name ipe_dia ipe_clr Formula 19 0.1
After each change either press enter or choose Accept Edit. Choose Apply to update the part and keep the dialog open. Step 5: Edit the expression for the diameter of the pin to link it to the expression in the assembly.
11-10
Make pin the Work Part. The Expressions dialog will update to list the expressions in the pin. Select the expression dia from the list of expressions in the Expressions dialog . Remove the 25 from the formula entry eld.
11
Choose the Create Interpart Reference icon. Choose ***_block_assm from the Select Part dialog as the part to link and choose OK.
Choose the expression ipe_dia as the expression to link to and choose OK.
Accept the edit. In the above illustration Listed Expressions is set to All. The expression should look like the following:
Choose OK in the Expressions dialog to update the pin.

11
You can also create the reference by typing in the formula directly. Step 6: Edit the expression for the diameter of the hole to link the diameter and clearance set in the assembly part le. Change the Work Part to the block. Choose ToolsExpression. Select the expression dia, remove the 25 from the formula, and choose the Create Interpart Reference icon. Choose ***_block_assm from the Select Part dialog as the part to link to and choose OK. Choose the expression ipe_dia=19 as the expression to link to and choose OK. At the end of the expression, type a +. You can use the End key on the keyboard to move the cursor to the end of the expression.
Choose the Create Interpart Reference icon. Choose ***_block_assm from the Select Part dialog as the part to link and choose OK. Choose the expression ipe_clr=0.1 as the expression to link to and choose OK. The formula should look like this:
Choose OK to accept the edit and update the block.
11-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 7:
Edit the expression in the assembly to test the associativity. Change the Work Part to ***_block_assm. Change the expression ipe_dia from 19 to 25. Choose Apply to update the parts. Use the MB3 menu in the expressions dialog to list the references for ipe_dia. The diameter of the pin and the hole are both driven by the expression in the assembly. The block and pin will always t when used together in this assembly.
11
Step 8:
11-13
11
Partial Loading Issues

Partially loading components in an assembly conserves system memory by not loading all data associated with the le. Only expressions and data required to display the part are loaded. The rest of the feature data is not loaded. When using interpart expressions, it is possible to edit the expressions dening a feature in a partially loaded component. However, the affected geometry will not update to reect the changes until the part has been fully loaded. Once the part is fully loaded, the changes made to the expressions are immediately applied to update the features. Resolving Interpart Expression References When a part containing an IPE is loaded, the system looks for the name of the expression in the referenced part. If the correct name is found, the system has resolved the link. If it is impossible for the link to be resolved, the system will notify the user, delete the link, and assign the last known constant value. For example, suppose you had the following expression in a component part le referencing an expression in an assembly le. dia=ipe_block_assm::ipe_dia If you were to attempt to delete the expression "ipe_dia" within the assembly part le you would get an error message stating that the expression is in use, and the references would be listed. If you perform a "Save As" on a part, any loaded part which references it will rename the expression so the link is preserved, now referencing the new part created by the Save As operation. If the other parts are not loaded at the time the Save As was performed, their expressions can be changed later by using Edit Interpart References in the Expressions dialog .
11-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Tips and Recommended Practices

Before using interpart expressions, you should evaluate their downstream impacts. Do not start assigning IPEs just because you can. IPEs are powerful tools but do complicate your assemblies and make them hard to understand. Keep things simple and organized. In general, IPEs should be used when the parts have a physical constraint and are to be used in the same assembly. Although you can use IPEs with parts not assembled together, it is not recommended. Consider setting up company-wide standards on how and when IPEs are to be used. It is a good idea to have a naming convention such as always using a prex on the expression name such as "ipe_dia". This will make such an expression readily identiable and the user will know that it is being referenced. You should not use overriding expressions on the same component from different assemblies. This would cause the component to be updated each time it was loaded by the different assemblies. For this reason, IPEs should not be used for standard parts such as a bolt or screw. In general, it is a good practice to edit IPE expressions only when all of the referenced parts are loaded. The impact of the change can be immediately understood. You are less likely to create traps for future users. If a part fails to load because of an IPE change, the following will help you troubleshoot the problem. Suppress the feature that failed to update, then unsuppress it after you have corrected the problem. Close all other parts then open only the part causing the problem. The part should load and allow you to investigate which expressions are responsible. You can then delete the offending links.
11
11-15
11
Summary
Interpart expressions allow you to link the expressions between components in an assembly. Whenever a change occurs to an expression in one part le, the related expression in the other part le(s) will change accordingly. In this lesson you: Created and applied interpart expressions.
11-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
12 Assembly Arrangements
Purpose The lesson introduces the concepts of using assembly arrangements to specify alternative positions for one or more components in your part. Objectives On completion of this lesson you will be able to: Set the active and default arrangement Suppress and unsuppress components within an arrangement
12
12-1
Assembly Arrangements
General Concepts
Use assembly arrangements to dene alternative positions for one or more components in your part.
12
The part must be an assembly or subassembly. You cannot create an arrangement for a piece part. Assembly arrangements can be assigned to any (or none) of the following categories: Active the arrangement that: is in effect for the Displayed Part. controls the arrangements used by every subassembly below the Displayed Part. is marked with a green check in the arrangements list box on the Assembly Arrangements dialog.
Default default arrangements are: used by external applications such as Spacemap, QPL, and TeamCenter Engineering that need positioning information about components. automatically designated as the rst arrangement you create, until you change it. any arrangement you assign as the default within the Assembly Arrangements dialog.
Used an arrangement that controls a subassembly. The used arrangement of a subassembly is: determined by the arrangement of its parent:

the active arrangement if the parent is the displayed part the used arrangement of the parent if the parent is a component of the displayed part
shown in the Assembly Navigators Arrangement column. (If the column is blank, only one arrangement is available.) marked with a green check in the arrangements list box in the Assembly Arrangements dialog.
12-2
mt10055_g NX 4
An assembly arrangement determines: The position and orientation of the immediate child components The Variable Component Positioning of any subcomponents The used assembly arrangement for each immediate child component.
12
The system automatically creates the rst assembly arrangement and sets it as both the active and default arrangements when you add or create the rst component in a new part. You can create as many additional arrangements as you need by copying and renaming arrangements in the Assembly Arrangements dialog. There must be one active arrangement and one default arrangement (or one arrangement that is both active and default).
12-3
The Assembly Arrangements Dialog
12
The Assembly Arrangements dialog can be invoked from the Menu bar (AssembliesComponentsArrangements), from the Assembly Navigator by MB3 over an assembly node, and from the Assemblies toolbar.
The list in the dialog displays all arrangements in the assembly selected for editing. Use sets the selected arrangement as the used arrangement. This sets the active arrangement if the dialog has been invoked on the displayed part. The graphics window updates to this arrangement, and a green check appears beside it in the arrangements list box. Set as Default makes the selected arrangement the default. "(Default)" appears beside the arrangements name in the list box. New Arrangement creates a new arrangement and adds it to the list. Copy an existing arrangement, which you can then modify to create a new arrangement. Delete one or more selected arrangements. Rename the selected arrangement. You can also do this from the list by clicking again on the highlighted name (not a double-click).
12-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Properties brings up the Arrangement Properties dialog for the selected arrangement. Information includes whether the selected arrangement is used by any other loaded assemblies, exploded views, interpart links, assembly cuts, promotions, or sequences. Multiple arrangements may be selected for the Information function. MB3 The MB3 menu over the arrangements list allow you to export the contents of the list box to: a browser the list is saved in HTML format and your browser is opened a spreadsheet
12
12-5
The Properties Dialog
12
Name You can rename the selected arrangement. Ignore All Mating Constraints If this option is on, the position of the arranged components will not be resolved by mating constraints. Information includes whether the selected arrangement is used by any other loaded assemblies, exploded views, interpart links, assembly cuts, promotions, or sequences. Multiple arrangements may be selected for the Information function. (same as Assembly Arrangements dialog) You can also control whether arrangements that have been set to ignore their mating constraints are shown in the Mating Conditions dialog tree. Use the Show Arrangements Ignoring Constraints option on constraint nodes in that tree to control whether such arrangements appear.
12-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Arrangements Procedure
The system creates your rst arrangement when you add or create the rst component in a new part, or when you load a pre-Unigraphics NX 2.0 assembly part. To create an additional arrangement: Select an assembly or subassembly in the Assembly Navigator. Choose ArrangementsEdit from the assemblys MB3 pop-up menu. The Assembly Arrangements dialog appears. Select an arrangement in the list box. Choose Copy. This creates a new arrangement with a default name. If you wish you can rename it now or later. Move the components into the positions you want them to have in the new arrangement, and save your parts when you are nished. This saves the new arrangement along with your assembly. Once you have more than one arrangement, you can switch arrangements by selecting the one that you want from the Arrangements cascade menu on the assembly or subassembly nodes MB3 menu in the Assembly Navigator. You can create as many arrangements as you want.
12
12-7
Arrangements Notes
You cannot delete the active or the default arrangement. Assembly arrangements control the positions components. Indirect control of geometry can occur if it depends on component positioning. Instances of the same subassembly can use different arrangements. Mating conditions are solved in the used arrangement. Exploded views are arrangement-specic. This lets you show two arrangements on the same drawing. WAVE links are also arrangement-specic. The system remembers the arrangement of the lowest common ancestor when a WAVE link is created, and it positions the geometry accordingly. Variable positioning will override any subcomponent positions specied by descendent part arrangements. If the Arrangements cascade menu does not appear (e.g., in the Assembly Navigator), check: That you are in ApplicationAssemblies. That you did not use the MB3 menu option on a piece part. The Arrangements cascade only appears for assemblies and subassemblies.
12
A component can have different suppression states in different arrangements in the same assembly. For example, you can suppress a component in Arrangement 1, while leaving it unsuppressed in all other arrangements. Use the Suppression dialog to specify any arrangement-specic suppression states. If you depopulate an assembly (remove all components) all arrangements are deleted when you remove the last component. You can use arrangements to create drawings that show multiple positions of an assembly. Dimensions created in each arrangement are faithful to the position of the components in that arrangement. Arrangements are not currently associated with any Teamcenter application.
12-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Arrangement Specic Drawing Views
12
The key to making drawing views like the one above is Explosions or Exploded Views: Make the rst arrangement active. Choose a view that shows the part orientation you want on your drawing. Save As the view giving it a descriptive name. Create an Explosion in the Save As view. (We recommend that explosions always be created in a dedicated view.) Continue to display arrangements and create exploded views until you have as many as you need. Place the exploded views on the drawing. The drawing above has two explosion views positioned directly on top of one another. One view uses solid lines and the other uses dashed lines.
12-9
Activity Arrangements in the Vise Assembly

The vise is supplied with a second set of jaws that are notched to grip round objects. It is necessary to create arrangements showing each set of jaws for product illustrations.
12
You need to plan the structure so that two arrangements in the vise will show the at and v-plate jaws respectively. The Active arrangement in the vise will cause each of the two jaw subassemblies to Use a correct arrangement with the desired plates visible and the other plates suppressed. You will organize each arrangement in the top level assembly to use the correct arrangements in subassemblies, and save your parts. Next, you will add the v-jaw plates to the subassemblies and edit each subassembly arrangement to suppress unwanted plates. When that much is accomplished you will consider other details.
12-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 1:
Open vise_arrange. This is a copy of your familiar vise assembly. It has the same piece part components but different subassemblies.
12
Step 2:
Rename the default arrangement to indicate that it uses the standard plates. Make sure the Assemblies application is active. (StartAssemblies) Choose AssembliesComponentsArrangements.
Highlight Arrangement 1 in the list and choose Rename. Type Standard Jaws and press enter.
12-11
Step 3:
Copy the Standard Jaws (Default) arrangement. If necessary highlight Standard Jaws in the arrangements list.
12
Choose Copy. Name the new arrangement V-Jaws.
Notice that the Use and Set as Default icons are now active and selectable. Close the Assembly Arrangements dialog. Step 4: Plan the assembly structure. Pin the Assembly Navigator in the open position. Expand all nodes and locate the jaw_plate components. There is one jaw plate in two subassemblies: moving_jaw_arrange and xed_jaw_arrange. Step 5: Create subassembly arrangements. From the MB3 menu over the xed_jaw_arrange node in the navigator choose ArrangementsEdit. Rename the default arrangement to Flat Jaw. Copy the Flat Jaw arrangement and name the copy V-Jaw. Close the Assembly Arrangements dialog. Step 6: Add v_plate to xed_jaw_arrange as a component. Make xed_jaw_arrange the work part.
Choose Add Existing Component.

Use Choose Part File to locate v_plate. Use the BODY (model) reference set, Original layers, and Mate. Mate the large planar face of the v-jaw to the inner planar face of the xed jaw.
12
Center one screw hole with the corresponding hole on the jaw.
12-13
Create a Parallel constraint between the upper face of the v-jaw and the upper face of the xed jaw.
12
Choose OK in the mating dialog. Cancel the Select Part dialog so that you can change the work part in the next step. Step 7: Arrange the suppression states for the original at jaw plates. Set the work part to vise_arrange. If necessary Expand All nodes in the Assembly Navigator. An Expand All icon appears in the Assembly Navigator toolbar. The same command is available on the MB3 menu over an unused area of the navigator itself. Over the column titles of the Assembly Navigator (for example where it says Descriptive Part Name) click MB3 and toggle Include Suppressed Components to the enabled indication (icon appears depressed).
12-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Notice that a new line (with a new icon) appears in the moving jaw subassembly. You will duplicate the structure you see here in the xed jaw.
12
Using MB3 in the Assembly Navigator over the node of the jaw_plate (the original at jaw) in the xed_jaw_arrange subassembly, choose Suppression.
12-15
12
Set the suppression for the controlling assembly xed_jaw_arrange as Never Suppressed in the Flat Jaw (Default) arrangement, and Always Suppressed in the V-Jaw arrangement:
Step 8:
Arrange the suppression states for the new v_plate components. Using MB3 in the Assembly Navigator over the node of the v_plate (the new v-jaw) in the xed_jaw_arrange subassembly, choose Suppression. Set the suppression for the controlling assembly xed_jaw_arrange as Always Suppressed in the Flat Jaw (Default) arrangement, and Never Suppressed in the V-Jaw arrangement:
12-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 9:
Dene the subassembly arrangements used by each top level arrangement. Currently every assembly is displaying its default arrangement: The active arrangement for the vise_arrange assembly is Standard Jaws. This arrangement is using the Flat Plates arrangements in the moving and xed jaw subassemblies. This is as you want it, so it need not be changed. You need the top level V-Jaws arrangement to use the V-Jaw arrangements in the moving and xed jaw subassemblies. In the Assembly Navigator over the vise_arrange node, hold MB3, slide to Arrangements, and select V-Jaws from the list.. Using the Assembly Navigator change the arrangement for the xed_jaw_arrange component to V-Jaw. Change the arrangement for the moving_jaw_arrange component to V-Jaw.
12
If necessary make the top level assembly the work part.

Step 10: Test your new arrangement. Change between the top level Standard Plates and V-Jaws arrangements a few times, ending in the V-Jaws arrangement.
12
Steps 11 to 14 are OPTIONAL, to be completed if you have extra time. Step 11: Make a modeling change that impacts the arrangements. Move the cursor over either one of the v-plates on the graphics screen, and choose MB3Make Displayed Part. If necessary pin open the resource bar and switch to the Part Navigator. Make sure the navigator is in Design View. (Timestamp Order inactive) Expand the Model node and notice that the part contains a suppressed offset face.
The v-plates as you rst see them are the same thickness as the at jaws. This makes it relatively easy to swap into the assembly; however, the jaws are not as strong as they should be because the material behind the notched areas is too thin. You will unsuppress the offset feature and deal with any component positioning problems that may occur as a result. If necessary choose StartModeling.
Unsuppress the Offset Face (7) feature. Select the Offset Face (7) feature in the Part Navigator and examine the Value of the offset in the Details area.
12
Since each plate is offset by 0.25 inches you know that the total overlap will be 0.5 inch. You need to examine the mating to see if there is a way to override a mating condition in the V-Jaws arrangement to provide the correct positioning. Make vise_arrange both the displayed and work part. Notice that the jaws now overlap.
12-19
Step 12: Examine the mating constraints in the top level assembly. Choose Mate Component.
12
Observe that there is a distance constraint between the moving and xed jaws.
When you select the distance constraint degree of freedom arrows appear but no faces are highlighted. This is because the mated pair of faces are in the at jaws, which are suppressed in this arrangement. You need to override the position of the moving jaw in the active arrangement, V-Jaws. You will reposition the moving jaw subassembly by 0.5 inch in the V-Jaws arrangement, but not in the Standard Jaws arrangement. Cancel the mating dialog.
12-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 13: Reposition the moving jaw subassembly in only the V-Jaws arrangement. From the MB3 menu over vise_arrange choose ArrangementsEdit. Highlight the V-Jaws arrangement in the list and choose Properties. Toggle Ignore All Mating Constraints to on Choose OK in the Arrangement Properties dialog and then Close the Assembly Arrangements dialog. Choose MB3Reposition over the moving_jaw_arrange node in the Assembly Navigator. Click on the X drag handle. It should be pointing to the right, meaning that the jaw needs to move in the negative direction to open the jaws. On the Transform page of the Reposition Component dialog Enter -0.5 as the distance and press enter. Choose OK to relieve the overlapping condition. Step 14: Test your new arrangement. Change between the top level Standard Plates and V-Jaws arrangements a few times, ending in the V-Jaws arrangement. Step 15: Another Challenge: The plate screws also need to be positioned differently in each arrangement. Step 16: Close all parts.
12
12-21
Summary
Arrangements provide powerful tools to design and illustrate mechanisms that move by repositioning components either with basic positioning or within mating degrees of freedom. In this lesson you: Created and displayed several arrangements. Used arrangements to vary the structure of the vise assembly. Used arrangement properties to ignore mating constraints and properly reposition a variation of your vise assembly.
12
12-22
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
13 Offset Curves
Purpose This lesson will address the associative offset curve functionality and illustrate its parametric qualities. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create associative offset curves Edit associative offset curves
13
13-1
Offset Curves
Offset Curves
The Offset function allows you to create curves offset from existing lines, arcs, conics, splines, and edges. The system computes points normal to the selected parent curves and constructs the offset curves through these points. The offset curves can either be associative or non-associative. If associative curves are created, a parameter for the offset distance is created relative to the parent objects. You can access the Offset Curves function by choosing InsertCurve from CurvesOffset. The advantage of the Associate option provides automatic update of wall thickness or other constant distance geometry used in swept bodies, eliminating the need to constrain the curves in a sketch, and greatly reducing the steps required to edit the distance between geometry. Curves can be offset within the plane dened by the selected geometry or to a parallel plane by using the draft angle and height options. Multiple curves can only be offset if they are coplanar and in a contiguous string (i.e., they must be end-to-end). The object types of the resulting curves are the same as their input curves except for conics, which are offset as splines. If you only select a line, you will need an additional point away from the line to dene the offset plane. InformationFeature provides additional information on associative offset curves, such as lists of parents and parameters used in the creation. Procedure Select the curve(s) or edge(s) to offset. A conehead vector in the plane of the selected curves points toward the positive offset direction. Dene the offset parameters in the Offset Curves dialog. Choose OK (or Apply if you wish the dialog to remain open).
13
13-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Offset Curves
Offset Curve Dialog Offset by: Distance offsets curves in the plane of the input curves. Draft offsets curves in a plane parallel to the plane of the input curves at a specied distance. A plane symbol marks the plane in which the offset curves lie. Law Curve offsets curves at a distance dened by a law, which you specify with the law subfunction. 3D Axial offsets strings of coplanar or non-coplanar (3D) curves. The resulting offset curve is always a spline.
13
Distance: The offset distance from the selected curves in the direction indicated by the conehead vector. Negative distance values offset in the opposite direction. Draft Height: The distance from the plane of the input curves to the plane of the resulting offset curves. Draft Angle: The angle from the offset vector to a line normal to the reference plane, where the input curves lie. 3D Offset Value: lets you specify an offset for 3D or non-coplanar curves
13-3
Offset Curves
Below, is an example of offset curves (1) created with the Draft offset method. The Draft Height is 0.25, and the Draft Angle is 30.
Top View
13
Front View
Trim: Methods for trimming or extending the offset curves to their intersection points. None: The offset curves will be neither trimmed nor lleted. Extended Tangents: Extends the offset curves to their intersection points. Fillet: Constructs an arc tangent to the endpoint of each offset curve. The radius of the arc is equal to the offset distance. None Lines are offset but not joined. Extended Tangents Curve tangents extend to intersection. Fillet A llet is formed.
Trimming options are only available when applying the offset methods of Distance or Draft.
13-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Offset Curves
Extend Factor: A multiple of the offset distance. It controls the length of the offset tangent extension lines. This option is used only for Extended Tangents trim when Associative Output is toggled off. Extended Tangents extends the offset curves to their intersection points. The length of the offset tangent extension lines is controlled by the Extend Factor, which is a multiple of the offset distance. It is used for all curves except lines, which are simply extended to the intersection points. The gure below is an example that uses an Extend Factor of 0.2.
13
1 Added line between endpoints. Curves have been extended to 0.2 max. 2 Original curves 3 Distance Extended 4 Offset distance 5 Added intersecting curve tangent lines
Fillet constructs an arc tangent to the endpoint of each offset curve. The radius of the arc is equal to the offset distance. The gure below shows an offset created with this Trim Method. If you create repeated offsets (i.e., by choosing Apply without changing any inputs), the radius of the arc increases each time by the offset distance.
1 Original curves 2 Offset curves
Group Objects: Lets you choose whether to group the offset curves together.
13-5
Offset Curves
Approx Tolerance: Determines the accuracy of the offset curve if the input curve is a spline or conic. Number of Copies allows you to construct multiple sets of offset curves. Each set is offset by the specied distance (according to the Offset Method used) from the previous set. Reverse Direction: Reverses the positive offset direction of the conehead vector. Redisplay Reference Objects: Lets you redisplay the direction vector and, if you are using Offset by Draft, the plane symbol marking the offset plane. Associative Output: If this option is toggled on, the offset curves are associated to the input curves and dening data. Input Curves: Lets you specify the disposition of the original curves. Retain: Keeps the input curves when the offset curves are created. Blank: Blanks the input curves when the offset curves are created. Delete: Deletes the input curves when the offset curves are created. This option is grayed out when Associative Output is toggled on. Replace: Acts like a move operation, where the input curve is moved to the offset curve position. This option is grayed out when Associative Output is toggled on. The disposition instructions that you specify in the Input Curves options only apply to curves, not edges or sketch curves, which are always kept. You can use the Blank option with sketch curves when Associative Output is toggled off.
13
13-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Offset Curves
Activity - Capturing Design Intent with Offset Curves

You will dene the interior portion of a gasket using associative offset curves. This prole must update when the outside prole changes. The outside prole of the gasket has been created and extruded. Step 1: Step 2: Open gasket and choose StartModeling. Create the associative offset curves. Choose Offset Curves. (InsertCurve from CurvesOffset) In Selection Intent, lter for Face Edges and select the top face. Choose OK. Dene the Offset Curve parameters as shown below. Offset by: Distance: Trim: Approx Tolerance: Number of Copies: Associative Output: Rough Offset: Input Curves: Distance 0.25 Extended Tangents 0.001 1 On (box has a check) Off (box is empty) Retain
13
The offset vector should be pointing into the solid body. If necessary, select Reverse Direction. Use Redisplay Reference Objects as needed to clarify what you see on the screen.
13-7
Offset Curves
Choose OK. The offset curves are created.
13
Step 3:
Extrude the offset curves. Choose Extrude. Select the offset curves. Choose Reverse Direction intersects the original body.
so that the preview body
Change the End parameter to Until Selected. Select the bottom face for the trimming face Set the Boolean option to Subtract and choose OK. The gasket is complete. Step 4: Edit the prole of the gasket. Locate SKETCH_000 in the Part Navigator. In the MB3 menu over SKETCH_000 choose Edit.
13-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Offset Curves
Edit the dimensional constraints as illustrated below. This is a good place to practice using Delay Evaluation.
13
Choose Finish Sketch. Step 5: Edit the width of the gasket. Open the Part Navigator.
13-9
Offset Curves
Select the Offset Curve feature. In the Details area change the Distance to 0.5 and press enter.
13
The gasket cross section updates. Step 6: Close the part; do not save.
13-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Offset Curves
Summary
Associative Offset Curves is a parametric tool you can use to make new features from and parallel to existing edges. In this lesson you: Created associative curves using the Offset function. Edited associative curves.
13
13-11
13
Lesson
14 Extracting and Simplifying Geometry
Purpose This lesson will show how design intent may be captured by associatively copying geometry within a part to help dene a solid in an alternative shape. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Extract an associative copy Simplify a solid body for use in an assembly Simplify a solid body to hide internal detail Create a simplied reference set
14
14-1
Extracting and Simplifying Geometry
Extract Geometry
This option lets you associatively copy curves, faces, regions of faces, and bodies within a part. It provides functionality that is similar to the WAVE Geometry Linker, which copies geometry to other parts. Extracted objects have no internal feature tree of their own, but are associated to their parent. They will update if the parent changes. Any feature modeling function can be performed on an extracted body, thus creating a new branch in the feature structure of the part. Possible uses for Extracted Geometry:
14
Preserving Geometry for other uses Edges and faces can be extracted at a convenient timestamp and referenced later for placement, positioning, or trimming. This saves the parent geometry before it is altered or removed (such as a blend on an edge). In-process modeling many designs must have material added and machined features removed for a casting process. An extracted copy of the original solid is ideal to begin modeling patterns or permanent molds. Simplied Solids An entire solid body can be extracted within the part and simplied to remove detail. This simplied solid can be added to a reference set for use in an assembly. This would improve performance in working with the assembly yet still display an accurate associative envelope of the detail solid. For this lesson we will concentrate on simplied solids.
14-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Choosing InsertAssociative CopyExtract or the Extract Geometry icon in the Form Features toolbar will activate the Extract dialog.
14
The At Timestamp option lets you specify where the extracted feature is placed in the feature list. If toggled on, any new features created after the extracted feature will not affect the extracted geometry. If toggled off, any new features that alter the parent geometry will be reected in the extracted geometry. This option does not apply to curves. The Blank Original option allows you to blank the parent geometry to make it easier to work with the extracted geometry. This option only applies to curves and bodies. The extracted geometry will be created as a feature and given unique names, depending on the geometry type (Extract Face, Extract Body etc.).
14-3
Editing Extracted Geometry

Extract features may be edited to select different parent geometry or to change the timestamp setting. Editing the parameters of an extract body feature will bring up the following dialog.
14
This dialog is similar to the dialog used to edit linked features created with the WAVE Geometry Linker. When this dialog is up, the cursor will be active in the graphics area and allow you to select new parent geometry. This will associate the extracted feature with the new geometry and break the associativity with the old parent geometry. The Extracted and Linked option will change the selection scope to let you select parent geometry from the work part or from another part in an assembly. This can be used to convert an extracted feature to a linked feature.
14-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Extracting a Solid

In this activity, you will extract a solid body that represents a machined casting. You will later use the extracted body to create a simplied reference set. With further simplications, scaling to represent shrinkage, added material where needed for machining, and suitable draft, this extracted body becomes the basis for tooling. Step 1: Open the part simplify_1 and choose StartModeling.
14
Step 2:
Extract the solid. Make layer 2 the work layer.
Choose InsertAssociative CopyExtract.
Choose Body. Select the solid and choose OK. Step 3: Edit the color of the extracted body. Make layer 1 Invisible. Hold the cursor over the body, without moving it, until the QuickPick cursor appears.
14-5
Click to open the QuickPick dialog.
14
Options will vary depending on cursor location. Select Solid Body from the list. With the cursor over the selected body hold MB3 until the radial pop up options appear. Slide the cursor over Edit Object Display (down and to the left). Select the color button and change the color to Yellow and choose OK. With the extracted body a different color you will easily and quickly be able to distinguish between the two. Step 4: Close the part.
14-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Simplify Body
This option provides a method to hide detail from a solid by removing faces. The system must be able to extend surrounding faces to heal the wound where faces are removed. Simplify Body is commonly used in conjunction with extracted or linked bodies so that an original associative solid is also maintained. It is not necessary, merely convenient, to simplify an extracted body. Simplify may be applied to any body if it meets your needs.
14
Simplify has the following uses: Assembly Performance - Detail can be removed from an extracted solid in a component part to reduce the amount of data loaded in an assembly. The simplied solid can provide an accurate envelope but remove internal detail. Internal Volume Solid - A solid representing the internal volume of a part can be created by removing external faces and retaining internal faces. This solid can be analyzed for volume and mass properties. Core and Pattern Preparation - Simplify can often be used both to remove interior faces, for patterns, and to remove exterior faces, for cores. In-Process Parts - Faces can be removed from a machining solid to represent the part as-cast, or, as it would appear at various stages in a manufacturing process. Hide Proprietary Data - A solid can be simplied to remove proprietary detail before it is exported to a supplier or sub-contractor. The simplied solid can be linked into another part. The linked part would have no "knowledge" of removed data in the original, but it can still be updated by the owning company if the parent body changes. Finite Element Analysis - Details such as holes and blends can be removed for nite element analysis.
Choosing InsertDirect ModelingSimplify or the Simplify Body icon in the Feature Operation toolbar will activate the Simplify Body dialog. 1 Retained Faces
2 Boundary Faces
14
3 Boundary Edges
4 No Creation Conrmation Conrm Before Creation Review After Creation
You must select at least one Retained Face to let the system know which side of the boundary edges has the faces you wish to keep. The system will automatically determine additional retained faces as those that can be reached from the selected retained face(s) without crossing any boundary edges. You can select Boundary Faces to help you dene boundary edges. The system denes all the edges of a boundary face as boundary edges (except for those edges that you deselect). Boundary faces are also added to the set of retained faces, from which they can be deselected if desired. You can select individual Boundary Edges to divide the faces to be removed from those to be retained. Verify Removed - Since you do not explicitly identify which faces to remove, this option lets you select individual faces to determine if they will be removed.
14-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Automatic Hole Removal - Lets you automatically remove the faces of holes less than a specied diameter. The system will identify the edges of the holes that meet this criteria as boundary edges. Preview - Lets you highlight all retained or removed faces for verication before actually performing the simplication. Imprint Faces - Lets you use a datum plane to remove only portions of selected faces. New edges are dened where the plane intersects the faces and a new face is created to "cap" the new edges.
14
In the example below, the datum plane (1) was used to remove detail from the lower portion of a pocket. With the Connected Faces option, only one of the side faces (2) of the pocket had to be selected as an imprint face. The bottom face (3) is a Retained face.
14-9
Review Failing Wounds - Becomes active only if, after you select OK or Apply, the Simplify Body feature cannot be built because of a wound that could not be healed. Removing faces leaves open wounds that must be healed for the simplied body to remain a valid solid. The system attempts to grow surrounding faces to heal the wounds if the geometry allows. The Conrm before creation option prevents you from inadvertently creating the Simplify Body before all of the intended faces are selected by displaying a conrmation dialog. The Review after creation option will let you approve or reject the results of a simplify operation without dismissing the dialog.
14
14-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Simplifying a Solid

In this activity you will use the simplify function to remove some internal detail of a machined casting to create a simplied reference set. Step 1: Open simplify_2 and choose StartModeling. Enable the Simplify Body icon on the Feature Operation toolbar.
Toolbars tend to be mapped to legacy menus rather than current menus. For example, the Direct Modeling menu, which has changed over recent releases, contains Simplify; however, the Simplify Body icon appears on the Feature Operations toolbar. Step 2: Simplify the extracted solid. Choose InsertDirect ModelingSimplify or use the icon.
14
If necessary shade the model to aid in face selection. Select one of the external faces on the right side of the solid as a Retained Face (1).
Select the Boundary Faces icon

(or use MB2).

Select the 4 faces adjacent to the openings as the Boundary Faces. Note that one of the faces is on the bottom of the part that is not shown in the illustration below.
14
Toggle Automatic Hole Removal to on and enter 0.5 for the Hole Dia Less Than value. Choose Preview and then Preview Removed. Verify that the internal faces and small hole faces are highlighted. Choose Back to return to the Simplify dialog.
14-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Choose Apply to simplify the solid.
14
A message similar to this will appear to inform you how many faces were removed.
Choose OK to the information message and Cancel the Simplify Body dialog. Step 3: Make a simplied reference set. Choose FormatReference Sets. Choose Create. Enter simple for the name and choose OK. Select the solid body and choose OK. If you add this part to an assembly you now have the ability to either show the fully detailed model or a simplied model by virtue of the two reference sets, BODY and SIMPLE. Step 4: Examine the existing BODY reference set.
NX has the ability to create automatic reference sets for model geometry. Automatic reference sets can be identied by the name format (e.g. Model ("BODY") vs. SIMPLE). The rules in place for what objects are added to the model reference set states that any "solid" geometry created in the part le is to be automatically added to the model reference set. Since the extracted body created a second solid body we will see that the extracted body has been added to the BODY reference set. Select the Model ("BODY") reference set from the listing window.
Choose Information.
14
Notice the information window shows that there are two bodies included in the reference set. Close the Information window.
Choose Remove Objects. Select the simplied solid body and choose OK. Choose Information again to verify the BODY reference set only contains one body. When nished close the information window. Step 5: Close the part.
14-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Summary
Associatively copying geometry within the same part is useful to help dene new features or show a solid in a different shape. In this lesson you: Extracted an associative copy of a solid body. Simplied a solid to remove internal detail. Created a simplied reference set.
14
14-15
14
Lesson
15 Face Operations
Purpose This lesson describes various face options you may use to modify existing solid bodies and features. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create an Offset Face Feature Create different Draft Features
15
15-1
Face Operations
Offset Face
You can use this option to offset one or more faces of a body along the face normals. The Offset Face feature can be reached through InsertOffset/ScaleOffset Face. To offset faces, you must: Enter the Offset Value. Select the objects.
The offset distance can be positive or negative, providing the topology of the body does not change. A positive offset distance is measured along a face normal pointing away from the solid.
15
After you select the desired faces or body and choose OK, the faces are moved and the body is updated.
You cannot instance an offset feature.
15-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Activity - Offset a Face

You will create a bolt hole circle via a circular array. The part needs to be clocked to a specic orientation: one of the hole faces will be offset to a smaller diameter. Step 1: Open the part le offset1 and choose StartModeling.
Step 2:
Create the circular array. Choose Instance Feature. Choose Circular Array. Select Simple Hole(9) and choose OK. Enter the following parameters: Number = 6 Angle = 360/6
15
Choose OK. Choose Datum Axis. Select the datum axis and choose OK. Cancel the Instance dialog. Step 3: Change the size of one of the holes. If the parametric value for one of the holes is changed, all of the holes in the circular array would change. To accomplish the orientation intent, you will add a parametric Offset Face feature to the hole that is to control the clocking of the part.
15-3
Face Operations
Choose InsertOffset/ScaleOffset Face. Enter 0.016 for the Offset Value. Select the cylindrical face of the hole shown below, choose OK.
15
Step 4: Edit the offset value. The design intent is revised to require the clocking hole to be larger rather than smaller.
Choose Part Navigator. Verify that Timestamp Order is off.
15-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Select the Offset Face feature (top of the tree).
15
Edit the value using the details window to -0.032. The face is offset to the new value.
15-5
Face Operations
Step 5:
Change the hole size of the bolt hole circle. In the Part Navigator, expand the Circular Array feature and its Members folder. Select any Instance in the navigator, as shown below.
15
Change the .375 to .50 as shown above. Notice that all of the holes updated to the new size, and that the hole with the offset feature maintained its offset. Step 6: Close the part; do not save.
15-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Draft
Draft lets you change faces to have an angle relative to a vector called the draw direction. The Draft dialog is shown in the gure below with More Options (left) and Less Options (right).
15
Draft is generally used to apply a slope to vertical faces on a pattern, a part, a mold, or a die, so that when the part is pulled from the mold or die, the faces move away from each other rather than sliding along each other. The drafted faces allow the part or pattern, and its mold or die, to be easily separated. Draft lets you apply a draft to faces or edges, relative to a specied vector and optional reference points or stationary planes. You can select one or more faces, edges, or individual features to be modied. However, they must all be part of the same solid body.
15-7
Face Operations
You need to specify at least the following inputs for the draft operation: Faces to draft Draw direction Stationary objects Draft angle
Depending on the draft type you selected, some input is inferred, and you may need to explicitly specify additional input as required. When you provide sufcient input, draft optionally shows a preview of the result on the screen. Within one draft feature, you can have multiple draft angles. Select faces for any one draft angle, and then begin a new set of faces with another angle by choosing Complete set and start next set.
15
You can also use Selection Intent options to select faces or edges required for draft. For example, you can select all tangent faces. The angle between the tangent to the edge and the draft draw direction must be greater than the draft angle.
15-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
You can create the following four types of draft using the Draft operator.
If the draft operation requires that a planar cross section through the part be maintained throughout the face rotation, then use the Draft From Stationary Plane type. This is the default draft type selected when you the open the Draft dialog for the rst time.
If the draft operation requires that an edge of the face selected to be drafted be maintained throughout the face rotation, then use the Draft From Stationary Edges type.
If the draft operation requires that the face selected to be drafted maintain tangency with an adjacent face, after it is drafted, then use the Draft Tangent to Faces type. Here, the stationary edge is not xed but moves to maintain the tangency constraint between the selected faces.
15
If the draft operation requires that a planar cross section through the part be maintained throughout the face rotation, and that a ledge be created as necessary at parting edges, then use the Draft to Parting Edges type.
Draw Direction Regardless of the draft type selected, you must always specify a draw direction. If you are modeling a mold or die, it is the direction in which the molded part must move to be separated from your model of the mold or die. The draft angle is positive if the normal of the face to be drafted has a component vector along the draw direction. The angle is negative if the face normal has a component opposite to the draw direction.
Positive Draft
Negative Draft
15-9
Face Operations
Draft Selection Steps Stationary Plane appears in Draft From Stationary Plane and Draft To Parting Edges Faces to Draft appears in Draft From Stationary Plane Stationary Edges appears in Draft From Stationary Edges Variable Angle Point appears in Draft From Stationary Edges Tangent Faces to Draft appears in Draft Tangent to Faces Parting Edges appears in Draft To Parting Edges
15
Complete set and start next set is enabled after one complete selection has been made
15-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Activity - Draft
This activity will help you understand how to dene the stationary plane. The part below is to be cast. The design intent is: The current sizes of the bottom of the part (1) and the top of the pad (2) should be maintained. Apply a 10 degree draft on all external faces. Draw direction must be associative to the top or bottom of the part (1), (2). The current position of the outer top end of the cylindrical boss (3) must remain xed.
15
The internal hole is to be formed by a core. The draw direction for the core is along XC+, and must be associative to the hole axis. Apply a 5 degree draft to the internal hole. Maintain the size at the opening (4) after the adjacent face has draft. Open the part draft and choose StartModeling.
Step 1:
Step 2:
Examine the model by using InformationFeature.

Face Operations
Choose InformationFeature to review the features in this model. After reviewing the list of model features choose Cancel. Step 3: Add draft to the planar faces of the block feature. Choose Draft. If necessary, set the draft type to Draft From Stationary Plane.
Select the lower face of the block to infer a draw direction.
15
15-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
The system infers the downwards direction from the lower face. The desired draw direction is opposite, along ZC+. Double-click the draw vector to reverse it, or choose Reverse Direction.
15
Using the lower face to infer the draw direction assures that if for some reason the body is rotated in the part, the relative draft will not change. The Selection Step automatically advances to Stationary Plane.
Once again select the lower face of the part to dene the Stationary Plane. Using the lower face to represent the stationary plane meets the design intent that the bottom face will maintain its size. When you select a Stationary Plane the selection step automatically advances to Faces to Draft. Verify that Enable Preview is active (box is checked).
15-13
Face Operations
Select the four vertical faces of the large block feature in the graphic window.
As you select faces, pending drafted faces are displayed in preview format.
15
If necessary, enter 10 in the Angle eld (Set1 A). Choose Apply. Step 4: Taper the planar faces of the pad. Set Type to Draft From Stationary Edges.
15-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Select the top face of the rectangular pad as the object to infer a draft vector.
The selection step automatically advances to Stationary Edges.
If necessary, display the Selection Intent toolbar. From the curves and edges pull-down choose Face Edges.
15
15-15
Face Operations
Select the top face of the pad.
The four edges of the face are selected and a preview is displayed. Using Selection Intent assures you that the faces of the pad adjacent to every edge on the top face will be drafted even if the number of edges in the top face should change. Notice that you do not need to specify a stationary plane with the Draft From Stationary Edges method. The remaining step, Variable Angle Point, is optional. You do not need it for this part. Choose Apply. Step 5: Taper the cylindrical face of the boss. Set the type to Draft Tangent to Faces. Select the top face of the rectangular pad to infer the draft vector.
15
The section step advances to Tangent Faces to Draft.
15-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Select the cylindrical face of the boss. Use the preview to verify the shape of the pending draft feature.
15
Choose Apply. Step 6: Taper the planar end face of the boss. Set the draft Type to Draft From Stationary Plane. Select the planar face of the pad to infer the draw direction. (1)
The Selection Step advances to Stationary Plane. If you specify a point the stationary plane will be perpendicular (or normal) to the draw direction.
15-17
Face Operations
In the Snap Point toolbar, make sure only Quadrant Point is active.
Select the top most quadrant point on the planar face of the boss. (2) The lines the system displays represent where the stationary plane intersects the model. Points on these curves will not move when draft is applied.
15
The Selection Step advances to Faces to Draft. Select the planar face of the boss. (3) Choose Apply.
15-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Step 7:
Taper the cylindrical face of the hole feature along its axis, with an angle of 5. Leave the diameter at the outside drafted face unchanged. This face must be formed by some type of mold insert or core. The draft in this area must match the direction that the core piece is removed from the mold before ejecting the part.
Set the Type to Draft From Stationary Edges. To dene the draw direction, select the cylindrical face of the hole. (1)
The selection step advances to Stationary Edges. The draw direction vector needs to point in the +XC direction. If necessary choose Reverse Direction to make the vector point outwards from the hole, as shown below.
15
Set the Selection Intent to Single Curve. You used Face Edges earlier. In this case, you do not want all of the edges on a face. Select the edge of the hole that lies on the face of the block. (2)
15-19
Face Operations
Enter an angle of 5.
Choose OK.
15
Notice the taper direction. This is because the taper is applied to the interior of the part. The nished part should appear as shown below:
Step 8:
Close the part; do not save.
15-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Activity - Internal & External Draft

You will investigate directions for internal and external features. Step 1: Step 2: Open the part draft2 and choose StartModeling if necessary. Create draft from the top face. Choose Draft.
Set the Type to Draft From Stationary Edges. Select the upper face, shown below, as a draw direction reference.
15
Change the Selection Intent to Face Edges. Select the same face again to specify stationary edges. Enter 15 for the Angle. Choose OK.
15-21
Face Operations
Notice the difference in direction between the external and internal tapers.
After design review, the engineer supplies additional design intent for constant wall thickness. This requires you to revise the existing draft and add a new draft feature.
15
15-22
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Step 3:
Edit the existing draft. Over the solid body hold the curser until the Quick Pick cursor appears and choose MB1. Select the Draft feature. Position the cursor over one of the draft faces. Hold down MB3 until the radial pop-up icons appear.
15
While still holding down MB3, shift the cursor to the Edit Parameters icon and release it over the icon. Change the Selection Intent to Single Curve. Shift-deselect any one of the existing selected edges. The original edge selection followed the Face Edges rule. When you deselect one of them, the rest are automatically deselected. Select the four outer edges of the top face as Single Curves.
15-23
Face Operations
Take note of the expression name for the angle, p8 in the illustration. (Write it down.)
15
Choose OK. Step 4: Use the expression editor to rename the angle expression to draft.
Step 5:
Create a second draft feature using the edges of the interior opening. Choose Draft.
15-24
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
If necessary, set the draft type to Draft From Stationary Edges.
Select the top face to infer a draw vector.
Choose Reverse Direction. You need the draw direction to be downwards for the interior faces. As Stationary Edges select the four edges around the opening on the top face.
15
15-25
Face Operations
In the Angle eld enter the name draft.
15
Choose OK. The two sets of drafted faces will now remain parallel when the expression named draft is edited.
Step 6:
Close the part, do not save.
15-26
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Activity - Creating a Windshield Fluid Reservoir

You will add draft to a molded windshield uid reservoir design. The design intent is for the faces to taper outward from the bottom, holding the bottom edges xed while the top face becomes larger. The draft angle must vary at specic points that will be described as you work. Step 1: Step 2: Open uid_reservoir and choose StartModeling. Apply variable draft along two edges.
Choose Draft.
Set the Type to Draft From Stationary Edges. Select the bottom face to dene the draw direction. The draw vector should displayed pointing down, along ZC-. Select the two single edges shown below.
15
Choose Variable Angle Point. On the Snap Point toolbar, if necessary, toggle End Point to active.
Face Operations
Specify the rst point by selecting the end point as shown below.
15
Key in a Variable Angle of 4 and press Enter.
Specify a second Variable Angle Point at the edge end point shown below.
15-28
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Enter a Variable Angle of 6.
Specify the third point by selecting the end point as shown below.
15
Key in 65 in the % Arclength input window and press Enter. Enter a Variable Angle of 8. Specify the fourth point by again selecting the end point as shown below.
15-29
Face Operations
Enter a Variable Angle of 15. Choose OK Step 3: Create the ller hole. Choose InsertDesign FeatureBoss. Enter the following parameters: Diameter = 2 Height = 1.5 Taper Angle = 2
Select the top face as the placement face. Choose OK.
15
Position the boss as shown below.
Step 4:
Create the blends. Choose Edge Blend. Set the Selection Intent to Tangent Curves.
15-30
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Select the three more or less vertical edge strings shown below. When you change the value in a dynamic input box you may use the Enter key to update the preview.
15
Enter a Radius of 1.5 in the dynamic input box.
15-31
Face Operations
Choose Complete set and start next set. Select these upper edges and specify a 0.375 radius:
15
There could be an warning unable to terminate blend edges if you select the edge string shown before you change the radius. This warning condition will go away as soon as you enter the new radius.
Choose Complete set and start next set.
15-32
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Select these lower edges and specify a 1.5 radius:
Choose Complete set and start next set. Select the edge at the base of the boss feature and specify a 0.5 radius:
15
Choose OK.
15-33
Face Operations
Step 5:
Change the solid body to a shell. Choose Shell. Select the planar face of the boss feature, (top of the boss) to be removed.
Thickness
0.08
in
15
Enter a Thickness of 0.08. Choose OK. Step 6: Create a lip on the ller hole. Choose Extrude. Change the Selection Intent to Single Curve. Select the outside edge shown below.
15-34
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Choose Reverse Direction into the part.
to point the preview body down
Enter the following parameters: Start = 0 End = 0.125
Toggle Offset to active and enter these parameters: Start = 0 End = 0.125
Change the Boolean option to Unite. Choose OK. Step 7: Optional Step: Find the interior volume of the body. Begin by extracting an associative copy (InsertAssociative CopyExtract) of the body to layer 2. Make layer 2 the Work Layer, and all other layers Invisible.
15
Choose InsertDirect ModelingSimplify. Select any interior face as a retained face. Select the exterior planar face of the lip as a boundary face. Boundary faces are automatically selected as retained faces. In this case you do not want the boundary face to be retained.
Choose Retained Faces again, and hold down the shift key to deselect the lip face as a retained face. (It will still be a boundary face.) Choose OK to march through the selection steps until the simplication is created.
15-35
Face Operations
Use the expression editor to create a Measurement expression named Capacity to measure the volume in US gallons: Set the dimensionality to volume in cubic inches.
Choose Measure Bodies and select the body.
from the Expressions dialog
Before you accept the Formula, divide the parameter by 231 (231 = the number of cubic inches in a US gallon.)
15
Step 8:
Verify the value of the expression named Capacity. Close the part.
15-36
mt10055_g NX 4
Face Operations
Summary
The Offset Feature allows the user to move a face, multiple faces, or an entire body in a direction based on the faces normal. The draft functionality allows the user to change the orientation of one or more faces of a solid body. Creating draft for cast parts would be one application for this parametric feature. In this lesson you: Created an Offset Feature. Created Draft features. Reviewed Extract Body, Simplify Body, and Measurement Expressions.
15
15-37
15
Lesson
16 Trim Body
Purpose The purpose of this lesson is to use Trim Body to apply the shape of a free form sheet to a simple extruded solid. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Dene a solid bodys contour by using the Trim Body functionality
16
16-1
Trim Body
Trim Body
Trim Body lets you trim one or more target bodies using a face, datum plane, or other geometry. You select which portion of the bodies you want to keep, and the trimmed bodies take the shape of the trimming geometry. You can access the Trim Body feature by choosing, InsertTrimTrim Body. To use the Trim Body option, follow these steps: Choose Trim Body. Select one or more target bodies, then choose OK. Select a face or datum plane, or dene other geometry, to trim the target bodies. A vector is displayed. The portion of the target bodies in the direction of the vector will be removed. Choose to accept the direction of the vector or reverse it.
You must select at least one target body, even when there is only one possible target displayed. You can select a face or multiple faces if they belong to the same solid body or a datum plane to trim the target bodies.
16
When you trim a body using a sheet, the sheet must be large enough to trim the body. If the sheet does not cut through a target body completely, the following message is displayed:
16-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Trim Body
If the sheet does not cut the target body at all, this message is displayed:
Determining which portion of the target bodies to keep is done by the direction of the normal vector. The vector points away from the body portion that will be kept. When the normal vector is displayed, a dialog offers you two options:
16
16-3
Trim Body
In the gure below the displayed direction is accepted. Notice that the resulting body is the portion of the target body that the vector pointed away from.
16
When you are trimming a solid body, the trim operation might fail if: A face of the trimming sheet is tangent (1) to the face of the solid body. The face of the solid body is coincident (2) with any joint of adjacent faces of the trimming sheet. The selected trimming geometries are faces from different solid bodies. The selected trimming geometries are disjoint (i.e., unconnected) faces from a solid body.
16-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Trim Body
To resolve this problem, try the following. Extract sheets from the solid body. Trim the sheets with curves and/or planes. Create any necessary caps and sew the sheet bodies into a solid body.
The Trim Body function retains all parametric information.
16
16-5
Trim Body
Activity - Windshield Fluid Reservoir

You will dene the external shape of a windshield uid reservoir using trim functionality introduced in this lesson. Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Create a new mm part ***_uid_reservoir. Choose StartModeling. Create a datum csys at absolute 0,0,0 with a display scale factor of 3 in layer 61. Set the Work Layer to 61. Choose InsertDatum/PointDatum CSYS.
Toggle Absolute CSYS to active. Set the Display Scale Factor to 3. Choose OK. Step 4: In layer 1, extrude a block with X=362, Y=336.5, and end distance 355.5. Set the Work Layer to 1. Choose Extrude.
16
Choose Sketch Section. The sketch plane will default to the XY plane of the datum csys. Name the sketch PROFILE. Choose OK to create the sketch. A new sketch always begins in the Prole sketch curve mode.
16-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Trim Body
Dene and constrain a rectangle with one corner at the origin, X length 362, Y width 336.5, as shown below:
Choose Finish Sketch. Verify that the start value is 0.0. Change the End value to 355.5. Choose OK. Fit the view. Step 5: Import the mold envelope sheet. The sheet solid that you are about to import denes the inner fender well and inside grill area of the vehicle. Change the Work Layer to 81. Make layer 61 Invisible. Choose FileImportPart.
16
16-7
Trim Body
In the Import Part dialog window set the options as shown below: Scale = 1.000 Create Named Group is inactive Import Views is inactive Import CAM Objects is inactive Layer is Work. Destination Coordinate System is WCS. Choose OK. Select the trim_sheet part le and choose OK. In the Point Constructor, Reset if necessary to indicate a destination point of WCS 0,0,0. Choose OK exactly once in the Point Constructor, and then Cancel. Step 6: Trim the block. Choose Trim Body.
16
Select the block as the Target.
Choose Tool. Set or verify Selection Intent Body Faces. Select the imported sheet solid as the Tool.
16-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Trim Body
The default direction of this sheet is inwards, toward the concave side, as shown below.
Double-click the direction vector to make it ip to the convex side of the sheet. The vector should point toward the material containing the WCS when the block is trimmed. Keep in mind that the vector points to the portion of the solid that is to be trimmed away. Choose OK.
16
16-9
Trim Body
Make layer 1 the work layer and 81 invisible.
16
16-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Trim Body
Summary
The Trim Body function removes a portion of the solid body, but does not remove parametric data. In this lesson you: Dened a solid bodys contour using the Trim Body function.
16
16-11
16
Lesson
17 Variable Radius Edge Blends

Purpose The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the variable radius blend functionality. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create and edit a Variable Radius Blend
17
17-1
Variable Radius Edge Blends
Variable Radius Blends

You can create a variable radius blend by specifying multiple points along selected edges and entering a radius at each point. This creates a blend whose radius varies as specied. A tolerance is used to approximate the variable radius blend. The system uses the smallest of these three tolerances: Tolerance in the Edge Blend dialog Distance Tolerance in the Modeling Preferences dialog The smallest entered radius of the variable radius blend divided by ten, unless the radius is zero
If the blend fails, tighten the tolerance. If the blend takes a long time to generate, loosen the tolerance. Procedure To create a variable radius blend: Choose Edge Blend. Select the desired edges to blend. Choose the Variable Radius icon. Indicate point locations and radii where you want the radius to vary. Modify the point location as necessary by dragging, % Arc Length, or Arc Length. The Edge Blend dialog maintains a list of points, associated values, and expressions. Choose OK when you have the shape you want.
17
17-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Creating Variable Radius Points While you are creating or editing an edge blend and after you have specied its edge sets, you can add some variable radius points to the sets. This has the effect of varying the blends radius along its edge. The Snap Point options (End Point, Mid Point, Control Point, Intersection Point, Arc Center, Quadrant Point, Existing Point, Point on Curve, Point on Surface and Point Constructor) can help you specify points.
You can change the position of a point to any other position along the edge it is on by: dragging the point handle.
17
entering the desired value in the % Arc Length or Arc Length dynamic input window. entering the desired value on the full dialog.
17-3
You can toggle between % Arc Length (the default) and Arc Length by MB3 over a variable point handle.
You can delete a point by using MB3 over it in the graphics window then choosing Delete. Once you have selected all desired edges (1) and selected all desired point locations for varying radii (2) , choose OK and the blend is created.
17
17-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Editing Variable Radius Blends You can edit features in general from EditFeatureEdit Parameters or the Part Navigator. You may also click MB3 over a feature in the graphic window to choose from the MB3 menu or click and hold MB3 for radial pop-ups of the most common options.
Tips and Techniques If you do not give enough information to create the blend, the system infers information for you depending on other selected geometry: If you indicate only one point and corresponding radius for a selected edge, the system creates a constant radius blend for that edge. If you do not give a point and radius to a selected edge, the system uses the default radius to create the blend for that edge. If you are editing an existing edge blend and you are not using Edit with Rollback, the Enable Preview option is not available.
17
17-5
The following are some rules you should follow to produce the desired blends: To produce a linearly varying blend (3), you must dene a different radius at each end of an edge (1,2).
If you must perform an operation that will blend away entire faces (1), blend only one edge at a time.
17
17-6
mt10055_g NX 4
If you select an open loop set of edges and supply radii only to the two open endpoints, the blend will vary continuously from endpoint to endpoint. In the example below, three edges on the top face of the block are blended. A radius of 0.1 is assigned at end point (1) and a radius of 0.4 is assigned at end point (2).
The result is shown below in both a TOP and ISO view.
You can create a variable radius blend with the radii value of zero at one of the selected vertices (1,2).
17
17-7
Activity - Creating a Variable Radius Blend

You will apply a variable blend along series of tangent edges.
Step 1:
Open the part le blend_frame and choose StartModeling.
17
Step 2:
Create a variable radius blend. Choose Edge Blend. Set the selection intent to Tangent Curves.
17-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Select the edge (1) shown below.
All of the tangent edges are selected. Once you have selected the rst edge the collection of edges identied by the selection intent is specied as Set 1, and the Variable Radius, Set Back, and Stop Short options become active. If you enter a radius value now it will become the default radius for the blend. Enter 0.5 as the default radius.
Choose Variable Radius. Zoom in on the model and select the left end point of the same edge as before. You can drag labels for Set, Arc Length, and Radius on to a more convenient location when necessary.
17
17-9
Drag the point back and forth and observe how the dynamic input window updates with the percent along the curve as the point moves along the selected edge. You could also key in a specic value. Move the slider so that the asterisk is located on the endpoint shown below, 100% of the arc length.
Key in 1.12 in the dynamic input box and press Enter.
17
You will get a warning, Unable to terminate the blend faces. You will correct that with the next point.
Select the edge (1) shown below at its center control point. (Modify Snap Point if necessary.)
Verify that the % Arc Length is 50. In the dynamic input box for Pt2 R, the default value is displayed. Key in the Pt2 R value 1.12 and press Enter. The blend can now be calculated over the entire edge string. All the selected points and parameters can be accessed as often as needed by selecting the line in the dialog list, the point handle, or the input window. MB3 over a handle offers a toggle between % Arc Length and Arc Length. Delete is always an MB3 option.
17
17-11
Select the left end point on the center-most edge (1) shown below. (0% Arc Length)
Key in 0.5 in the dynamic input box and press Enter. The preview should now show a change in radius between points 2 and 3. Select the same edge again at the right end. (100% Arc Length)
17
The default value 0.5 appears in dynamic input box Pt4 R.
17-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Select the edge (1) shown below at its center control point.
Enter 1.12 in the dynamic input box Pt5 R. The preview should now show a constant radius of .5 between points 3 and 4 and a bulge at point 5. Notice that to the right of point 5 the radius returns to the default value of .5. You will correct that by specifying a value at the end of the string. Select the endpoint (1) as shown below.
17
17-13
Enter 1.12 as the Pt6 R value. The blend preview should now appear symmetric about the part center.
Choose OK to create the blend.
17
Step 3:
Edit one of the variable radii. With the cursor over the blend feature, click and hold MB3 and choose the Edit Parameters icon from the radial pop-ups. Select the Pt3 R input window. Edit the variable radius Pt3 R from .5 to 1.75. Change the % Arc Length value for Pt3 to 20 and choose OK.
17-14
mt10055_g NX 4
The blend should now look like the illustration below.
Step 4:
Close the part, do not save.
17
17-15
Summary
NX Variable Radius Blend options allow specic design solutions when you need to create unique edge shapes. You can create a variable radius blend by specifying multiple points along selected edges and entering a radius at each point. In this lesson you: Created and edited a Variable Radius blend.
17
17-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
18 Remember Mating Constraints

Purpose Once a component is mated in an assembly, the mating constraints may be saved with the component part. This ability to remember the mating constraints reduces the interaction required to establish mating conditions when the component is added again in the future. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Save mating constraints in a component part Place a component with learned mating constraints in an assembly
18
18-1
Remember Mating Constraints

The mating constraints for a selected mating condition can be saved with the component part. This allows "learned" (or automatic) mating when the component is added to an assembly in the future. Saving Constraints with the Component Part After a component is mated in an assembly, the constraints may be saved with the component part using the Remember Constraints option in the pop-up menu in the Mating Conditions dialog.
A message will appear reminding you that the constraints have been recorded as the default
18
Recording the constraints will modify the component part. To use these remembered constraints in future sessions, the component part must be saved.
Only mating constraints which have one piece of geometry each on the To and From objects can be remembered. For example, a Center_1_1 constraint can be remembered, but more complex Center constraints (Center_1_2, Center_2_1, and Center_2_2) will not be remembered. Placing Components with Remembered Constraints Once the constraints have been saved with a component, they will be recognized as the default constraints the next time the component is added to an assembly. When adding an existing part as component in an assembly using the Mate position option, a Place Component dialog will appear.
A To object for each of the remembered constraints may then be selected.
18
18-3
Activity - Remember Constraints

You will assign mating constraints to components of a subassembly and top-level assembly. You will then save the component part using the Remember Constraints function. When you add additional components of the same name they will be positioned by taking advantage of the learned constraints. Step 1: Step 2: Open the part, rem_const_assm and start/verify the Modeling and Assembly applications. Examine the assembly. Use the Assembly Navigator. The assembly consists of a bracket (1) and a chassis (2).
Step 3:
Add hardware to the bracket and save the mating constraints. Make rem_const_brkt the Displayed Part.
18
Choose Add Existing Component.

Choose the Choose Part File button. Select rem_const_nut. Change the Reference Set to BODY (if necessary). Change the Positioning option to Mate and choose OK. Mate the mounting ange of the clinch nut (1) to one of the bracket inside surfaces (3). Create a Center 1 to 1 constraint between the collar of the clinch nut (2) and one of the holes on the "mate" surface.
18
18-5
Place the cursor over the Mating Condition name, choose MB3 and then Remember Constraints.
Choose OK in the Remember Constraints Message Window. Choose OK to dismiss the Mating Conditions dialog. Step 4: Add the remaining hardware using the "learned" mating constraints. If needed, choose the Add Existing Component icon again.
Choose rem_const_nut from the Select Part dialog and choose MB2.
18
Ensure the Reference Set is set to BODY and the Positioning option is set to Mate, then choose MB2.
18-6
mt10055_g NX 4
The Place Component dialog appears and the CUE line now prompts you to Select the object on the component to mate TO. All of the "FROM" faces, as well as the types of mating constraints, have been saved with the Remember Constraints function. The arrow in the Place Component dialog (1) denes which Mating Constraint you are identifying the TO face for.
The existing FROM face for the Mate constraint is already highlighted in the Component Preview window. Select one of the bracket inside surfaces (1) to mate TO.
18
18-7
The Mate constraint is now solved, which is noted by the check mark. Notice the clinch nut has rotated automatically in the Component Preview window to show a better orientation of the FROM face.
Select the appropriate hole to Center the clinch nut into and choose MB2. Add two more clinch nuts to ll the two remaining holes. The part should look like the following image when nished.
18
CHALLENGE: Return to rem_const_assm and add the part rem_const_screw using the appropriate mating conditions to secure the bracket to the chassis. Use the Remember Constraints function to add the remaining screws to the assembly. Step 5: Close all parts, do not save.
18-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Summary
The Remember Constraints option in the Mating Conditions dialog allows you to save mating constraints with a component part. These constraints are recorded and can be used as the defaults when the same part is added to an assembly as a component in the future. In this lesson you: Saved constraints with a mated component in an assembly. Placed a component in an assembly using the default remembered constraints.
18
18-9
18
Lesson
19 Component Arrays
Purpose Time and effort can be saved by applying component arrays and feature based component arrays. These features capitalize on the parametric and associative characteristics already present in assembly models. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create a Circular Component array Apply the From Instance Feature function Edit a circular array
19
19-1
Component Arrays
Component Arrays
You can use the Component Arrays options to create and edit linear and circular arrays of components in an assembly based on a template component. Creating a Component Array A component array can be dened in one of two ways As the component is added to the assembly by changing the Multiple Add option to Array, or After the component has been added to the assembly by choosing AssembliesComponentsCreate Array.
The Create Component Array dialog allows you to dene the type and name of the array to create.
Linear is a linear array of components where you specify the number of components, the spacing between them, and a direction reference. Circular is a circular array of components where you specify the number of components, the angle between them, and an axis. The From Instance Feature option provides a means to quickly generate a pattern of components with corresponding mating conditions based on an instance array in a component part.
19
19-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Component Arrays
Master Components Creating master component arrays (the linear or circular types) is very similar to feature instancing, except that a linear master component array does not need to be orthogonal. Each array member is offset from the master component. The number of elements in the array and the offsets of the array members are controlled by expressions. Master component arrays are not based on mating conditions. You can ne tune an array components position by editing its expressions using Tools Expression. You can either mate the master component to other geometry, or leave it free standing. The masters position updates according to any changes you make. You cannot delete a Master Component without rst deleting the array.
If you attempt to delete the last component in a From Instance Feature array you will get an update failure. You can delete the array from the resulting dialog.
19
19-3
Component Arrays
Editing a Component Array

Component Arrays can be edited by choosing AssembliesEdit Component Arrays.
The Edit Array Parameters option can be used to change the number of components, spacing, or direction reference for a linear or circular array. Other options are available to rename and delete arrays. The number of components and spacing values are stored as expressions. They can also be edited from the expression editor by choosing ToolsExpression.
19
19-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Component Arrays
Activity - Creating a Circular Component Array

You will create a component array to dene three additional locator blocks in the drill xture assembly.
Step 1:
Open xture_assm2. choose StartModeling and verify the Assemblies application is on. Display the datum axis which will dene the axis of the array. Choose FormatLayer Settings. Make layer 62 selectable.
Step 2:
Step 3:
Create a component array of locator blocks. Choose AssembliesComponentsCreate Array. Select locator from the Assembly Navigator and then OK.
Choose Circular from the Create Component Array dialog and choose OK. Toggle the Datum Axis option on in the dialog. Select the datum axis from the graphics area. Enter a Total Number of 4, an Angle of 90 and choose OK. The three additional locators are added to the assembly. Step 4: Close all parts; do not save.
19
19-5
Component Arrays
Feature-Based Component Arrays

In many cases it is necessary to associate an array of components to a corresponding array of features in another component of the assembly (i.e. bolts associated to a hole pattern). This can be accomplished by using the From Instance Feature option in the Create Component Array dialog.
The Template Component Component arrays produce occurrences of a "template" component object. These occurrences are all associated to the template component. Any changes made to the original component are reected in the occurrences of the component. The template component denes certain properties for any newly generated occurrences within the array which include: component part color layer name
19
19-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Component Arrays
Component Arrays and Mating Conditions When using the From Instance Feature option, mating constraints will be generated for the new occurrences based on those of the template component. If the constraint has been applied to an object belonging to a feature used to create the instance array, the constraint will be duplicated for each occurrence of the component. Because the component array uses the mating constraints of the template component, you must assign mating constraints to the template before creating the From Instance Feature component array. Feature-Based Array Associativity If the number of features in an instance set is changed, the components in the array associated to those features will also change (added or deleted). Furthermore, if a feature in an instance set is removed entirely as a result of a modeling change, the corresponding component in the array will also be removed. In the example below a modeling change causes a hole to be removed (3). If the deleted component was the "template" (1), the system assigns a new template (2) from the remaining components in the array.
19
19-7
Component Arrays
Activity - Creating Component Arrays From Feature Instances

The number and placement of washers on a valve yoke must match the position of holes. You will create a component array for a washer and a hex bolt based on the circular feature instance array of holes in the yoke (1). This is possible because the template washer and hex bolt will be mated to one of the instance array holes.
Step 1:
Open the part valve_assm_2. choose StartModeling and verify the Assemblies application is on. Add a washer. Add the washer part using the BODY reference set and the Mate Positioning option.
Step 2:
19
19-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Component Arrays
Mate the bottom face of the washer (1) to the top face of the yoke (2).
Center the cylindrical face of the washer (1) to the hole in the yoke (2). It is necessary to choose the instanced hole in the yoke so that you can later create an associated component array.
Choose Preview and OK twice.
19
Step 3: Add a hex bolt. Add the hex_bolt part using the BODY reference set and the Mate Positioning option.
Component Arrays
Mate the bottom face of the bolt head (1) to the top face of the washer (2).
Center the cylindrical face of the bolt (1) to the hole in the yoke (2). Again, it is necessary to choose the instanced hole in the yoke (not the washer!) so that you can later create an associated component array.
Choose Preview and OK twice.
19
19-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Component Arrays
Choose Cancel from Select Part.
Step 4:
Create the component array. Choose AssembliesComponentsCreate Array or Create Component Array. Choose the hex_bolt and the washer and OK. If necessary, choose the From Instance Feature option. Choose OK. A component array of washers and hex_bolts is generated based on the placement of the hole instance set of the yoke.
19
Step 5: Verify that new mating conditions were generated. Choose Mate Component.
Component Arrays
Note that you now have mating conditions for all of the occurrences of the hex_bolts and washers. Choose Cancel to dismiss the dialog. Step 6: Edit the bolt hole pattern in the Yoke. Make valve_yoke the work part. In the Part Navigator, expand the Model node to locate Circular Array (10). Expand the Details window.
19
Change the Number expression from 6 to 8. The yoke and the assembly update immediately.
Component Arrays
Make valve_assm_2 the Work Part. To complete this edit, the bolt hole pattern in the valve_housing would also have to be changed. Step 7: Close the assembly; do not save.
19
19-13
Component Arrays
Summary
Component arrays take advantage of existing parametric data and can save time in adding component part les to an assembly. In this lesson you: Created a circular component array. Applied the From Instance Feature function. Edited a circular array.
19
19-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Lesson
20 Family of Parts
Purpose Part Families provide a method to quickly dene a family of similar parts based on a single template part. In this lesson you will learn how to add a part family member to an assembly. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Create Family Member parts from a template part Add a Part Family member to an assembly
20
Family of Parts
Capabilities and General Concepts

Part Families provide you with a fast way to generate a family of similar parts. Each family member is based on a single template part, which can be a piece part or an assembly. You are able to specify properties which may vary between family members. These properties may be expression values, attribute values, or optional features, for example. The NX spreadsheet is used to dene the members of the family and their values for each of these properties. Changes to the template part can be propagated to all parts which are members of that family. Common Uses The most common use for Part Families is to aid in the creation of a library of standard parts, such as bolts or washers.
20
Family of Parts
Terminology There are some terms that are specic to the Family of Parts functions, as explained below. Template part A NX part le constructed in such a way as to allow a family of parts to be built based on it. Family table A table created from the template part, in the NX spreadsheet function, that describes the various attributes of the template part that you can change when you create a family member. Family member A read-only part le created from, and associated with, a template part and family table. Part Family The template part, family table, and family member parts. General Procedure Create a template part. In the template part, dene the attributes that will be used in the family. Create and save a family table in the spreadsheet, dening the various congurations of the family members. Choose Part FamilyCreate Parts in the family table (spreadsheet).
20
Family of Parts
Adding Part Family Members to an Assembly

When you select a part family template part to add as a component to an assembly, the Choose Family Member dialog is displayed. The Matching Members list (3) shows you any family members that meet the criteria established (2) based on the values of Family Attributes (1).
You use this dialog to choose which member of the part family to add to the assembly, in one of several ways: If you know the name of the family member you wish to use, choose the name from the Matching Members list. Enter the name in the Part Name text eld. Use the other options on to dene criteria based on the values of Family Attributes.
20
Family of Parts
Criteria
This section lets you narrow down the list of available family members by specifying acceptable values of family attributes. If a bolt part family has several members, they are all initially listed in the Matching Members list. You reduce the list by selecting family attributes and a values that meet your requirements. When you select a family attribute, its name is placed in the Criteria text eld and all its possible values are listed in the Valid Values list. In the example below, when the Body_Length Family Attribute is selected (1), its name is inserted in the Criteria text eld (2), and its possible values are listed in the Valid Values list (3).
You can also enter an expression in the Criteria text eld to specify a range of values, or relate it to another expression (including interpart expressions, e.g. length>.75 && length<1.5). In addition, an Interpart Expression may be used in the criteria eld to help establish your criterion, eg. Bolt_dia==plate_1::p3).
20
Family of Parts
You can select a value from the Valid Values list or enter the value in the Criteria text eld. The other values will move to the Invalid Values list, the expression you created moves into the Family Attributes list, and the Matching Members list changes to show only those family members that meet the criteria.
Whatever method of selection you use, your design intent is saved with the component. This can be useful for design iterations that may require the use of a different family member. If you know the name of the part to add, you can enter it in the Part Name text eld. If you wish to add the template part itself, choose the Select Template button.
20
Family of Parts
Obtaining Information on Family Members

Once a family member has been added to an assembly there are different ways to obtain information about it. Family Of Parts Report Choosing AssembliesReportsFamily Report will display a listing of components with applicable part family information. If there are unloaded family templates you will be prompted to open them. The report indicates selection criteria for each component.
20
Family of Parts
Activity - Adding a Standard Part to an Assembly

You will nd family members to match given criteria and add them to an assembly. Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Choose FileOpen. Choose Options and make sure the Load Method is set to From Directory. Open xture_bolt_up. Add a hex bolt family member to the assembly. Choose Add Existing Component. Use Choose Part File to browse to and add hexbolt_template. Select bolt_dia from the Family Attributes section of the Select Family Member dialog.
20
Family of Parts
Choose .5 from the Valid Values section.
Choose WIRE_HOLES[0] from the Family Attributes section.
20
Family of Parts
Choose YES from the Valid Values section.
If the selection is narrowed down to only one part, you can choose OK. If more than one part meets the criteria you can simply select it from the Matching Members section. Select hex_hd_8_Y in the Matching Members list and choose OK. The family member part is now created based on the selection criteria and the template part.
20
Family of Parts
Use the BODY reference set and change the Positioning option to Mate. Apply mating conditions and locate the bolt as shown below.
Choose OK. Step 5: Add another hex bolt family member to the assembly.
If necessary choose Add Existing Component. Select the hexbolt_template as the part to add and choose OK. If you know the family member name, it can be selected from the Matching Members list. When the dialog has remembered previous criteria, the choice(s) you want may not be displayed. When this happens simply choose Clear All Criteria and select appropriate data. or Choose the Family Attribute you wish to change, and correct the selection by selecting it from the Not Valid Values list. The criterion will be moved to the valid values side and Matching Members will be updated. Select hex_hd_5_N and choose OK. Use the BODY reference set and the Mate Positioning option. Using the mating conditions, locate the bolt in one of the remaining holes.
20
Family of Parts
Step 6:
Observe the current assembly structure in the Assembly Navigator. In the assembly Navigator, observe that new components were created for the family members you added.
Notice the symbol for family members appears in the Read Only column. Hold the cursor over one of the two part family symbols to see the information that displays. The new component parts were created when you added them to this assembly. They were not on the disk previously. If you were to save the assembly now, the new component parts would be saved along with the assembly. They will still be shown as read-only family members if you add them to another assembly. Step 7: Close the hexbolt_fam and xture_bolt_up part les without saving.
20
Family of Parts
Summary
Part families allow you to quickly generate a family of similar parts based on a single template part. You utilized Part Families to dene standard parts. In this lesson you: Created Family Member parts from a template part. Added a Part Family member to an assembly.
20
20
Lesson
21
21 Revisions and Substitutions

Purpose After creating an assembly, you may have to revise or substitute an existing component and change the name of the component part. In this lesson you will investigate the different methods to revise components and the assemblies that use them. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Revise a component and an assembly using Save Part As Interrogate the modications made to features of a part Identify the Load Options that search for revised components Substitute components in an existing assembly Apply Alternate mating conditions when substituting components
21-1
Revisions and Substitutions
21
File Versioning/Revisions
There are many different ways to track revisions to a component after it has been released. One of the most common methods is to reect the revision in the part name. In this lesson, we will assume that if a component of an assembly is revised, then the assembly will also be revised. For many applications, however, this is not mandatory. Tracking Revisions By Part Number The most common way of keeping track of the legacy data for a part is to save the part with a new name and then make changes to that new le. This method is very efcient because you can easily identify the version of a loaded part from the name. It usually includes the revision letter or number. For example, a part named 123-a indicates an "A" revision on part 123. Once the new version of the part is released, the old version could be archived. There are several advantages to this method. Advantages Easy to create the change. Use "Save As" on the affected components. No le protection problem because owner performs the "Save As". The old and new parts can reside in the same directory. The legacy information is accessed (if on line) by retrieving the older revision assembly or component part. Easy to track revisions on the shop oor when looking at numbered parts. File versioning rules can be implemented to enable the system to always get the latest version of the le.
Disadvantages If le versioning rules are enabled, two versions of the component part cannot be open at the same time. Associated information could be lost if components are substituted and le versioning is not used.
21-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Revising a Component and Assembly Using Save As

When revisions are incorporated into part names, an easy way to revise a component is to save the component with the new name while it is the work part. This can be accomplished by choosing FileSave As. Many companies, however, require that an assembly also be revised whenever a change is made to the form, t, or function of one of its components. In this case, you would also be required to save each of the assemblies in the tree that reference the component. To accommodate this requirement, when you perform a FileSave As on a component part in a native operating system, a Session Where Used report is immediately displayed, listing any loaded assemblies that reference the component. After specifying a new name for the component, the system will also prompt you to enter a new name for each of the listed assemblies.
21
21-3
21
The system displays the new part names in the Information window and allows you to cancel the operation before actually saving the parts.
Watch the Cue line for a prompt specifying the name of the le currently being renamed. If you choose cancel at any level of the assembly structure, you will get a message after input for the last le has been specied:
21-4
mt10055_g NX 4
The Part Modications Dialog

The Part Modications dialog allows you to access information pertaining to modications to components of an assembly. You can access it by choosing InformationPartModications. The top portion of the dialog lists the displayed assembly and its loaded components. The lower list displays the version and time/date information for the part highlighted in the upper list.
21
1 Lists the displayed assembly and loaded components. 2 Version numbers and date/time stamps for the highlighted part. 3 Lists information for versions that meet criteria relative to the highlighted version number. 4 Specify types of objects to provide information on. 5 Specify object to highlight in graphics display.
Once the part, version selection criteria, and object types are specied, you can choose OK or Apply to display the information.
21-5
21
In the example below, feature object information is displayed for all versions of a part.
The listing includes an object number for each feature, the version in which the feature was last modied, the version in which the feature was created, and the feature name. An object number can be entered or the Previous and Next buttons can be chosen from the dialog to highlight the features in the graphics display.
21-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Assembly Reports

Earlier in this lesson you saw how the InformationPartModications option was useful to track modications to parts in an assembly. There are other reporting tools available to help you understand how a particular assembly has changed over time. List Components Update Report Where Used Session Where Used
21
Update Report This report indicates which components were updated (changed) as the assembly is opened. An update report can automatically be generated every time an assembly is opened by choosing PreferencesAssemblies and toggling the Display Update Report option to on. Where Used This option will search directories and list the assemblies that reference a specied part. This is useful to determine what impact a pending design change may have on other assemblies.
21-7
21
In the Where Used Report dialog, a Search Option can be chosen to specify what directories to search for parts and whether to list only next level assemblies or all assemblies.
A Where Used report may take considerable time to execute. It is recommended that you search through as few directories and parts as possible. Session Where Used This option will list only the loaded assemblies that reference a specied part. This report is automatically generated when you perform a FileSave As on a component part while the assembly is loaded.
21-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Revising Components Using "Save As"

You will revise components and an assembly using FileSave As. ROLLER_ASSM MOUNTING_BRACKET ROLLER ROLLER_PIN
21
ROLLER_ASSM-A MOUNTING_BRACKET-A Step 1: Open roller_assm ROLLER-A ROLLER_PIN
Step 2:
Open the Assembly Navigator and pin open to help you verify the changes to the assembly structure. Edit the mounting bracket geometry. Make mounting_bracket the Work Part.
Step 3:
Choose StartModeling.
21-9
21
Using the Part Navigator and the Details window, change the diameter of Instanced Simple Hole (3) to .20.
.20 dia
The four holes in the array update immediately. Step 4: Revise the mounting bracket and assembly. Choose FileSave As. The system automatically displays a Session Where Used Report to tell you which loaded assemblies are referencing the mounting_bracket. Enter ***_mounting_bracket-a as the new part le name and press Enter.
21
Read the Cue Line! At this point the system will also prompt you to perform a FileSave As for each of the loaded assemblies that reference the mounting bracket, if desired. Since you changed the form, t or function of the part, enter ***_roller_assm-a as the name for the revised assembly and press Enter. The system displays an "Do you want the Save As to continue?" message allowing you to cancel if necessary. The listing window reects the specied action and shows the directory paths and lenames you entered. Select Yes to continue with the Save As. ROLLER_ASSM-A MOUNTING_BRACKET-A ROLLER Next, you will revise the roller due to a change to the anodizing specication. This change will not alter the form, t, or function of the component so you will not revise the assembly. Step 5: Revise the roller. Close the Information window. Change the Work Part to roller. Perform a Save As on the component and give it a new name of ***_roller-a. Choose Cancel to prevent the system from revising the assembly. Choose Yes to proceed with the Save As. The "SaveAs Report" informs you that the assembly that references the revised component (roller_assm-a) was not renamed and will reference the new component (roller-a) if it is saved. Choose OK.
ROLLER_PIN
21
Close the Information window. ROLLER_ASSM-A MOUNTING_BRACKET-A ROLLER-A Step 6: Step 7: Make roller_assm-a the work part and Save it. Look at all prior modications to the features in the mounting bracket. Choose InformationPartModications. Choose ***_mounting_bracket-a from the list of parts in the upper portion of the dialog. Select it even if it is already highlighted. Make sure Loaded Version is highlighted in the list of versions in the lower portion of the dialog. Change the Criteria option to At or Before. (You will be listing all modications at or before the loaded version). Choose the Specify Object Types button. Select Feature from the list of object types and OK. Choose Apply. An Information window appears and lists all features in the mounting bracket and the versions in which they were created and last modied. Step 8: Close all parts. ROLLER_PIN
21-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Load Options and Revisioning

If your revision process entails moving parts to a different directories, you need to have a means of telling the system where to nd them. Using load options, you can specify the directories to search for components as an assembly is loading and the order in which to search them. If the system is unable to locate a component, you may specify whether to continue or abort the loading. 1 Use search directories to nd components when opening an assembly. 2 Will present an error message and not open the assembly if a component is not found. 3 When ON, latest version of component is loaded based on established versioning rules. 4 Expands dialog to dene search directories. 5 Save settings TO a defaults le. 6 Restores settings FROM a defaults le. 7 Specify the name of the defaults le when saving and restoring.
21
To avoid having to enter the same search directories for every session, you can use the Save button to store the load options in a text le. The text le can later be retrieved using the Restore button. The default name for the text le is load_options.def. You can specify a different name for the text le when you save and restore by rst toggling Specify Load Options File to on. When you start an NX session, the system automatically restores the load_options.def le from the current directory. A different defaults le can
21
be specied in your environment by setting UGII_LOAD_OPTIONS to the name of a properly formatted ASCII le. If no load_options.def le exists in the directory from which NX is started, the system will use the default options listed below: SearchPath: /current_dir... LoadOption: Load_From_Dir LoadFailOption: LoadLatest: No Abort
The system uses the load options settings when you are performing the following assemblies functions: Opening an assembly. Substituting a subassembly. Replacing a reference set in a subassembly with one that includes different components. Generating a "Where Used" report.
Load Options do not affect the actual part you are opening (the assembly). They only apply to component parts that need to be loaded when opening an assembly that references them. The Load Latest toggle will be available only if versioning rules are established in Customer DefaultsAssembliesSite StandardsPart Name Versions. This is discussed in the appendices.
21-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Accessing Load Options There are two ways to open the Load Options dialog: FileOptionsLoad Options FileOpenOptions
21
21-15
21
Partial Loading Issues

There are some issues relating to revisions which should be considered when using partial loading. Sharing Components Assume you are working in a concurrent engineering environment and have a loaded assembly that contains a partially loaded component owned by another user. If that user modies and saves that component part to disk, your loaded assembly will become out of date. Now, if you perform an operation in your assembly that requires that the shared part be fully loaded (i.e. making it the work part to interrogate a feature), the part will automatically be re-opened with the new version. If the component had been fully loaded, an error message would be received when an attempt is made to save the part stating that the part has changed on disk since it was rst opened. Legacy Parts When loading an assembly that was last saved in a prior release, the system will automatically convert fully loaded components to the current version and recognize them as being modied. Normally, when you save an assembly, the system will also save the fully loaded components that have been modied. Because the partially loaded components were not updated to the new version, they will not be saved.
21-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Closing Assembly Component Parts

The FileCloseSelected Parts option lets you selectively close (unload) components in an assembly. The upper section of the dialog lets you specify what component parts to close and the lower section lets you specify how they will be closed.
21
1 List all loaded component parts or top level only. 2 Close only parts selected or whole assembly tree. 3 If on, you will not be warned if a selected part has been modied. 4 Close all parts in the session.
If the component part you are closing (unloading) has been modied while it was the work part, you will be asked if you really want to close the part. If you agree to close (unload) the component part, you will lose the modications you made to the part and the changes wont be reected in the piece part le stored on disk.
21-17
21
Reopening Component Parts

In a concurrent engineering environment, one designer may be working on a loaded assembly which references a component part that another designer is simultaneously modifying. The FileCloseReopen Selected Parts option lets you selectively update loaded components with their counterparts on disk. It can be utilized in the following situation. Early in the morning, Designer A starts working on an assembly that references comp3.
Later in the morning, while designer A is still working on the assembly, Designer B revises comp3 and saves it using FileSave.
At lunchtime, Designer A reopens comp3 while the assembly is still open using FileCloseReopen Selected Parts.
21-18
mt10055_g NX 4
The top portion of the Reopen Part dialog lets you specify what component will be reopened. The bottom portion of the dialog lets you specify how the component will be reopened.
21
1 List of loaded components that can be reopened. 2 Species whether reopen should affect part or whole assembly. 3 If on, you will not be warned if selected part has been modied before it is loaded from disk. 4 Reopens all parts in session that have been changed on disk.
After you reopen the parts, an Information window will list the names of the parts, their status before they were reopened, and their status after they were reopened.
21-19
21
Substituting Components
As you are going through design iterations and revising your assembly, it may be necessary to replace an existing component with a different part. In other words, you will want to change the pointer in the assembly so that it references another component part which is located at the same origin and orientation. A component substitution can destroy the relationship between the component and any associated data such as dimensions, mating conditions, and WAVE interpart references. There are some situations in which this can be avoided that will be discussed later. There are three different ways to substitute a component which will be discussed in this lesson. AssembliesComponentsSubstitute Component. Use the Open As toggle in the Reopen Part dialog. Use OpenComponent As option in the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu.
The Unique Identier (UID) When the system nds a component with the correct name, it performs a second check before loading it. There is an internal le identier, referred to as a UID (Unique IDentier), that ensures that the component that has been found is the genuine article, or at least a copy of it. A new UID is not assigned (and thus, associativity is maintained) in the following cases: When you copy or move the le in the operating system. When you save the le into another directory using the same name. When you perform a FileSave As, as with a seed part.
21-20
mt10055_g NX 4
Allow Substitution When you open an assembly and the system nds a component that happens to have the same name but a different UID, the opening will fail unless Allow Substitution has been toggled on in the Load Options dialog.
21
The Allow Substitution option enables a component to be loaded into an assembly even though it has a different UID, or history. It could be a completely different part created by another user. If the new component has no common history (different UID) with the substituted component, data in the assembly will lose its associativity to the original component (mating constraints, WAVE interpart references, etc.).
21-21
21
Substituting Components Using Substitute

Components may be substituted using the Substitute Component option under AssembliesComponents.
If the replacement part has a common history with the original part (same UID), associativity is maintained. The Remove and Add operation is a non-associative operation, regardless of the of the history (UID) of the parts involved. Mating conditions and WAVE interpart references will be lost. If the current part and the replacement part have the same UID, associativity can be preserved if the Maintain Mating option is used. All mating conditions and WAVE interpart references will be maintained assuming the relevant geometry exists in both parts. All drafting objects will revert to their retain annotation state and all Manufacturing data associativity will be lost. If the parts involved have different UIDs, Mating Condition associativity can still be maintained if Alternates are dened for them (Alternates are addressed later in this lesson).
21-22
mt10055_g NX 4
The Substitute option allows you to assign a Component Name, Reference Set, and Layer Options for the new component as it is substituted.
21
21-23
21
Substituting Components Using Reopen

A loaded component can also be replaced with another part by choosing FileCloseReopen Selected Parts and using the Open As option.
The component part to be replaced must be selected from the list. After choosing OK, the system will ask you to select the unloaded replacement part. If the replacement part has a common history with the original part (same UID), associativity is maintained. If the replacement part does not have a common history (different UID), associativity is lost. To Reopen a component with a part that has a different UID, Allow Substitution must be toggled on in the Load Options.
21-24
mt10055_g NX 4
Substituting Components Using the Assembly Navigator

An unloaded component can be replaced using OpenComponent As in the pop-up menu of the Assembly Navigator.
21
As in the case of the reopening a part, if the replacement part has a common history with the part you are replacing (the same UID), associativity is maintained. Otherwise, associativity is lost. Once again, to replace a component with a part that has a different UID, Allow Substitution must be toggled on in the Load Options.
21-25
21
Activity - Substituting Components

Another designer has copied a caster fork component part (using FileSave As), renamed it to caster-fork-mod, and modied it. Now you are required to incorporate this modied fork into your assembly. You will substitute this new fork into your caster assembly using the three different methods described earlier and note the effect on component associativity.
Step 1: Step 2:
Open the part caster_2_assm. Replace the caster fork using the Substitute and Maintain Mating options. Choose AssembliesComponentsSubstitute Component. Select the green caster_2_fork from the screen or the Assembly Navigator. Choose OK. Choose Maintain Mating. Select Choose Part File, select caster-fork-mod from the parts directory and choose OK. The Substitute Component dialog will allow you to specify information about the new component similar to the Add Existing Part dialog. Choose OK to accept the defaults. The fork is replaced and mating conditions are maintained because caster-fork-mod is a version of caster-fork (same UID).
Step 3: Step 4:
21-26
Close All Parts without saving any of them. Open caster_2_assm again.
Step 5:
Replace the caster fork using Reopen. Choose FileCloseReopen Selected Parts. Toggle Open As to on. Choose caster_2_fork from the list of loaded parts and OK.
21
Select caster-fork-mod from the parts directory, then OK. The fork is replaced and mating conditions are maintained because caster-fork-mod is a version of caster-fork (same UID). Step 6: Step 7: Close All Parts without saving any of them. Open the caster assembly again without loading any components. Choose FileOpenOptions. Set the Load Components option to No Components and choose OK. Open caster_2_assm. You will not see anything in the graphics area because No Components was specied in the Load Options. Step 8: Replace the fork using the Assembly Navigator.
21-27
21
In the assembly navigator, select the caster_2_fork node with Mouse Button 3 and choose OpenComponent As.
Select Choose Part File and select the part caster-fork-mod from the parts directory and choose OK. Select the caster_2_assm node in the Assembly Navigator and choose OpenAssembly with Mouse Button 3. Note again that all associativity is maintained! You can choose InformationAssembliesMating Conditions to verify this. Step 9: Close All Parts without saving any of them.
Step 10: Open the caster assembly again and load all components. Choose FileOpenOptions. Set the Load Components option to All Components and choose OK. Open caster_2_assm. Step 11: Replace the caster fork again using the Substitute and Remove and Add options. Choose AssembliesComponentsSubstitute Component.
Select caster_2_fork from the screen or from the Assembly Navigator as the component to be replaced and choose OK. A warning message will appear to remind you that you will lose associative links when you remove and add a component.
21
Choose Remove and Add. Select Choose Part File, select caster-fork-mod from the parts directory, and choose OK. The Substitute Component dialog will allow you to specify information about the new component similar to the Add Existing Part dialog. Choose OK to accept the defaults.
21-29
21
An Update Failure List appears indicating that all mating constraints involving the fork have been deleted.
Choose OK. The substitute component will use the origin and orientation of the original component. Step 12: Close All Parts without saving them.
21-30
mt10055_g NX 4
Alternate Mating Conditions

You may have a situation in which you are required to substitute a part in an assembly that is mated with many other components. If the replacement part is not a version of the part you are replacing (different UID), you will lose all of the mating constraints involving this part and would be forced to recreate them. By dening mating Alternates, you can substitute a part in an assembly while maintaining the mating conditions, regardless of the part history. To accomplish this, you must Dene alternates in the assembly for the component you will be replacing by choosing AssembliesComponentsDene Mating Alternates. This is done by interactively assigning a name to the objects (faces, datums, edges) used in the mating constraints for that component. You can then assign the same names to the corresponding objects in the new replacement part using EditProperties. When you substitute, the new part will inherit the existing mating conditions and maintain the associativity regardless of the part history or the substitution method used (Reopen, Open Component As, or Substitute with the Maintain Mating option). If the objects in the replacement part are not named ahead of time, you can use the Verify option to perform the substitution by interactively selecting objects in the new component that correspond to those used in the mating constraints of the existing component.
21
21-31
21
Dening Alternates
The Dene Names dialog allows you to identify the objects that are used in the mating constraints of the component you will be replacing. The dialog lists the mating conditions of the part you are replacing and the constraints of the selected condition. The system highlights the object used for the selected constraint and prompts you to enter a name for it.
1 List of mating conditions. 2 Constraints of highlighted mating conditions. 3 Enter name of object.
After a name is entered, you will continue to be prompted to enter names for objects in the other constraints until all objects have been identied.
21-32
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Dening and Verifying Alternates

You are required to substitute a shaft (1) used in the freewheel assembly of a bicycle with a re-designed shaft from a different supplier. The new shaft was created from scratch and has a different part history so substituting it directly will result in a loss of nine associative mating constraints (ve sprockets and four spacers are mated to the existing shaft).
21
In order to preserve the mating constraints you will Dene and Verify Alternates. Step 1: Step 2: Open freewheel_assm. Choose StartModeling and verify the Assemblies application is on. Dene Alternates for the existing shaft. Choose AssembliesComponentsDene Mating Alternates. In the Assembly Navigator, select fw-shaft as the component to be replaced and OK. The Dene Names dialog will display the mating conditions and constraints involving the shaft. The prompt asks you to enter a name for the cylindrical face used for the align cylindrical to cylindrical constraint.
Step 3:
21-33
21
Enter cyl in the Name in Component text eld and press Enter.
If the shaft was partially loaded, the system will now fully load it. The next object used in a constraint is the datum plane. The cylindrical align constraint is removed from the lower list box. The remaining align constraint (which happens to be a planar face to a datum plane) is now highlighted.
21-34
mt10055_g NX 4
Key in plane and press Enter.
21
The last object used in a mating constraint involving the shaft is the planar face to which the largest sprocket is mated. This mating constraint now appears in the lower list box.
21-35
21
Key in face and press Enter.
Next, you will get a message reminding you that all of the mating conditions have been labelled.
Choose OK to dismiss the message. Since the new component does not have the corresponding objects named, you will use the Verify option to substitute the component. Step 4: Substitute the new component using Verify Alternates. Choose AssembliesComponentsVerify Mating Alternates.
Select fw-shaft as the component to be replaced and OK. Select Choose Part File, select fw-newshaft from the parts directory as the replacement part, and choose OK. Indicate a position for the new shaft away from the assembly.
21
You are prompted to select the objects in the replacement part that correspond to the named objects in the existing part. Select the cylindrical face (1) shown below on the replacement part to correspond with the object named CYL.
Select the datum plane (2) shown to correspond with the object named PLANE.
21-37
21
Select the planar face (3) shown to correspond with the object named FACE.
When all objects have been veried, you will see the statement Solution - Mating Condition Solved at the bottom of the Verify Names dialog.
21-38
mt10055_g NX 4
Choose OK.
21
Choose Yes to proceed with the substitution. If you choose no, you must save the part if you wish to preserve the new names that you applied. With the name information saved, you can substitute it later. Choose OK to accept the Substitute defaults.
The component is substituted and all mating constraints are maintained. Step 5: Close All Parts without saving them.
21-39
21
Summary
After creating an assembly, you may have to revise or substitute a component and change the name to the component part. In this lesson, you used different methods to revise components and the assemblies that use them. In this lesson you: Revised a component and an assembly using Save Part As. Interrogated the modications made to features of a part. Identied the Load Options that search for revised components. Substituted components in an existing assembly. Applied Alternate mating conditions when substituting components.
21-40
mt10055_g NX 4
Appendix
A Additional Projects
This appendix contains Additional Projects for you to work on.
A-1
Additional Projects
Project 1
A-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Projects
Project 2
A-3
Additional Projects
Project 3
A-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Projects
Project 4
A-5
Additional Projects
Project 5
A-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Projects
Project 6
A-7
Additional Projects
Project 7
A-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Projects
Project 8
A-9
Additional Projects
Project 9
A-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Projects
Project 10
A-11
Additional Projects
Project 11
A-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Projects
Project 12
A-13
Additional Projects
Project 13
A-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Projects
Project 14
A-15
Additional Projects
Project 15
A-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Additional Projects
Project 16
A-17
Appendix
B System Topics
Overview
There are utilities and les which affect the interface and behavior of the system. This appendix covers these topics which would normally be the responsibility of a system administrator.
B-1
System Topics
Customer Defaults
Customer defaults are accessed by choosing FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults. When NX is rst started (out-of-the-box) the defaults are set to User and a variable points to a user le which may or may not exist. This is an extract from the log le for a user named nxuser after logging in and starting NX for the rst time:
Processing customer default values file C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser /Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions /NX4/nx4_user.dpv User customizations file C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser /Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions /NX4/nx4_user.dpv does not exist
The fact that the le does not exist is of no concern because the path is writable for the person logged in. NX will create the le nx4_user.dpv when and if the user makes a change to the defaults. If the administrator wishes to prevent the user from changing the defaults, i.e., set them as User (Read Only), there are various ways to accomplish it: Create the le and customize it as you wish, and then make it read only. Dene the le in a path to which the user cannot write. The le and the path need not exist. Lock one or more defaults at a higher level, i.e. group or site level.
B-2
mt10055_g NX 4
System Topics
Customer Defaults Levels

There are three levels of defaults that your system administrator can set. These are site, group, and user. Any of all of these levels may be read-write, although it is customary to set the site and group levels to read only.
At the Site and Group levels the dialog displays padlocks beside each default, enabling the administrator to lock out a particular default for lower levels. When a lock is active not only is the text de-emphasized but value change is prohibited. Even if the site (or a lower) DPV le is writable the value of a locked default can not be changed until the lock icon has been toggled off for the given default).
B-3
System Topics
For example, to lock out the ability to create promotions, the administrator clicks the lock beside promotions at the site or group level. The icon changes color and the text is de-emphasized.
At the user level, that default is de-emphasized an a padlock is displayed beside it.
B-4
mt10055_g NX 4
System Topics
The system administrator can use the Default Lock Status to set the global locked status for all of the customer defaults on all defaults pages. This allows strategies like All are locked except..." or All are unlocked except... instead of requiring the assertion of 5000+ individual locks.
Locks at the group level change color and the text is de-emphasized. The user then sees all options for Site Standards de-emphasized and padlocked. No Site Standards may now may be changed at the user level.
B-5
System Topics
Setting Customer Defaults

Customer defaults have as-shipped default settings that are hard-coded. When you change defaults at any level (assuming you have write permission and the levels are dened) a le is created to save the settings. By default the le is called nx4_user.dpv, nx4_group.dpv, or nx4_site.dpv. Only the defaults that are changed from the hardcoded settings are saved, thus the DPV les can be very small in size.
Customer defaults les are dened by environment settings. These are typically set in ugii_env.dat on Windows systems or .ugii_env on UNIX; however, the administrator may prevent a user from spoong these settings by creating a le named ugii_env.master in the UGII directory where NX is installed to dene these particular environment settings. When this le exists any attempt to redene the environment variables will be ignored. When you change defaults the changes are NOT effective immediately. They will be in effect the next time NX is started.
B-6
mt10055_g NX 4
System Topics
There are two possible settings for the user level and one each for the group and site levels: Variable Defaults File Heading UGII_LOCAL_USER_DEFAULTS MISCELLANEOUS Description This variable is a fully qualied le specication: it can be any le name in any location. The recommended le extension is .dpv The le need not exist. The le will be created when the initial customizations are saved. The directory path must exist and be writeable to create the le. UGII_USER_DIR UGALLIANCE Variables This directory pointed to must have the startup directory dened in structure outlined below. The le nx4_user.dpv will be created when the initial customizations are saved (if it does not already exist) in the startup folder. Dene this ONLY if UGII_LOCAL _USER_DEFAULTS is NOT dened. UGII_GROUP_DIR Not dened The le nx4_group.dpv will be created when the initial customizations are saved (if it does not already exist) in the startup folder under the directory pointed to. The le nx4_site.dpv will be created when the initial customizations are saved (if it does not already exist) in the startup folder under the directory pointed to.
UGII_SITE_DIR UGALLIANCE Variables
B-7
System Topics
USER, GROUP, and SITE directories

There is a standard structure for customer site installation of menu les and shared libraries. This directory structure denes three subdirectories. For the purpose of this discussion only the startup folder need exist; however, you might encounter the others if you have site customization. startup Contains site-specic menu les, defaults les, and shared libraries of menu actions to be loaded automatically at NX startup to customize Gateway. Contains site-specic les dening menus and shared libraries of menu actions for customizing NX or third-party applications, such as NX Open programs. Loading of each shared library is deferred until you enter the application that names the library on the LIBRARIES statement in the menu le denition for the Application Button for the application. User Tool Denition les, GRIP programs, User Function programs that are referenced by menu le actions. Contains the shared libraries dening methods for site-specic User Dened Objects (another NX Open topic.)
application
udo
B-8
mt10055_g NX 4
System Topics
Managing Your Changes

The DPV les contain only the defaults that are changed from the hardcoded settings. You may review your changes at any time: Set the Defaults Level to the level you want to examine, Site, Group, or User. Choose Manage Current Settings on the Customer Defaults dialog.
Here is an example of standard classroom defaults at the group level:
Here is an example of defaults additionally set for Design Applications using NX.
B-9
System Topics
Updating to a New Release of NX

To update to a new release, you need only dene the DPV les you want to use at whatever levels your organization uses. When you receive the new software use Import Defaults to validate your previous settings against the new release.
Importing Customer Defaults values file: file.> Total settings and locks imported: 10
<full path specification of DPV
Total settings rejected due to values not valid in this release:
0 0
Total settings rejected due to values being locked at the higher level: Total settings already set to the same value and lock status: Total settings not recognized in this release: 0 0
B-10
mt10055_g NX 4
System Topics
Interpart Modeling
Interpart Expressions and the Wave Geometry Linker can be disabled by the changing setting Allow Interpart Modeling on the Assemblies, General, Interpart Modeling page. Promotion of Bodies feature can be enabled by changing the setting Allow Feature Promotion on the Assemblies, General, Interpart Modeling page.
Settings for Delay Interpart Update are also on this page.
B-11
System Topics
File Versioning
We recommend using NX Manager (TcEng) for data management. If TcEng is not available, the Assemblies Site Standards defaults offer an alternative approach. Versioning rules will enable the system to load the latest version of components in any assembly based on a le naming scheme established at your company. When the rules are dened in the customer defaults le, the "Load Latest" option must also be turned on in the load options. File versioning is controlled from the Assemblies, Site Standards, Part Name Versions page of the customer defaults dialog.
To dene the versioning rules, you must dene the portion of the lename that is the core (never changes) and which portion is the revision.
B-12
mt10055_g NX 4
System Topics
Regular Expressions Version rules are dened using a modied form of "Regular Expressions". It is beyond the scope of this class to teach regular expression formatting. There are several "Special Characters" that may be used in the format of your version rules. They are listed below. ? * + . | () [] = = = = = = = = 0 or 1 0 or more 1 or more Any character Or (as in this OR that) Dene a section Dene a set Range
The use of Sets is crucial to your ability to establish correct version rules. A few examples are shown below. [a-z0-9] [a-z0-9]+ [a-z]+[0-9]+ [a-hj-np-z] [mejx] = = = = = One lower case letter or number One or more lower case letters or numbers in any order One or more lower case letters followed by one or more numbers Any lower case letter except i and o Any one of these letters
B-13
System Topics
File Versioning Example

In the following example, the part names consist of a core section of lower case letters followed by an underscore and a revision section dened by a revision number. Below are three versions of the same part. abc_1.prt abc_2.prt
abc_3.prt To dene the rules that describe the above naming convention, the customer defaults must be modied from the Assemblies, Site Standards, Part Name Versions page of the dialog. Here is an example of how it would need to be set up for a specic versioning scheme. Full Part File Name Format: You must specify the format of the part name in terms of regular expression pattern matching. Each set of Parentheses represents a section. Full Part File Name Format: ([a-z]+_)([0-9]) The rst section is ([a-z]+_). The [a-z] is any lower case letter and the "+" means that one or more letters are allowed. The "_" means that the letters will always be followed by an underscore character. The next section ([0-9]) is any number and that there can be only one digit. (If you wanted to allow more digits, you would follow it with a "+".) Version Independent Section of the Part File Name: This determines what portion of the le is the core portion of the le name (does not change). Based on the pairs of parentheses, you enter a backslash and the section number. Version Independent Section of the Part File Name: /1 The rst section is the core portion of the lename, it will never change. Part File Name Match: Specify which section of the le name must match and which section may vary. This is a bit repetitive, but necessary. Part File Name Match: /1([0-9]) The portion of the lename that must match is in the rst section. The portion that is allowed to vary may be any number.
B-14 Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved mt10055_g NX 4
System Topics
Version Section of Part File Name Match: Which portion of the version section is actually the version. This is also determined by sets of parenthesis in the revision section. Version Section of Part File Name Match: /1 In the version section, the rst set of parenthesis indicates version. Version Type: The versioning scheme being used. Available choices are; Military, Numeric, Reverse Numeric, Alphabetic, Reverse Alphabetic, Alphanumeric. Version Type: Numeric A number sequence starting with 1 and progressing to larger numbers. In an Alphanumeric sort, versioning will sort letters before numbers. This is a different than most normal sort algorithms. Quantiers Quantiers can be specied to allow only a certain number of characters. Instead of using [0-9][0-9][0-9] to represent three digits, it can be written with a quantier as [0-9]{3} The list of quantiers is shown below. {n,m}At least n and no more than m {n,} At least n {,m} May have 0, but no more than m {m} Exactly m
B-15
Appendix
C Expression Operators
Overview
The following information lists the various operators that may be used in expressions.
C-1
Expression Operators
Operators
There are several types of operators that you may use in the expression language. Arithmetic Operators + * / % ^ Addition Subtraction and Negative Sign Multiplication Division Modulus Exponential Assignment Example p2=p5+p3 p2=p5p3 p2=p5*p3 p2=p5/p3 p2=p5%p3 p2=p5^2 p2=p5
Relational and Boolean Operators > < >= <= == != ! & or && | or || Greater Than Less Than Greater Than or Equal Less Than or Equal Equal Not Equal Negate Logical AND Logical OR
C-2
mt10055_g NX 4
Precedence and Associativity

In the table below, operators in the same row have equal precedence while operators in the following rows have less precedence. Precedence and Associativity Operators ^ (change sign) * > == && || = Right to Left / < != % >= <= Left to Right + Right to Left Associativity
When using operators with the same precedence in an equation without parameters, use left-to-right or the right-to-left rule from the table. For example: X = 90 10 + 30 = 110 (not 50) X = 90 (10 + 30) = 50
C-3
Legacy Unit Conversion

Although when dimensionality is specied and units are assigned the system handles conversions, legacy parts may have used functions for unit conversion. For legacy compatibility these functions are supported. Functions for Unit Conversion cm ft grd in km mc min ml mm mtr sec yd cm(x) converts x from centimeters to the default units of the part ft(x) converts x from feet to the default units of the part grd(x) converts x from gradients to degrees in(x) converts x from inches to the default units of the part km(x) converts x from kilometers to the default units of the part mc(x) converts x from microns to the default units of the part min(x) converts x from minutes to degrees. ml(x) converts x from mils to the default units of the part mm(x) converts x from millimeters to the default units of the part mtr(x) converts x from meters to the default units of the part sec(x) converts x from seconds to degrees yd(x) converts x from yards to the default units of the part
C-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Built-in Functions
Built-in functions include math, string, and engineering functions. Scientic Notation You may optionally enter numbers in scientic notation. The value you enter must contain a positive or negative sign. For example, you can enter: 2e+5 which is the same as the value 200000 2e-5 which is the same as the value .00002 Built-in Functions abs arccos arcsin arctan arctan2 ASCII ceiling Char charReplace Returns the absolute value of a given number Returns the inverse cosine of a given number in degrees Returns the inverse sine of a given number in degrees Returns the inverse tangent of a given number in degrees from 90 to +90 Returns the inverse tangent of a given delta x divided by a given delta y in degrees from 180 to +180 Returns the ASCII code of the rst character in a given string or zero if the string is empty Returns the smallest integer that is bigger than a given number Returns the ASCII character for a given integer in the range 1 to 255 Returns a new string from a given source string, character to replace and the corresponding replacement characters. Returns the cosine of a given number in degrees
compareString Case sensitive compare of two strings cos dateTimeString Returns the system date and time in the format Fri Nov 21 09:56:12 2005\n oor format getenv hypcos hypsin hyptan Returns the largest integer less than or equal to a given number Returns a formatted string, using C-style formatting specication Returns the string value of a given environment variable string Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a given number Returns the hyperbolic sine of a given number Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a given number
C-5
Built-in Functions log log10 MakeNumber max min mod Returns the natural logarithm of a given number Returns the logarithm base 10 of a given number Returns the number or integer of a given numerical string Returns the largest number from a given number and additional numbers Returns the smallest number from a given number and additional numbers Returns the remainder (modulus) when a given numerator is divided by a given denominator (by integer division)
NormalizeAngle Normalizes a given angle (degrees) to be between 0 and 360 degrees pi() Radians replaceString round sin sqrt StringLower StringUpper StringValue subString tan ug_ functions Returns pi Converts an angle in degrees into radians Replaces all occurrences of str1 with str2 Returns the integer nearest to a given number, returns the even integer if the given number ends in .5 Returns the sine of a given number in degrees Returns the inverse square root of a given positive number Returns a lowercase string from a given string Returns an uppercase string from a given string Returns a string containing a textual representation of a given value Returns a new string containing a subset of the elements from the original list Returns the sine of a given number see the documentation for descriptions of dozens more specialized math and engineering functions
C-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Appendix
D Variable Positioning
Purpose This appendix provides information and practice with variable mating constraints. Objectives On completion of this lesson you will be able to: Use Variable Positioning in assemblies
D-1
Variable Positioning
Repositioning and Variable Positioning

A components position is normally dened in its rst level assembly. In some cases the position of a subassembly component may need to be modied in a higher level assembly. If a subassembly component is selected from the Reposition dialog, the Options tab on the Reposition Component dialog will display a list of assemblies where the position of that component may be varied. The name of the selected component (the one you will be moving) appears below the list, screw in the illustration below:
Below ve small dashes in the list you see the immediate parent of the component selected for repositioning: A red dot in this position indicates that the assembly has existing mating constraints. An open circle indicates no mating conditions were present in the immediate parent.
When the immediate parent is selected you see the words Normal Repositioning below the name of the component. This indicates that if you leave this page as it appears and drag a handle or transform the component
D-2 Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved mt10055_g NX 4
using functions on the Transformation page, ordinary repositioning will take place. In the list above the ve small dashes the presence of an open circle beside a selected subassembly in the list of all higher level parents (illustrated below) indicates that if you apply positioning you will be creating variable positioning in that particular parent assembly.
When an assembly above the ve small dashes is rst selected, the words Variable Positioning appear below the name of the selected component and becomes active. If you choose this the Add Variable Positioning icon icon a red ball will be displayed indicating that a Variable Position denition has been created although no positioning has yet occurred.
D-3
The presence of a red dot in a circle above the ve small dashes indicates that the component is already in a variable positioning condition at that level of assembly; it was already moved in some way. This could have been done by dragging, by transformation, or an empty override might have been created.
When an assembly with a red dot is selected icons used to add a Mate Override or Remove Variable Positioning become active.
will list positioning information about the The information icon selected part in the selected assembly, including (if applicable) the current transformations and rotations of the part. Same Position in All indicates that the position you set will apply to all arrangements. If you want the repositioning to be arrangement specic you should toggle this option to off.
D-4
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity Dening Variable Positioning

The small assembly illustrated below will have every component at least partially mated. You will use Variable Positioning to create the three arrangements shown.
D-5
Step 1:
Open rocker_assm. At this point only the bolts are mated in place and only one of two required instances of a subassembly is in place. The piece parts of the subassembly piston_assm are not yet mated. You will mate the subassembly and position the rst instance.
Step 2:
Partially mate the subassembly. If necessary pin the Assembly Navigator in the open position.
Make piston_assm the displayed part. It is easier to understand which constraints belong exclusively to the subassembly if nothing else is visible as you create them. Fit the view.
D-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Create a mating condition between the lid and the cylinder with the following two constraints. Mate these two faces:
Center these two faces 1 to 1:
D-7
Create a mating condition between the bar and the cylinder with a single center 1 to 1 constraint:
If necessary use Alternate Solution and Vary Constraints to achieve the assembled position shown below.
Step 3:
Mate the lever. Make rocker_assm the displayed and work part. Observe that the components of the piston subassembly now appear in the position in which the subassembly was mated.
D-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Highlight piston_assm in the Assembly Navigator. Examine the preview window.
The shows the saved position of the components. You can see that the saved position and the current position may differ. If the assembly were saved now, the new mated position would be the saved position of the components. You will use Variable Positioning methods to allow components to occupy several positions other than their saved position.
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Design Applications Using NX D-9
Create a mating condition between the lever and the plate_2 component by rst using a 2 to 2 center constraint between the two parallel pairs of at faces shown below. Secondly, create a 1 to 1 center constraint between the hole face at the bottom of the lever and the shaft face of the bolt in the lug on the plate.
Choose OK until you exit from the mating dialog.
D-10
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 4:
Create a mating condition between the piston assembly and the plate_2 component with these two constraints. Create a 2 to 2 center constraint between the two parallel pairs of at faces shown below. Create a 1 to 1 center constraint between the hole face on the cylinder and the shaft face of the bolt.
D-11
The result should look like this:
D-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Attempt to create a 1 to 1 center constraint between the hole face in the arm and the nearer side bolt shaft in the lever.
D
Notice that the List Errors button becomes active as soon as you do this. This mating attempt is destined to fail because you are asking the system to change the position of the bar in its parent subassembly (the piston) while the higher level assembly is the work part. This cannot be achieved with ordinary mating constraints; however, it can easily be done through the use of Variable Positioning. Cancel from the mating dialog.
D-13
Choose EditUndo ListMating Conditions (or Ctrl-Z) to rewind the part history to the point when you opened the mating dialog for the second time.
The piston subassembly will snap back to its original position. You need to allow the parts of the subassembly to move in the top level assembly independently from their saved position in piston_assm. To meet this intent you must specify that the components will be individually positioned. You may then use Variable Positioning, a method where piece parts of an intermediate subassembly are given different positions in a higher level assembly.
D-14
mt10055_g NX 4
Step 5:
Prepare for individual component positioning. Using the Assembly Navigator select the three components of piston_assm.
Choose MB3Properties.
D-15
On the Parameters page of the Component Properties dialog toggle the Individually Positioned radio button in the Arrangements area to enabled (on).
D
Step 6:
Choose OK. Position the rst instance of the subassembly. In order to vary positions you will use the repositioning dialog.
Choose Reposition Component.
Select only the cylinder component and OK. Choose the Options tab.
D-16
mt10055_g NX 4
On the Options page notice the initial indication.
The red dot in the circle beside piston_assm indicates that there is existing mating in the immediate parent. Note also that when the immediate parent is selected the text under the window reads Normal Repositioning. If you were to drag or otherwise reposition the cylinder component while the immediate parent is selected (assuming there were enough mating freedom to move it) then you would be simply repositioning it in its parent assembly. The rule for variable positioning is that you must have an intermediate assembly between the component being positioned and the assembly where the position is to be varied.
D-17
The cylinder components position in the intermediate piston_assm will be varied in the rocker_assm assembly. Select rocker_assm in the list.
An open circle appears beside the rocker_assm indicates that when you move the cylinder it will create a variable position at that level of the assembly. Notice also that the Add Variable Positioning icon is now active. You can use this icon to create variable positions. Choose the Add Variable Positioning icon.
D-18
mt10055_g NX 4
Notice that the red dot appears beside the rocker_assm indicating that a variable position now exists, and the Mate Override and Remove Variable Positioning icons are now active.
Notice also that the text under the window now reads Variable Positioning. Choose Mate Override.
D-19
The current mating constraint has an arrow indicating that it is an Override. The term Override indicates that the mating constraints were created through the Variable Positioning process. The cylinder is mated to an unknown component because you have not yet selected one. Notice also that the other two components of the piston assembly, the lid and the bar, now have open arrows indicating implicit overrides. The system will adjust their positions within the freedom of their mating constraints to satisfy the override constraint on the cylinder.
D-20
mt10055_g NX 4
First, create and apply a 2 to 2 center constraint between the two parallel pairs of at faces shown below, just as you did earlier when the entire subassembly was selected.
D
Second, create and Apply a 1 to 1 center constraint between the hole face on the cylinder and the shaft face of the bolt. Notice that the current condition is between the cylinder and the plate and not between the piston assembly and the plate. After the second constraint is applied, choose Cancel to exit from the Mating Conditions dialog. You need to end work on the cylinder to select another component for repositioning. Once again choose Reposition Component. Select the bar component attached to the cylinder you just mated. Choose OK. Choose the Options tab if necessary. Select rocker_assm at the top of the list.
Choose Add Variable Positioning
Create and Apply a mate override. Use a 1 to 1 center constraint between the cylindrical hole face in the bar and the shaft of the adjacent bolt on the lever.
Notice that this condition is between the bar and the cylinder. You created the bar to cylinder mating condition in the subassembly. The condition now enhanced by an additional constraint at the higher level. Cancel from the Mating Conditions dialog.
D-22
mt10055_g NX 4
The assembly should now look like this:
Step 7:
Add a second instance of the subassembly. Make sure rocker_assm is the work part! Add piston_assm as an existing component to rocker_assm. It will appear on the list of open parts because one instance is already open. Choose the Entire Part reference set, Absolute positioning, and Original layers. Position the subassembly conveniently near the lug on the right end of the plate. Cancel all dialogs. If you were to attempt to reposition during add you would be repositioning the entire subassembly. You do not want that; instead, you want to reposition the cylinder and the bar.
Step 8:
Reposition the cylinder and the bar of the new piston subassembly on the right side of the plate. Use the same series of steps as you used to reposition the cylinder and the bar on the left side of the plate to create mate overrides.
D-23
You already edited the piston subassembly to permit components to be placed individually. The result will look like this:
D
Step 9: Rename the default arrangement. Over the rocker_assm node in the Assembly Navigator choose ArrangementsEdit. Rename the default arrangement to Middle. Later you will create a mating constraint to position the lever vertically as it now appears. Step 10: Create an arrangement for variable positioning of the moving parts. Currently the mating conditions leave freedom for the lever to pivot about the pin that attaches it to the lug on the plate. You will create an arrangement called Variable that will not receive any further constraints. In the next step you will use the Variable arrangement to calculate the approximate limit of motion that can be achieved by the assembly. This Variable arrangement can be used later to demonstrate the motion of the assembly. Copy the Middle (Default) arrangement.
D-24 Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved mt10055_g NX 4
Name the new arrangement Variable. Copy the Middle arrangement two more times. Name the two newest arrangements Left and Right. Use the Variable arrangement. Step 11: Adjust the moving parts using collision detection to determine a valid range of motion. Collision detection uses a tolerance zone to determine when to stop motion. If you need exact positioning you must make use of other methods. If necessary, make rocker_assm the work part.
Choose Reposition Component. Select the lever component, and OK. On the Transform page choose Rotate About a Point.
D-25
Indicate any arc center of the bolt at the base of the lever.
The handle snaps to the arc center. The XY rotation handle is selected by default. You want to rotate in the ZX plane. Select the ZX rotation handle to switch to ZX plane rotation.
D-26
mt10055_g NX 4
Set the Motion Animation slider to somewhat less than fully Coarse, as shown below:
Set the Collision Action to Stop Before Collision as shown above. You can explicitly acknowledge a collision, or simply drag again to see what the next collision would be. Verify that the Collision Checking Mode is Facet/Solid. There is a trade-off between speed and accuracy. The more Fine the animation the more accurate the collision detection is likely to be; however, it will also take longer to move a complex part. The same is true of the Collision Checking Mode. Quick Facet generates a facetted representation and uses only that for the collision detection, while the Facet/Solid method uses a combination of the facet and solid bodies to obtain more accurate results.
D-27
Using the ZX rotation handle, drag the lever with one steady clockwise motion (to the right) until motion stops. At this point the lever, the bar on the left, and the lid should be highlighted, as shown below.
The adjacent components are mated, thus they moved with the lever until the bar collided with the lid! Cancel the Reposition Component dialog. In addition to a Middle mating constraint with the lever at 90 to the plate you want to create mating conditions that mimic this position of near collision on both sides of center. You will create one such condition for the left position of the lever and another for the right. To coexist in the same part, each of the three mating constraints must be arrangement specic and belong to a separate arrangement. Additionally, you will leave the currently used arrangement Variable without a mating constraint so that it may still be moved. Step 12: Measure the angle between the lever and the plate. Use AnalysisAngle.
D-28
mt10055_g NX 4
Set the selection lter to faces and choose the face of the lever and the upper face of the plate as illustrated below.
D
Notice that the resulting measurement is between the surface normal vectors of the faces you selected. Write down the angle for later reference. (It should be 105.) Cancel the analysis interaction. Step 13: Add a mating constraint to position the Middle Arrangement. Use the Middle arrangement. The lever snaps to its original vertical position. Choose Mate Component.
Choose the Angle constraint. Select the same face on the lever that you used to measure the angle as the rst face. Select the upper face of the plate as the second face.
Enter 90 as the value of the Angle Expression.
Preview the result. In the Mating Conditions list locate the current constraint and use the MB3 menu to make it Arrangement Specic.
A yellow square appears behind the check box for the Planar Angle constraint, indicating that this constraint is specic to the current arrangement.
D-30
mt10055_g NX 4
Choose OK until the Mating Conditions dialog closes. Step 14: Add a mating constraint the position the Right Arrangement. Use the Right arrangement.
Choose Mate Component. Locate and expand the LEVERPLATE_2 mating condition in the list. Since the Planar Angle constraint is arrangement specic it will be suppressed in this arrangement. Over the Planar Angle PlanarPlanar constraint choose MB3Edit in Arrangements.
D-31
The Edit Constraint in Arrangements dialog opens. In this dialog you see the effect of your earlier action to make the angle arrangement specic. The 90 value you originally entered has its owning expression assigned to the Middle arrangement. Another expression with a value of 0.0 is assigned to the Shared State.
When you rst edit a constraint in arrangements the current value is assigned to Shared State, and all arrangements are listed. If an expression is already arrangement specic, or if you choose to use an arrangement specic state for it, then the name of that arrangement is no longer indented under Shared State but listed below. The check marks indicate whether an expression created for a state is actually active. Thus the illustration indicates that the shared state angular value of 0.0 for the lever is (fortunately) not active. Select the Right arrangement in the list. Choose Use Specic State.
D-32
mt10055_g NX 4
A new expression is created for the Right arrangement.
Notice the check box for the right expression is not checked. The expression is currently suppressed. This is good, because the default value is zero. Choose OK in the Edit Constraint in Arrangements dialog. You are returned to the Mating conditions dialog. The Angle Expression eld is now insensitive and the parameter entry options icon eld indicates that a formula was used for the value.
D-33
Choose the formula icon and from the list that opens choose Formula, as shown:
In the Expressions dialog change the formula from the name of the Shared State expression to the angle value you measured, 105. You might need to use 105.
Choose OK in the Expressions dialog. Unsuppress the Planar Angle - PlanarPlanar expression by toggle the check box to active. (Box is checked)
D-34
mt10055_g NX 4
Choose OK in the mating conditions dialog until the dialog closes. When the part updates the conguration should now have the lever moved to the right limit of motion.
D
Step 15: Add a mating constraint the position the Left Arrangement. Use the Left arrangement. The lever snaps back to the middle position where it was when this arrangement was created by the copy command. Choose Mate component.
D-35
Expand the LEVERPLATE_2 mating condition in the list. In this case all you need to do is to specify that the constraint is arrangement specic and update it.
You want the left angle to reect motion in the opposite direction from the right. Mathematically, you want the supplement of the angle you used for the right. This value is 180105 or 75. Make sure that the suppression option for the Planar Angle constraint is toggled to not suppressed. When the setting is correct a check mark appears inside the box to the left of the constraint in the list. In the next step, you might need to use 75 instead of 75. Once again edit the Angle Expression formula; this time make the new expression formula equal to 75.
D-36
mt10055_g NX 4
Choose OK in all dialogs until the assembly updates and the dialogs close.
Step 16: Test the assembly. Switch arrangements several times to view all of them. In the Variable arrangement reposition the lever by Rotate About a Point to be sure the lever is still free to move. Step 17: Close all parts.
D-37
Summary
Arrangements provide powerful tools to design and illustrate mechanisms that move by repositioning components either with basic positioning or within mating degrees of freedom. In this lesson you: Used collision detection to determine the range of motion of your rocker assembly. Used arrangements and mating overrides to create and display several possible positions of the rocker assembly.
D-38
mt10055_g NX 4
Appendix
E Dening a Family of Parts

Purpose Part Families provide a method to quickly dene a family of similar parts based on a single template part. In this lesson you will create a part family to generate a family of standard parts. Objectives Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: Demonstrate an understanding of the capabilities and concepts of Part Families Dene a Part Family for a standard part
E-1
Dening a Family of Parts
Part Families Dialog

The Part Families dialog is accessed in the Modeling application by choosing ToolsPart Families from the main menu bar. You can use the areas in the upper portion of the Part Families dialog (1,2) to specify the columns that will appear in the Part Family spreadsheet (3).
Importable Part Family Template If the option is toggled on, then the NX Manager attributes DB_PART_NO and OS_PART_NAME will be added as the Chosen columns of the spreadsheet to
E-2 Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved mt10055_g NX 4
identify part family members instead of Part_Name. This behavior is useful if the part family templates migrate between native NX and NX Manager. Exportable Part Family Template In NX Manager the word Importable is replaced by Exportable. Otherwise the option works the same as above. Available Columns The Available Columns list shows you the items available in the current part to be dened as columns in the family table spreadsheet. Only the items of the class shown on the option button are displayed. Attribute Classes You can select from six different attribute classes when dening the columns in the part family spreadsheet. You can later change the values of these attributes in the spreadsheet to dene parts with different congurations. The available classes are: Attributes - You can use part attributes and their values for a family. Components - (For assembly template parts) You can replace a specied component with a different component, or you can remove it altogether by leaving the spreadsheet entry blank. Expressions - You can supply values for expressions when the family member is created. Only constant expressions can be used. Mirror - If you have a mirror body in your part, a part family member can use the base body, by entering a value of No in the spreadsheet, or the mirrored body, by entering a value of Yes. Density - This option presents a list of all the named solid bodies in the part, allowing you to assign a density to each one. When the family member is created, you can specify a density and it will be applied to all bodies with that name. Use EditProperties to assign a name to the body. Features - Features may be suppressed, by entering a value of No in the spreadsheet, or not suppressed, by entering a value of Yes.
Add Column To add a column to the Chosen Columns list, select its name in the Available Columns list, then choose Add Column.
UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Design Applications Using NX E-3
Chosen Columns The Chosen Columns list shows you the items that have been selected for the part family. Each item in this list represents one column in the spreadsheet. Remove Column To remove a column from the Chosen Columns list, select its name from the list and choose Remove Column. Create This option invokes the spreadsheet for a new family of parts after you specify the columns. Edit This option invokes an existing spreadsheet for editing. Delete This option deletes the spreadsheet, which deletes the entire family of parts. If the deleted part family has any member parts that have been created, they will revert to being ordinary NX part les.
Resume After control has been transferred to NX to verify or create a part, you must choose Resume to return control to the spreadsheet. Cancel This option cancels any edits made to the spreadsheet after the last save, and returns control to NX. Therefore, if you edit the spreadsheet, then use Verify to check the edits, you can choose Cancel to leave the family table as it was before the edits. When migrating to a new version of NX, you must rst update and save all part families and members before adding the members to an assembly.
E-4
mt10055_g NX 4
The Part Family Spreadsheet

Choosing the Create button invokes the spreadsheet. While the spreadsheet is active, NX is inactive. Unix platforms will need to use the Xess spreadsheet, which is the default setting. Windows platforms will need to change to the Excel spreadsheet under PreferencesSpreadsheet. The rst column in the spreadsheet will have a header for Part_Name. The rows below it are for entering the part name of all the family members. The other columns have headers corresponding to the properties you chose. The second row is lled in with the values that exist in the template part for the properties chosen. The rest of the family can be dened by simply typing in the appropriate values in the spreadsheet.
When you are in the spreadsheet, there are several options available in the Part Family pull-down menu.
Verify Part The family member whose row is selected is "theoretically" created and you are given a message to let you know whether it is possible to create a part with the current conguration of attribute values. During this process, control is transferred back to NX. To continue, choose Resume on the Part Families dialog to return to the spreadsheet.
Update Parts This option works in two ways: If no rows are selected in the spreadsheet The system searches for each member of the family, using the current search rules. For each member it nds, it checks to see if that member is out of date with respect to the current denition, which includes both geometry changes to the template part and changes to the denition in the family table. If the member is out of date, the system will update (recreate and save) the member part. The updated member part will be saved over the existing part if possible. If the member part was write protected, the new member part is saved to the directory specied under FileOptionsSave Options. An update report is also generated. If any rows are selected in the spreadsheet The system searches for the selected members of the family, as above. However, it will not check to see if the member is out of date. It will simply create and save the new version and, following the same rules as above, either save it to the current location or to the directory specied on the Save Options dialog. This option is offered primarily to cope with changes that may not be detected. An example would be attaching a name to a face. In this case, the model is not modied and the system does not detect that the member part is out of date. When you choose Update Parts, the family spreadsheet is saved in the template part. The template part itself, however, is not saved. We recommend that when you edit a template part or the spreadsheet, you update the associated family members as well, since you are not notied that an update is needed when a family member part le is subsequently loaded.
E-6
mt10055_g NX 4
Create Parts The family member whose row is selected is actually created and saved as a part le. During the creation of the part, control is transferred back to NX and the Information window lets you know whether the part was successfully created and saved. To continue, choose Resume on the Part Families dialog to return to the spreadsheet. The directory where the parts are saved may be dened on the Part Family dialog in the Family Save Directory entry window; otherwise, they are saved in the directory specied under FileOptionsSave Options. Save Family This option saves the spreadsheet data and returns you to NX. Save Family and Create Parts will save the family (spreadsheet) but the template part le is not saved. Cancel Returns you to NX without saving any changes made to the spreadsheet. Creating Family Members Once you have dened the family members, you can create the actual part les in one of two ways. Use the Create Parts in the family table (spreadsheet), or Choose a template part when adding a component to an assembly (AssembliesComponentsAdd Existing). The family member part le is created, saved, and added to the assembly.
E-7
Activity - Creating a Family of Standard Parts (Excel)

Unix users: Please go to the next activity . The most common use of Part Families is to dene a standard library part that has many variations. In this activity, you will create a part family for a hex bolt which has variations in head size and length. You will also use the feature attribute to suppress and unsuppress holes for safety wire. The template part has already been created for you. Step 1: Step 2: Open hexbolt_fam. Choose StartModeling and verify that the Assemblies application is enabled. Dene the columns for the Family Table. Choose ToolsPart Families from the main menu bar. Make sure the Importable Part Family Template option is toggled off. Choose OK on the Warning dialog.
Step 3:
Select the bolt_dia expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog. Choose the Add Column button.
E-8
mt10055_g NX 4
Select the head_dia expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog. Choose the Add Column button. Instead of choosing, Add Column, you could just double-click on the expression name in the Available Columns list, i.e. head_dia. Double-click on the head_height expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog. Double-click on the length expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog. Change the option menu at the top of the dialog from Expressions to Features. Double-click on WIRE_HOLES[0](23)/SIMPLE_HOLE(23) from the top list of the Part Families dialog. The order in which you select the attributes determines the order of columns in the spreadsheet. Step 4: Create the family table. Choose the Create button from the bottom portion of the Part Families dialog. To expedite lling in the spreadsheet, you will import a text le that has been created for you. In the spreadsheet application choose FileOpen. Set the Files of type: to Text Files (*.prn *.txt; *.csv).
E-9
Change the Look in: eld to point to the parts directory.
E
Double-click on the hexbolt_fam text le. In the Text Import wizard, choose Finish.
E-10
mt10055_g NX 4
In the hexbolt_fam.txt spread sheet, select cell A:1 (1) and drag the cursor to cell F:12 (2). All of the cells that have text are now highlighted.
E
Choose EditCopy. Choose WindowWorksheet in Part Family - HEXBOLT_FAM. In the HEXBOLT_FAM spread sheet, select cell A:2. Choose EditPaste. Step 5: Verify a family member Select a cell in row 13. From the spreadsheet menu bar choose PartFamilyVerify Part. The NX session becomes active and the family member is displayed in the graphics window. Notice that the safety wire holes are not present; in this family member the hole feature is suppressed.
Choose Resume in the Part Families dialog. Step 6: Save the Part Family and the template part. From the spreadsheet menu bar, choose PartFamilySave Family. The Save Family option internally stores the spreadsheet data within the template part le. It does not save the template part le itself. In order to save the template part containing this newly created Part Family Spreadsheet, you would also choose FileSave. Since we dont use this part anywhere else we are not going to do that. Step 7: Close all parts.
E-12
mt10055_g NX 4
Activity - Creating a Family of Standard Parts (Xess)

Windows users: Skip this activity. The most common use of Part Families is to dene a standard library part that has many variations. In this activity, you will create a part family for a hex bolt which has variations in head size and length. You will also use the feature attribute to suppress and unsuppress holes for safety wire. The template part has already been created for you. Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Open hexbolt_fam. Choose StartModeling and verify that the Assemblies application is enabled. Choose ApplicationModeling and verify that the Assemblies application is enabled. Dene the columns for the Family Table. Choose ToolsPart Families from the main menu bar. Make sure the Importable Part Family Template option is toggled off. Select the bolt_dia expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog.
E-13
Choose the Add Column button.
Select the head_dia expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog. Choose the Add Column button.
Instead of choosing, Add Column, you could just double-click on the expression, i.e. head_dia. Double-click on the head_height expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog. Double-click on the length expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog. Change the option menu at the top of the dialog from Expressions to Features. Double-click on WIRE_HOLES[0](23)/SIMPLE_HOLE(23) from the top list of the Part Families dialog. The order in which you select the attributes determines the order of columns in the spreadsheet. Step 5: Create the family table. Choose the Create button from the bottom portion of the Part Families dialog.
E-14 Design Applications Using NX UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved mt10055_g NX 4
To expedite lling in the spreadsheet, you will import a text le that has been created for you. With MB1 select cell A2 as shown below.
From the Spreadsheet menu, choose FileImport. From your parts directory, select the hexbolt_fam_unix.txt le and choose OK.
Step 6:
Verify a family member Select a cell in row 13. From the spreadsheet menu bar choose PartFamilyVerify Part. The NX session becomes active and the family member is displayed in the graphics window.
E-15
Notice that the safety wire holes are not present; in this family member the hole feature is suppressed. Choose Resume in the Part Families dialog. Step 7: Save the Part Family and the template part. From the spreadsheet menu bar choose PartFamilySave Family. The Save Family option internally stores the spreadsheet data within the template part le. It does not save the template part le itself. In order to save the template part containing this newly created Part Family Spreadsheet, you would also choose FileSave. Since we dont use this part anywhere else we are not going to do that. Step 8: Close all parts.
E-16
mt10055_g NX 4
Summary
Part families allow you to quickly generate a family of similar parts based on a single template part. You utilized Part Families to dene standard parts. In this lesson you: Demonstrated an understanding of the capabilities and concepts of Part Families. Dened a Part Family for a standard part. Created Family Member parts from a template part.
E-17
Index
A Animate Sketch Dimension . Assemblies reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . session where used . . . update . . . . . . . . . . . . where used . . . . . . . . Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . Assembly Property Page . . Attributes Property Page . Drag and Drop . . . . . . . . . General Property Page . . . Parameters Property Page Part File Property Page . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Columns . . . . . Weight Property Page . . . . B Blend Variable Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 C Check Clearances . . . . . . . Component substitute . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Arrays creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . feature-based . . . . . . . . . Component parts close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy/Paste Feature . . . . . . Creating a New Component Customer Defaults Directory Structures . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 . . . . . 21-20 . . . . . . 19-2 . . . . . . 19-4 . . . . . . 19-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-17 21-18 . 6-17 . 10-3 . . . . . 3-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7 21-8 21-7 21-7 . 7-4 7-19 7-20 . 7-9 7-24 7-21 7-23 7-14 7-13 7-22 D
DPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3, B-6 Setting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Delete Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Designing in Context of an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 E Edit Dening String . . . . . . . . Expressions Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditional . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog with less options . . . Dialog with more options . . Edit Interpart Links . . . . . . functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interpart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurements . . . . . . . . . . operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . precedence and associativity Extract Geometry . . . . . . . . . Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F Family of Parts adding members to assembly concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . procedure for creating . . . . . . report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4 20-2 . E-2 20-3 20-7 . E-5 20-3 B-12
Index-1
. . . . . 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 5-22 . 5-3 . 5-4 11-8 . C-5 11-2 . 5-7 11-9 5-33 . C-2 . C-3 14-2 14-4
. . . . . . . B-8
Index
example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 I Information Part Modications . . . . Interpart Expressions . . . overriding . . . . . . . . . . . partial loading issues . . referencing . . . . . . . . . . tips and recommended practices . . . . . . . . . Interpart Modeling . . . . . enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . L Load Options Allow Substitution . . . . . . . . . . 21-20 revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13 search directories . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 M Mating Alternates . . . . . . . . . . . Mating Conditions Remember Mating Constraints Mating Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 P Part in Process Modeling . . . . . . . 10-27 Part Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5 Promotion of Bodies enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 R Reference Sets Creating . . . Deleting . . . Editing . . . . Empty . . . . Entire Part .
Index-2
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. 21-5 . 11-2 . 11-4 11-14 . 11-3
. . . . . . 11-15 . . . . . . 10-11 . . . . . . . B-11
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . Lightweight . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remember Mating Constraints Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . load options and . . . . . . . . . partial loading . . . . . . . . . . using Save As . . . . . . . . . . . S
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
8-15 . 8-7 8-29 . 8-5 8-19 . 8-8 18-2 21-2 21-13 21-16 . 21-3
. 21-31 . . . . . . . . 18-2 . D-2 . 6-2 . 6-9
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. 8-2 8-12 8-28 8-27 . 8-4 . 8-3
Search Directories . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Components . . . . . . . . Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . Simplify Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketch Add Existing Curves . . . . . . . . Alternate Solution . . . . . . . . . Automatic Constraint Creation Constraining . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert To/From Reference . . . Create Inferred Constraints . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reattach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show/Remove Constraints . . . Sketch on Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketching in Context . . . . . . . . . Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substituting components . . . . . . using Reopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . using Substitute . . . . . . . . . . . using the Assembly Navigator . Suppress Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppression by Expression . . . . . T
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-31 . 7-5 . 1-8 14-7
1-47 . 2-2 1-33 . 1-2 . 1-5 1-52 1-16 . 1-2 1-13 2-62 2-11 1-34 2-38 2-40 . 1-8 . 4-7 10-10 . . 4-2 21-20 21-24 21-22 21-25 . . 3-4 . 5-23
Top-Down Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

mt10055_g NX 4
Index
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 U Unique Identier (UID) . . . . . . . Using Deformable Parts . . . . . . . Using Flexible Components . . . . Deforming a Component in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-20 . . . 9-3 . . . 9-3 . . 9-10
V V-sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Radius Blends tips and techniques . . Versioning Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8, 4-10 . . . 17-2 . . . 17-5 . . . B-12
Index-3
This page left blank intentionally.
UGS Education Services offers a blend of training solutions for all of our product lifecycle management products. Our Online Store Learning Advantage was developed to provide our customers with just in time training for the latest in application developments. Here are some of the Learning Advantages: Customers have direct access Self-paced course layout Online Assessments Just in time training for the latest release
L E A R N I N G A D V A N T A G E
To learn more about the Learning Advantage visit our website http://training.ugs.com or email us at training @ugs.com
STUDENT PROFILE
In order to stay in tune with our customers we ask for some background information. This information will be kept confidential and will not be shared with anyone outside of Education Services.
Please Print
Your Name Course Title/Dates

Hotel/motel you are staying at during your training Planned departure time on last day of class
U.S. citizen / thru
Yes
No
Employer Your title and job responsibilities Industry: Auto Aero Consumer products /
Location
Machining
Tooling
Medical
Other
Types of products/parts/data that you work with Reason for training

Please verify/add to this list of training for Unigraphics, I-deas, Imageware, Teamcenter Mfg., Teamcenter Eng. (I-Man), Teamcenter Enterprise (Metaphase), or Dimensional Mgmt./Visualization. Medium means Instructor-lead (IL), On-line (OL), or Self-paced (SP)
Software
From Whom
When
Course Name
Medium
Other CAD/CAM/CAE /PDM software you have used
Please check! your ability/knowledge in the following

Subject CAD modeling CAD assemblies CAD drafting CAM CAE PDM data management PDM system management Platform (operating system) None Novice Intermediate Advanced
Thank you for your participation and we hope your training experience will be an outstanding one.
Design Applications Using Unigraphics Course Agenda

Monday Morning Introduction & Overview Lesson 1. Constraining Sketches Lesson 2. Constraint Management Afternoon Workbook Project Description & Section 1 Inner Moldline of Bottom Housing Lesson 3. Additional Sketching Techniques Tuesday Morning Lesson 4. Lesson 5. Basic Free Form Expressions
Afternoon Lesson 6. Duplicating Features Workbook Section 2 Creating the Bottom Housing Wednesday Morning Lesson 7. Assembly Functions Lesson 8. Reference Sets Workbook Section 3 Creating the Assembly Part File Lesson 9. Deform Part Lesson 10. Top-Down Assembly Modeling Interpart Expressions Assembly Arrangements
Afternoon Lesson 11. Lesson 12. Thursday Morning
Lesson 13. Offset Curves Lesson 14. Extract & Simplify Workbook Section 4 Creating the Upper Housing Workbook Section 5 Creating the Impeller, Part 1 Lesson 15. Face Operations Lesson 16. Trim Body
Afternoon Workbook Section 6 Creating the Impeller, Part 2 Lesson 17. Variable Radius Blend Workbook Section 7 Creating the Impeller, Part 3 Lesson 18. Remember Mating Constraints Workbook Section 8 Creating the Impeller, Part 4 Workbook Section 9 Creating the Shaft Sub_Assembly
Continued on back
Friday Morning Lesson 19. Component Arrays Lesson 20. Part Families Workbook Section 10 Adding the Hardware to the Assembly Lesson 21. Revisions and Substitutions 11 12 13 14 15 Editing the Assembly Part File Providing a Second Arrangement Cut the Assembly Applying a Revision to the Assembly (Optional) Animate the Assembly with a Motion Sequence
Afternoon Workbook Section Workbook Section Workbook Section Workbook Section Workbook Section
Accelerators
The following Accelerators can be listed from within an NX session by choosing InformationCustom MenubarAccelerators. Function FileNew... FileOpen... FileSave FileSave As... FilePlot... FileExecuteGrip... FileExecuteDebug Grip... FileExecuteNX Open... EditUndo EditCut EditCopy Edit-Paste EditDelete... EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Feature EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Face EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Body EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Edge EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Component EditSelection-Select All EditBlankBlank... EditBlankReverse Blank All EditBlankUnblank Selected... EditBlankUnblank All of Part EditTransform... EditObject Display... ViewOperationZoom... ViewOperationRotate... ViewOperationSection... ViewLayoutNew... ViewLayoutOpen... ViewLayoutFit All Views ViewVisualizationHigh Quality Image... ViewInformation Window ViewCurrent Dialog ViewReset Orientation InsertSketch... InsertDesign FeatureExtrude... InsertDesign FeatureRevolve... InsertTrimTrimmed Sheet... Accelerator Ctrl+N Ctrl+O Ctrl+S Ctrl+Shift+A Ctrl+P Ctrl+G Ctrl+Shift+G Ctrl+U Ctrl+Z Ctrl+X Ctrl+C Ctrl+V Ctrl+D or Delete F G B E C Ctrl+A Ctrl+B Ctrl+Shift+B Ctrl+Shift+K Ctrl+Shift+U Ctrl+T Ctrl+J Ctrl+Shift+Z Ctrl+R Ctrl+H Ctrl+Shift+N Ctrl+Shift+O Ctrl+Shift+F Ctrl+Shift+H F4 F3 Ctrl+F8 S X R T
InsertSweepVariational Sweep... FormatLayer Settings... FormatVisible in View... FormatWCSDisplay ToolsExpression... ToolsJournalPlay... ToolsJournalEdit ToolsMacroStart Record... ToolsMacroPlayback... ToolsMacroStep... InformationObject... AnalysisCurveRefresh Curvature Graphs PreferencesObject... PreferencesSelection... StartModeling... StartAll ApplicationsShape Studio... StartDrafting... StartManufacturing... StartNX Sheet Metal... StartAssemblies StartGateway... HelpOn Context... Refresh Fit Zoom Rotate Orient View-Trimetric Orient View-Isometric Orient View-Top Orient View-Front Orient View-Right Orient View-Left Snap View
V Ctrl+L Ctrl+Shift+V W Ctrl+E Alt+F8 Alt+F11 Ctrl+Shift+R Ctrl+Shift+P Ctrl+Shift+S Ctrl+I Ctrl+Shift+C Ctrl+Shift+J Ctrl+Shift+T M or Ctrl+M Ctrl+Alt+S Ctrl+Shift+D Ctrl+Alt+M Ctrl+Alt+N A Ctrl+W F1 F5 Ctrl+F F6 F7 Home End Ctrl+Alt+T Ctrl+Alt+F Ctrl+Alt+R Ctrl+Alt+L F8
Cloning an Assembly
1. Choose Assemblies Cloning Create Clone Assembly. 2. Choose Add Assembly. 3. Navigate to the directory where the assembly file is located. 4. Select the assembly file and choose OK. 5. Choose the Naming tab. 6. Choose Define Naming Rule. 7. Choose the desired Naming Rule method and enter the required text strings. 8. Choose OK. 9. In the Default Output Directory text box, enter the address of where the cloned assembly is to reside. 10. Choose the Main tab. 11. Checkmark Dry Run on. 12. Choose Execute. 13. If there are no errors, close the information window and choose Execute.
Evaluation Delivery NX 4 DAU, Course #TR10055

Dates thru
SOMEWHAT DISAGREE SOMEWHAT AGREE STRONGLY DISAGREE STRONGLY AGREE Please share your opinion in all of the following sections with a check in the appropriate box:
If there were 2 instructors, please evaluate the 2nd instructor with Xs
Instructor:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. clearly explained the course objectives was knowledgeable about the subject answered my questions appropriately encouraged questions in class was well spoken and a good communicator was well prepared to deliver the course made good use of the training time conducted themselves professionally used examples relevant to the course and audience provided enough time to complete the exercises used review and summary to emphasize important information did all they could to help the class meet the course objectives
Comments on overall impression of instructor(s):

Overall impression of instructor(s) Suggestions for improvement of course delivery: Poor Excellent
What you liked best about the course delivery:
Class Logistics:
1. The training facilities were comfortable, clean, and provided a good learning environment 2. The computer equipment was reliable 3. The software performed properly 4. The overhead projection unit was clear and working properly 5. The registration and confirmation process was efficient Hotels: (We try to leverage this information to better accommodate our customers) 1. 2. 3. Name of the hotel Problem? (brief description) Best hotel Ive stayed at YES NO Was this hotel recommended during your registration process?
SEE BACK
AGREE
Instructor:
DISAGREE
Evaluation - Courseware NX 4 DAU, Course #TR10055

: SOMEWHAT DISAGREE SOMEWHAT AGREE STRONGLY DISAGREE STRONGLY AGREE DISAGREE
Please share your opinion for all of the following sections with a check in the appropriate box
Material:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The training material supported the course and lesson objectives The training material contained all topics needed to complete the projects The training material provided clear and descriptive directions The training material was easy to read and understand The course flowed in a logical and meaningful manner How appropriate was the length of the course relative to the material?
Too short
Too long
Just right
Comments on Course and Material:
Overall impression of course
Poor
Student:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I met the prerequisites for the class (I had the skills I needed) My objectives were consistent with the course objectives I will be able to use the skills I have learned on my job My expectations for this course were met I am confident that with practice I will become proficient
Name (optional):
Location/room
Please check this box if you would like your comments featured in our training publications. (Your name is required at the bottom of this form) Please check this box if you would like to receive more information on our other courses and services. (Your name is required at the bottom of this form)
Thank you for your business. We hope to continue to provide your training and personal development for the future.
AGREE
Excellent

Unigraphics NX Design Applications Using NX MT10055 (Student Guide)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unigraphics NX Design Applications Using NX MT10055 (Student Guide)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Applications Using NX

Student Guide February 2006 MT10055 NX 4

Publication Number mt10055_g NX 4

Constraint Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Alternate Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

. 8-2 . 8-3 . 8-5 . 8-7 . 8-8 . 8-9 8-12

Design Applications Using NX

. 15-2 . 15-3 . 15-7 15-11 15-21 15-27 15-37

Design Applications Using NX

21-25 21-26 21-31 21-32 21-33 21-40

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

How to Use This Course

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

How to Use This Course

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

About Part Files

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Classroom System Information

Classroom System Information

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Roles, Toolbars, and Menus

As you progress you may want to use more functions.

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Roles, Toolbars, and Menus

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Set the Role for this Course

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX

Concentric Constant Angle Constant Length

Equal Length Equal Radius Fixed

Design Applications Using NX

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using NX